Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

WO2022034816A1 - Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured object, color filter, and display device - Google Patents

Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured object, color filter, and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022034816A1
WO2022034816A1 PCT/JP2021/028530 JP2021028530W WO2022034816A1 WO 2022034816 A1 WO2022034816 A1 WO 2022034816A1 JP 2021028530 W JP2021028530 W JP 2021028530W WO 2022034816 A1 WO2022034816 A1 WO 2022034816A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
mass
general formula
parts
coloring material
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/028530
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
裕史 大島
亘 田尻
美嘉 境
Original Assignee
株式会社Dnpファインケミカル
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル filed Critical 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル
Priority to CN202180057622.6A priority Critical patent/CN116113649A/en
Priority to JP2022542802A priority patent/JPWO2022034816A1/ja
Publication of WO2022034816A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022034816A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F220/00Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F220/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
    • C08F220/10Esters
    • C08F220/26Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/033Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter, a cured product thereof, a color filter, and a display device.
  • Color filters are used in these liquid crystal displays and organic light emitting displays.
  • the light that has passed through the color filter is colored as it is in the color of each pixel constituting the color filter, and the light of those colors is combined to form a color image.
  • an organic light emitting element that emits white light or an inorganic light emitting element that emits white light may be used.
  • a color filter is used for color adjustment and the like. Under such circumstances, there is an increasing demand for color filters as well, such as higher brightness, higher contrast, and improved color reproducibility.
  • the color filter is generally formed on a transparent substrate, a colored layer formed on the transparent substrate and composed of colored patterns of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue, and on the transparent substrate so as to partition each colored pattern. It has a formed light-shielding portion.
  • a method for forming a colored layer in a color filter for example, a photosensitive colored resin composition obtained by adding a binder resin, a photopolymerizable compound and a photoinitiator to a color material dispersion liquid in which a color material is dispersed with a dispersant or the like. An object is applied to a glass substrate, dried, exposed with a photomask, and developed to form a colored pattern, and heated to fix the pattern to form a colored layer. These steps are repeated for each color to form a color filter.
  • Patent Document 1 contains a pigment, a binder resin, a polyfunctional monomer, a photoinitiator, a dispersant, and a solvent, and the binder resin contains an alkylcyclohexyl (meth) acrylate having an alkylcyclohexyl group and an acid group.
  • a colored photosensitive resin composition for a color filter which comprises a copolymer having a main chain structure obtained by at least copolymerizing a monomer having the same, and the hydroxyl value of the copolymer is in the range of 15 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g. Is disclosed.
  • Patent Document 1 describes that the colored photosensitive resin composition has a small amount of development residue in unexposed areas and a high residual film ratio in exposed areas.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition for forming a color filter is required to be able to form a high-luminance coloring layer. Therefore, it is considered to use a finely divided pigment as a coloring material, or to use a dye or a lake coloring material as a coloring material having a higher transmittance.
  • the present inventors have attempted to use a dye or a lake colorant as the colorant of the photosensitive coloring resin composition in order to increase the brightness of the color filter.
  • a photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material is used to form a colored layer pattern in which two or more colored layers such as red, green, and blue are arranged in a predetermined pattern, the colored layer pattern is formed. It was found that the in-pixel film thickness distribution became non-uniform and the flatness of the pixels was impaired.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and by containing at least one color material selected from dyes and lake color materials, it has high brightness, excellent flatness, and generation of development residue.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention is a photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter containing a coloring material, a binder resin, a monomer, a light initiator, and a solvent.
  • the coloring material contains at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials.
  • the binder resin has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the following general formula (A), has a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and has an acid value. Contains a copolymer of 60-130 mgKOH / g.
  • RA represents a methyl group or a hydrogen atom
  • RB represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the present invention provides a cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention.
  • the present invention is a color filter including at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, and at least one of the colored layers is a curing of the photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention. It provides a color filter, which is a thing.
  • the present invention provides a display device having the color filter according to the present invention.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter is provided. Further, according to the present invention, there is provided a cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition, and a color filter and a display device formed by using the photosensitive coloring resin composition.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing an example of the organic light emitting display device of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method for forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a pigment.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method for forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material.
  • the light includes electromagnetic waves having wavelengths in the visible and invisible regions, and further includes radiation, and the radiation includes, for example, microwaves and electron beams. Specifically, it refers to an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of 5 ⁇ m or less and an electron beam.
  • (meth) acryloyl represents each of acryloyl and methacrylic
  • (meth) acrylic represents each of acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth) acrylate represents each of acrylate and methacrylate.
  • "-" indicating a numerical range is used in the sense that the numerical values described before and after the numerical range are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the solid content is all the components other than the solvent among the components contained in the photosensitive coloring resin composition, and also includes liquid components such as monomers.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition for color filters according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “photosensitive colored resin composition”) is a coloring material, a binder resin, a monomer, and the like.
  • a photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter containing a light initiator and a solvent.
  • the coloring material contains at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials.
  • the binder resin has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) described later, has a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and is an acid.
  • a photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter which comprises a copolymer having a value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition according to the present invention contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a dye and a rake coloring material as a coloring material. Since the dye and the rake coloring material have higher transmittance than the pigment, a high-brightness coloring layer is used as the coloring material of the photosensitive coloring resin composition by using at least one selected from the group consisting of the dye and the rake coloring material. Can be formed. However, by applying a photosensitive colored resin composition on a substrate, exposing it in a predetermined pattern, and developing it to form a colored layer, a series of steps of changing the color of the coloring material are sequentially performed on one substrate.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method of forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a pigment.
  • FIG. 4 shows a step of forming the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G on the substrate in this order, and then forming the blue colored layer 3B.
  • 4 (a) of FIG. 4 shows a blue coating film using a blue photosensitive colored resin composition on a substrate provided with a light-shielding portion 2, a red colored layer 3R, and a green colored layer 3G, which are boundaries of each colored layer. It shows the state in which 3B'is formed.
  • the blue coating film 3B' follows the uneven shape of the coated surface, the height of the coating film surface is relatively low in the region forming the blue colored layer, and the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G. Then it will be relatively high. As long as it is limited to the region where the blue colored layer is formed, the thickness of the blue coating film 3B'is constant, and the surface thereof becomes flat according to the surface shape of the base. Next, the blue coating film 3B'is heated and dried. As shown in 4 (b) of FIG. 4, the blue coating film 3B'after heat-drying maintains the same shape as before heat-drying. After heat-drying, the blue coating film 3B'is exposed to a predetermined pattern, the region forming the blue colored layer is selectively cured, and then developed, as shown in 4 (c) of FIG. , A flat blue colored layer 3B is formed.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method of forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material.
  • FIG. 5 shows a step of forming the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G on the substrate in this order, and then forming the blue colored layer 3B.
  • 5 (a) of FIG. 5 shows a blue coating film using a blue photosensitive colored resin composition on a substrate provided with a light-shielding portion 2, a red colored layer 3R, and a green colored layer 3G, which are boundaries of each colored layer. It shows the state where 3B'is formed.
  • the blue coating film 3B'containing the dye or the rake coloring material has a blue-colored layer having a coating film surface height similar to that of the blue coating film 3B'containing the pigment of FIG. 4 (a). It is relatively low in the region forming the blue colored layer, and relatively high in the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G, but the blue coating film 3B'is limited to the region forming the blue colored layer.
  • the thickness is constant, and the surface of the surface follows the surface shape of the base and becomes flat.
  • the green colored layer 3G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the second colored layer formed on the substrate, and is the green colored layer 3G containing the pigment of FIG. 4 (a). Unlike, it has a shape that is inferior in flatness.
  • the blue coating film 3B' is heated and dried, the blue coating film flows by heating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), of the blue coating film 3B', the red colored layer 3R and the green color are used.
  • the portion where the height of the coating film surface existing in the region provided with the colored layer 3G is relatively high forms the boundary between the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the region forming the blue colored layer, and the green colored layer 3G. Beyond the boundary between the provided region and the region forming the blue colored layer, it flows into the portion where the height of the coating film surface existing in the region forming the blue colored layer is relatively low.
  • the blue coating film 3B'after heat drying loses the ability to follow the surface shape of the base, and is near the boundary between the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the region forming the blue colored layer, and the green colored layer 3G.
  • the surface of the coating film is relatively high near the boundary between the region where the blue color is formed and the region where the blue colored layer is formed, the surface of the coating film is relatively low in the central portion, and the surface shape is dented in the central portion as a whole. become.
  • the blue coating film is exposed to a predetermined pattern, the region forming the blue colored layer is selectively cured, and then developed, so that the center is shown in FIG. 5 (c). A blue colored layer 3B having a dented portion is formed.
  • the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin composition is described above in the heating and drying step. In the same way, it softens and flows, and loses its ability to follow the surface shape of the substrate. Therefore, a colored layer having a relatively high coating film surface near the boundary adjacent to the colored layer previously formed on the substrate is formed. Easy to form. For example, when a red coloring layer, a green coloring layer, and a blue coloring layer are formed in this order on a substrate by using a photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material, the green coloring layer is shown in FIG. As shown in 5 (a), the height of the coating film at the boundary portion adjacent to the red colored layer is relatively high, and the height of the coating film at the central portion and the portion far from the red colored layer is relatively low. Cheap.
  • the reason why the fluidity of the photosensitive coloring resin composition when the coating film is heated and dried differs depending on the coloring material used is that when a pigment is used as the coloring material, fine particles of the pigment are contained in the photosensitive coloring resin composition. Since it is dispersed, the viscosity does not decrease so much even if the coating film softens during heating and drying, whereas when a dye or lake coloring material is used as the coloring material, the dye or lake color is added to the photosensitive coloring resin composition. It is presumed that since the material is dissolved or dispersed in a state of being finer than the pigment particles, the viscosity decreases and the fluidity increases when the coating film softens during heating and drying.
  • the above-mentioned problem peculiar to the case where a dye or a rake coloring material is used as the coloring material of the photosensitive coloring resin composition is solved by a configuration derived from a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) described later.
  • a copolymer having a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of units, a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and an acid value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g hereinafter, “hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer weight”. It may be referred to as "coalescence”), which can be solved by using a binder resin.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition formed on the substrate is coated. Since the increase in fluidity is suppressed when the film is heated and dried, the flatness of the coating film when the photosensitive colored resin composition is applied to the substrate is easily maintained even after heating and drying, and is excellent in flatness. A colored layer having a different shape is formed.
  • the binder resin containing the above hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is used, the reason why the colored layer having an excellent flatness is formed is presumed as follows.
  • the amount of the solvent in the coating film is reduced and the intermolecular distance between the binder resin molecules is reduced, and the influence of hydrogen bonds on the binding force between the binder resin molecules is affected. Increase.
  • the content of the constituent units derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate is adjusted to an appropriate range, so that the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin composition is heated.
  • the viscosity of the softened coating film is increased by the effect of promoting hydrogen bonds between the binder resin molecules by the hydroxyl group of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, thereby suppressing the fluidization of the coating film. It is thought that it can be done. Further, since the weight average molecular weight of the above-mentioned hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is adjusted to an appropriate range, the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is softened when the coating film is heated and dried. It is considered that the viscosity of the film can be increased by the molecular weight effect to suppress the fluidization of the coating film.
  • a method of using another resin having a high melt viscosity as a binder resin and another method of promoting hydrogen bonding in the binder resin have other functional groups.
  • a method of using a resin as a binder resin is also conceivable, but the above-mentioned hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer can effectively flatten the shape of the colored layer with a relatively small amount, and is colored. It is excellent in that it does not adversely affect the color tone of the layer.
  • the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is adjusted to an appropriate range.
  • the development residue can be reduced.
  • the higher the acid value of the binder resin the easier it is for hydrogen bonds to be formed in the binder resin. Therefore, according to the above explanation, the higher the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the higher the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer.
  • the effect of flattening the shape of the colored layer can be improved.
  • the shape of the colored layer is effective by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer and the content of the constituent units derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate to an appropriate range. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer extremely high from the viewpoint of flattening the colored layer, and it is appropriate from the viewpoint of reducing the development residue. Range can be set.
  • the coloring material means a coloring material capable of dissolving an effective amount capable of exhibiting a coloring function in a solvent.
  • the rake coloring material is a dye that has been raked with a rake agent.
  • the dye and the rake colorant are at least selected from the group consisting of the dye and the rake colorant because they are dissolved in a matrix such as a binder resin or dispersed in the form of extremely fine particles and do not impair the transparency of the composition.
  • the dye and rake coloring material used in the present invention are not particularly limited.
  • the dyes include azo dyes, metal complex salt azo dyes, anthraquinone dyes, triarylmethane dyes, xanthene dyes, cyanine dyes, naphthoquinone dyes, quinoneimine dyes, methine dyes, phthalocyanine dyes and the like.
  • the rake coloring material include those obtained by rake-forming the above dyes with a rake agent.
  • the rake agent is appropriately selected and used according to the dye, and the anionic dye (acid dye) is a compound that produces a counter cation of the dye as the rake agent, and the cationic dye (basic dye) is used.
  • a compound that produces a counter anion of the dye is used as the rake agent.
  • known ones can be used, and the rake agent used for the cationic dye (basic dye) is not particularly limited, but the rake agent used is, for example, an alkali metal salt of an organic anion or the like.
  • the rake color material used in the present invention includes, for example, a rake color material in which a monovalent or divalent or higher cation dye (basic dye) and a divalent or higher polyanion form a salt, and a monovalent rake color material.
  • a lake color material or the like in which a divalent or higher anionic dye (acidic dye) and a divalent or higher polycation form a salt can be preferably used.
  • the dye and rake color material used in the present invention include dyes described in JP-A-2015-96947, blue dyes described in JP-A-2016-27149, and JP-A-2017-160099. Examples thereof include a compound (Aa) and a dye (Ab), which are lake coloring materials described in Japanese Patent Publication No.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains a lake coloring material, it is easy to suppress the generation of development residue even if the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is relatively large.
  • the lake color material has a high affinity with hydroxyl groups due to its acid-base salt structure, the lake color material is more compatible with hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers than dyes and pigments. Is good.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains a rake coloring material and a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer in combination, the solubility in a developing solution is made uniform, so that the developing material is developed. The generation of residue can be suppressed.
  • the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is within the preferable range described later, the compatibility with the rake coloring material is further improved, so that the effect of suppressing the development residue is particularly excellent.
  • triarylmethane-based or xanthene-based lake coloring materials are preferable because they can easily improve the brightness and heat resistance of the colored layer. It is particularly preferable to include a rake coloring material of a triarylmethane dye because high brightness can be achieved at the time of blue toning and heat resistance is easily improved.
  • the triarylmethane dye and the xanthene dye used for the rake coloring material can be appropriately selected from known dyes, and are not particularly limited. Examples of the triarylmethane dye include C.I. I. Basic blue 7, 8, 11, 26 and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the xanthene dye include C.I. I.
  • Xanthene acid dyes such as Acid Violet 9, 30, 102, Sulforhodamine G, Sulforhodamine B, Sulforhodamine 101, Sulforhodamine 640; C.I. I. Examples thereof include xanthene-based basic dyes such as Basic Violet 11.
  • the rake coloring material used in the present invention may have only one color-developing portion, but if it has two or more color-developing portions, it is colored with higher luminance and excellent heat resistance. It is preferable because a layer can be obtained.
  • the rake coloring material having two or more color-developing parts may be a material in which a plurality of dye molecules having one color-developing part are ionically bonded to a rake agent, or a plurality of color-developing parts may be formed.
  • One dye molecule having a dye molecule may be ionically bonded to a rake agent, or a plurality of dye molecules having a plurality of color-developing sites may be ionically bonded to the rake agent.
  • the coloring material used in the present invention preferably contains a rake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2). It is more preferable to include a rake colorant represented by the following general formula (1).
  • the rake color material represented by the following general formula (1) is a rake color material in which a divalent or higher cationic dye (basic dye) and a divalent or higher polyacid anion form a salt, and the following general formula is used.
  • the rake color material represented by (2) is a rake color material in which two or more monovalent cation dyes and a divalent or more polyacid anion form a salt.
  • a dye molecule that does not form a salt with the polyacid anion may be generated, and particularly when the number of cations and the number of anions are different in the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1).
  • Dye molecules that do not form salts with polyacid anions are likely to occur.
  • Dye molecules that do not form salts with polyacid anions can form salts with acidic groups in hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers.
  • the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2) in addition to the fact that the salt structure of the acid and the base has a high affinity with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the above-mentioned copolymer.
  • the rake represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2) Since the dye molecule that does not form a salt with the polyacid anion can form a salt with the structural unit having an acidic group in the above-mentioned copolymer, the rake represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2).
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention containing a coloring material a composite in which the rake coloring material and the copolymer are associated is formed, and the effect of inhibiting thermal motion is increased, so that the heat resistance is improved. It is estimated that.
  • the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2) also has a salt structure of an acid and a base, so that the compatibility with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is high.
  • A is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N does not have a ⁇ bond, and the organic group is at least saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon at the terminal directly bonded to N. It represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a hydrogen group or an aromatic group having the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and a hetero atom may be contained in the carbon chain.
  • B c- represents a c-valent polyacid anion.
  • R i to R v each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and represents R ii and R ii i , and R iv and R.
  • R vi and R vii may independently have an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano. Representing a group.
  • Ar 1 represents a divalent aromatic group which may have a substituent.
  • a plurality of Ri to R vii and Ar 1 may be the same or different from each other.
  • a and c represent integers of 2 or more, and b and d represent integers of 1 or more.
  • e is 0 or 1, and when e is 0, there is no bond.
  • f and g represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and f + e and g + e are 0 or more and 4 or less.
  • the plurality of e, f, and g may be the same or different from each other.
  • the coloring material represented by the general formula (1) contains a divalent or higher anion and a divalent or higher cation, in the aggregate of the coloring material, the anion and the cation are simply one molecule to one molecule.
  • the apparent molecular weight is significantly increased compared to the molecular weight of the conventional rake coloring material because it is possible to form a molecular assembly in which a plurality of molecules are associated via an ionic bond instead of being ionic bonded in the above. ..
  • the formation of such molecular aggregates further enhances the cohesive force in the solid state, reduces thermal motion, suppresses the dissociation of ion pairs and the decomposition of cations, and is less likely to fade than conventional lake coloring materials. Presumed.
  • a in the general formula (1) is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N (nitrogen atom) does not have a ⁇ bond, and the organic group is saturated at least at the terminal directly bonded to N.
  • Heteroatoms may be contained. That is, the organic group has a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at least at the terminal directly bonded to N, and a heteroatom such as O, S, N may be contained in the carbon chain.
  • the carbon atom directly bonded to N does not have a ⁇ bond, the color characteristics such as color tone and transmittance of the cationic color-developing site are not affected by the linking group A and other color-developing sites, and are not affected by the monomer. Similar colors can be retained.
  • an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at least at the terminal directly bonded to N is linear, branched or cyclic if the carbon atom at the terminal directly bonded to N does not have a ⁇ bond. Any of these may be used, carbon atoms other than the terminal may have an unsaturated bond, or may have a substituent, and the carbon chain contains O, S, and N. May be good.
  • a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an amide group and the like may be contained, and a hydrogen atom may be further substituted with a halogen atom or the like.
  • the aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at a terminal that is directly bonded to at least N. It may be mentioned and may have a substituent, and may be a heterocycle containing O, S, N. Above all, from the viewpoint of skeletal robustness, A preferably contains a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic group.
  • Examples of the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group include a group containing cyclohexane, cyclopentane, norbornane, bicyclo [2.2.2] octane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane, and adamantane. ..
  • Examples of the aromatic group include a group containing a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring.
  • A is a divalent organic group, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aromatic group in which two alkylene groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a xylylene group are substituted is substituted. And so on.
  • A has two or more cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and is directly bonded to N from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance by achieving both robustness and freedom of molecular movement. It is preferable that the aliphatic hydrocarbon group has a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group and O, S, and N may be contained in the carbon chain.
  • A is an aliphatic hydrocarbon having two or more cycloalkylene groups, having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N, and may contain O, S, N in the carbon chain. It is more preferably a group, and more preferably has a structure in which two or more cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups are linked by a linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the two or more cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups may be the same or different from each other.
  • the same group as the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group can be mentioned, and cyclohexane and cyclopentane are preferable.
  • A is a substituent represented by the following general formula (1a).
  • R xi has an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms as a substituent, or an alkylene group having 1 or more and 3 or less carbon atoms which may have an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms.
  • R xii and R xiii independently represent an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, p is an integer of 1 or more and 3 or less, and q and r are independent of each other. Represents an integer of 0 or more and 4 or less.
  • the plurality of R xi , R xii , R xiii and r may be the same or different from each other. .
  • Examples of the alkylene group having 1 or more and 3 or less carbon atoms in R xi include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group and the like from the viewpoint of excellent compatibility between fastness and thermal motion of the colored portion and improvement in heat resistance. Of these, a methylene group or an ethylene group is preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group, which may be linear or have a branch.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group and a butoxy group, which may be linear or have a branch.
  • alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms and the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms in R xii and R xiii are the same as the substituents that R xi may have.
  • the number of cyclohexane (cyclohexylene group) is 2 or more and 4 or less, that is, p is 1 or more and 3 or less, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, and p is 1 or more and 2 or less. Is more preferable.
  • the number of substitutions of the substituents R xii and R xiii contained in the cyclohexylene group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more and 3 or less, and preferably 1 or more and 2 or less, from the viewpoint of heat resistance. Is more preferable. That is, q and r are preferably integers of 1 or more and 3 or less, and q and r are preferably integers of 1 or more and 2 or less.
  • linking group A examples include, but are not limited to, the following.
  • the alkyl group in R i to R v is not particularly limited.
  • a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms can be mentioned, and among them, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms can be mentioned, and the number of carbon atoms is 1.
  • the linear or branched alkyl group of to 5 is mentioned from the viewpoint of brightness and heat resistance, and the alkyl group in Ri to Rv is an ethyl group or a methyl group.
  • the substituent which the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group and the like, and the substituted alkyl group is an aralkyl group such as a benzyl group. And so on.
  • the aryl group in R i to R v is not particularly limited. For example, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group and the like.
  • R i to R v are independently bonded to a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or R ii and R ii , and R iv and R v . It is preferable to form a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, and a morpholine ring.
  • At least one of R ii to R v is a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent. Since at least one of Rii to Rv has a cycloalkyl group or an aryl group, the intramolecular interaction due to steric hindrance is reduced, and the influence on the heat of the color-developing site can be suppressed. Considered to be excellent.
  • R ii to R v is a substituent represented by the following general formula (1b) or the following general formula (1c).
  • R xiv , R xv , and R xvi may each independently have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, or a substituent. It represents a good alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms.
  • R xvii , R xviii , and R xix may each independently have a hydrogen atom and a substituent, even if they have an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, or a substituent. It represents a good alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms in R xiv , R xv , R xvi , R xvii , R xviii , and R xix include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group, and are linear. It may be present or have a branch.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group and a butoxy group, which may be linear or have a branch.
  • Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may have include a halogen atom and a hydroxyl group.
  • R xiv , R xv , and R xvi may have a substituent having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
  • R xvii , R xviii , and R xix may have a substituent having 1 or more carbon atoms 4 from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
  • the following alkyl group or alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferable, and at least one of R xvii and R xviii may have a substituent and has 1 carbon number. It is more preferable that the alkyl group has 4 or less or an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • substituent represented by the general formula (1b) and the substituent represented by the general formula (1c) include, but are not limited to, the following.
  • R vi and R vii each represent an alkyl group which may independently have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano group.
  • the alkyl group in R vi and R vii is not particularly limited, but is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms. It is more preferable to have.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group, which may be linear or have a branch.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and an alkoxy group.
  • the alkoxy group in R vi and R vii is not particularly limited, but is preferably a linear or branched alkoxy group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms, and has 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms. It is more preferable that it is a group.
  • Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group and a butoxy group, which may be linear or have a branch.
  • the substituent that the alkoxy group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the halogen atom in R vi and R vii include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the number of substitutions of R vi and R vii that is, f and g independently represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and among them, 0 or more and 2 or less are preferable, and 0 or more and 1 or less are more preferable.
  • the plurality of f and g may be the same or different from each other.
  • R vi and R vii may be substituted with any site of a triarylmethane skeleton or an aromatic ring having a resonance structure in a xanthene skeleton, and among them, -NR ii R ii or -NR iv . It is preferable that the amino group is substituted at the meta position based on the substitution position of the amino group represented by Rv .
  • the divalent aromatic group in Ar 1 is not particularly limited.
  • the aromatic group in Ar 1 may be a heterocyclic group as well as an aromatic hydrocarbon group composed of a carbon ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbons in the aromatic hydrocarbon group include fused polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons such as naphthalene ring, tetraline ring, inden ring, fluorene ring, anthracene ring, and phenanthrene ring, in addition to the benzene ring; biphenyl, terphenyl, and the like. Examples thereof include chain polycyclic hydrocarbons such as diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, and stilben.
  • the chain polycyclic hydrocarbon may have O, S, and N in the chain skeleton like diphenyl ether and the like.
  • the heterocycles in the heterocyclic group include 5-membered heterocycles such as furan, thiophene, pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole and pyrazole; and 6-membered heterocycles such as pyran, pyrone, pyridine, pyrone, pyridazine, pyrimidine and pyrazine.
  • Condensed polycyclic heterocycles such as benzofuran, thionaphthene, indol, carbazole, coumarin, benzo-pyrone, quinoline, isoquinoline, acridin, phthalazine, quinazoline, quinoxalin and the like can be mentioned.
  • aromatic groups may further have an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, a phenyl group which may be substituted with these, or the like as a substituent.
  • a plurality of R i to R vii and Ar 1 in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • the desired color can be adjusted by the combination of R i to R vii and Ar 1 .
  • the valence a in A is the number of color-developing cation sites constituting the cation, and a is an integer of 2 or more.
  • a is an integer of 2 or more.
  • the upper limit of a is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of ease of production, a is preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
  • the cation portion has excellent heat resistance and color change during heating is easily suppressed. Therefore, the molecular weight is preferably 1200 or more, and preferably 1300 or more. preferable.
  • the anion portion (B c ⁇ ) is a c-valent polyacid anion and is a divalent or higher anion because of its high brightness and excellent heat resistance.
  • the polyacid anion in which a plurality of oxo acids are condensed may be an isopolyacid anion ( MmOn ) c- or a heteropolyacid anion ( XlMmOn ) c- .
  • M represents a poly atom
  • X represents a hetero atom
  • m represents a composition ratio of a poly atom
  • n represents a composition ratio of an oxygen atom
  • l represents a composition ratio of a hetero atom.
  • the poly atom M include Mo, W, V, Ti, Nb and the like.
  • the heteroatom X include Si, P, As, S, Fe, and Co.
  • a counter cation such as Na + or H + may be partially contained.
  • a polyacid having one or more elements selected from tungsten (W) and molybdenum (Mo) is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance.
  • examples of such polyacids include tungstate ion [W 10 O 32 ] 4- , molybdenum acid ion [Mo 6 O 19 ] 2- which is an isopoly acid, and phosphotung acid ion [W 10 O 19] which is a heteropoly acid.
  • the polyacid containing at least one of tungsten (W) and molybdenum (Mo) is preferably a heteropolyacid among the above, from the viewpoint of heat resistance and easy availability of raw materials, and further, phosphorus (P). ) Is more preferable. Further, it is heat resistant to be one of lintangustomolybdate ion [PW 10 Mo 2 O 40 ] 3- , [PW 11 Mo 1 O 40 ] 3- , and phosphotungstic acid ion [PW 12 O 40 ] 3- . It is more preferable from the viewpoint of.
  • b represents the number of cations
  • d represents the number of anions in the molecular assembly
  • b and d represent integers of 1 or more.
  • b represents the number of cations
  • d represents the number of anions in the molecular assembly
  • b and d represent integers of 1 or more.
  • b is 2 or more
  • a plurality of cations in the molecular assembly may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • d is 2 or more
  • a plurality of anions in the molecular assembly may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • b and d in the general formula (1) are integers different from each other from the viewpoint that the heat resistance can be easily improved by the combination with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer.
  • the dye molecule which is a cation easily interacts with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and the coloring material and the copolymer are separated from each other. Since the associated complex is likely to be formed, it is presumed that the effect of inhibiting thermal motion is increased and the heat resistance is improved.
  • E in the general formula (1) is 0 or an integer of 1, and when e is 0, there is no combination.
  • a plurality of e may be the same or different.
  • a material containing at least a triarylmethane skeleton is preferably used.
  • the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) can be prepared with reference to, for example, International Publication No. 2012/144520 Pamphlet and International Publication No. 2018/003706 Pamphlet.
  • the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • RI to RVI each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent
  • RI and R represent each. II , R III and R IV , R V and R VI may be bonded to form a ring structure.
  • R VII and R VIII may independently have an alkyl group and a substituent which may have a substituent. It represents an alkoxy group, a halogen atom or a cyano group which may have, Ar 2 represents a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and a plurality of RI to R VIII and Ar 2 are represented. They may be the same or different.
  • Em- represents an m-valent polyacid anion.
  • m represents an integer of 2 or more.
  • j is 0 or 1, and when j is 0, there is no bond.
  • k and l represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and k + j and l + j are 0 or more and 4 or less.
  • the plurality of j, k, and l may be the same or different.
  • RI to RVI each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and RI and R II . , R III and R IV , R V and R VI may be combined to form a ring structure.
  • R I to R VI may be the same as R i to R v of the above-mentioned general formula (1), respectively.
  • R VII and R VIII each independently represent an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano group, and these also represent.
  • Ar 2 represents a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and the Ar 2 is an aromatic among Ar 1 of the above-mentioned general formula (1). It may be the same as the group heterocyclic group.
  • Em- represents an m-valent polyacid anion, and the m-valent polyacid anion is the same as the c-valent polyacid anion of the above-mentioned general formula (1). Good.
  • m indicates the number of cations and the number of anions, and represents an integer of 2 or more.
  • the plurality of cations in the general formula (2) may be one type alone or a combination of two or more types. Further, as for the anion, one type may be used alone or two or more types may be combined.
  • j is 0 or 1, and when j is 0, no bond exists.
  • J in the general formula (2) may be the same as e in the above-mentioned general formula (1).
  • k and l in the general formula (2) may be the same as f and g in the above-mentioned general formula (1).
  • the rake color material represented by the general formula (2) can be prepared, for example, with reference to JP-A-2017-16099.
  • the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the coloring material used in the present invention may contain a plurality of types of coloring materials in order to adjust the hue.
  • the color material used in the present invention contains the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) and further contains another color material for adjusting the hue, the other color material is said.
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferred.
  • the xanthene-based dye used in combination with the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) may be any dye having a xanthene skeleton in the molecule, and a known xanthene-based dye is used. It can be, and there is no particular limitation. Among them, the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (3) or general formula (4) is preferable from the viewpoint of obtaining a high-luminance colored layer.
  • the brightness and light resistance of the colored layer can be improved by using the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (3).
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl groups or aryl groups, respectively, and R 3 and R 4 are independently aryl groups or hetero aryl groups, respectively.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) has xanthene as a basic skeleton, has only one functional group containing SO 2 , and is any of R 1 to R 4 bonded to a nitrogen atom. Also, since R 3 and R 4 are not hydrogen atoms but are aryl groups or heteroaryl groups, only saturated hydrocarbon groups are not bonded to the nitrogen atoms, and they do not have alkali metal ions. ..
  • the effect of improving the luminance and light resistance of the colored layer by using the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) having such characteristics is considered as follows, although there are some unexplained parts. Be done.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) has a cationic xanthene skeleton and one anionic —SO- 3 - group, it is electrically stabilized. Therefore, it is presumed that even if it is dispersed in a solvent, it does not dissociate and is excellent in stability. Further, since the nitrogen atom has an aromatic substituent such as an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, the isolated electron pair of the nitrogen atom resonates not only with the xanthene skeleton but also with the aryl group or the heteroaryl group. Therefore, it is presumed that the molecule becomes more stable.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is stable even under light irradiation and has excellent light resistance, and by using the coloring material, a colored layer having excellent light resistance is formed. It will be possible. Further, as a result of suppressing the fading of the coloring material, the brightness of the colored layer can be improved. Further, since the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) can have R 3 and R 4 different from each other, the range of molecular design is wide, and the range of adjustment of spectral characteristics and the like is also wide.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) has only one cationic xanthene skeleton and one anionic —SO 3 ⁇ group and has only an intramolecular salt, it is an alkali metal ion. Does not contain.
  • the colored layer is formed by using the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3), it is possible to suppress the elution of alkali metal ions from the colored layer to the liquid crystal layer when the liquid crystal panel is formed. Therefore, a colored layer having excellent electrical reliability can be obtained.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) has only one functional group containing SO 2 , the affinity with a low polar solvent such as PGMEA is high. Further, when the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) is dissolved in a solvent, a solvent having a relatively low polarity can be used, so that the stability of the photosensitive colored resin composition can be improved. can.
  • the alkyl group in R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, but for example, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent may be used. Among them, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, but for example, a halogen atom, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, a monovalent group represented by —CO—O—R a , —O—CO—R.
  • a monovalent group represented by a' a monovalent group represented by -SO 2 -R a " , a monovalent group represented by -R b -CO-OR c , -R b' - O- Examples thereof include a monovalent group represented by CO-R c'and a monovalent group represented by -R b" -SO 2 -R c " .
  • the aryl group in R 1 to R 4 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and among them, a group having a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and the like. Is preferable.
  • the heteroaryl group in R 3 and R 4 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a heteroaryl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and examples of the hetero atom include a nitrogen atom and an oxygen atom. , Those containing a sulfur atom are preferable. Specific examples of the heteroaryl group include furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyridine and the like.
  • the substituent which the aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have is not particularly limited, but is, for example, an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carbamoyl group, or a monovalent group represented by —CO—O—Ra.
  • the alkyl group in R 1 to R 4 is preferably unsubstituted or the substituent is preferably an aryl group, and the substituent of the aryl group or the heteroaryl group is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) has a lower polarity, so that the affinity for a low polar solvent such as PGMEA is improved.
  • a lower polar solvent can be used even when the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is dissolved in a solvent, and the stability of the photosensitive colored resin composition can be improved by using the low polar solvent. improves.
  • R 1 to R 4 may be the same or different from each other, and R 1 to R 4 of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) are symmetrical with respect to the xanthene ring. It may be asymmetrical. Above all, when R 3 and R 4 are different from each other, the range of molecular design of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is widened, and the range of adjustment of the spectral characteristics is also widened.
  • the substitution position of the -SO 3- group of the benzene ring bonded to the xanthene skeleton is not particularly limited, but is preferably the ortho-position or the para-position with respect to the xanthene skeleton.
  • -SO 3- Group is preferably substituted at the ortho position with respect to the xanthene skeleton from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) can be used by converting the —SO 3 ⁇ group into the ⁇ SO 3 H group.
  • the method for converting the -SO 3 -group to the -SO 3 H group is not particularly limited.
  • an acid treatment method using a weak acid liberation reaction, a method using a cation exchange resin, and the like can be mentioned.
  • an acid treatment method for example, a method of dissolving the coloring material in a good solvent such as methanol and a solvent in which the acid dissolves and adding an acid to convert -SO 3 - groups into -SO 3 H groups is used. Can be mentioned.
  • the acid used in the acid treatment method is not particularly limited as long as it is an acid having a higher acidity than the acid obtained by converting the -SO 3- group to the -SO 3 H group.
  • the highly versatile acid include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid (PTS), trifluoromethanesulfonic acid and the like.
  • examples of the ion exchange resin used in the method using a cation exchange resin include sulfonic acid-terminated cation exchange resins such as Diaion PK-216H (trade name manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation).
  • the sulfone oxidation treatment for converting the -SO 3- group of the coloring material into the -SO 3 H group is performed after the coloring material is dissolved in a good solvent, and the coloring material having a sulfo group (-SO 3 H) as a solid is used. It may be carried out when preparing a photosensitive colored resin composition, such as adding PGMEA or a dispersant without taking it out. Alternatively, after performing sulfonic oxidation of the coloring material, the coloring material having a sulfo group as a solid may be taken out by a reprecipitation method or a recrystallization method, and then a photosensitive colored resin composition may be prepared. Above all, the former method is preferable from the viewpoint of the recovery rate of the coloring material.
  • the method for producing the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is not particularly limited, and specific examples thereof include the following methods.
  • the sulfofluorane compound and the corresponding amine compound are refluxed in a solvent, and the reaction solution is filtered at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble matter, and then a part of the solvent is removed and poured into 6% hydrochloric acid. Then, after adding a large amount of water and stirring at room temperature for 30 minutes, the wet cake is collected by filtration. By washing this wet cake with water or hot water and then drying it, the coloring material of the above general formula (3) can be obtained.
  • the corresponding half of the amine compound is used.
  • a small amount is added dropwise to a highly diluted sulfofluorane compound methanol solution, and after the reaction, the remaining amine compound is added dropwise, or a 1: 1 solution of each amine compound is slowly added dropwise to the sulfofluorane compound methanol solution.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition according to the present invention by using the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (4), the generation of foreign substances can be suppressed and a colored layer having improved brightness is formed. be able to.
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and R 7 and R 8 are independent of each other.
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently directly bonded, -SO 2- , or -CO-, and R 9 is a halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Is the basis.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula ( 4 ) has xanthene as a basic skeleton and also has only one functional group containing a specific anion moiety of ⁇ L1 ⁇ N --L2 - R9. None of R 5 to R 8 having and bonded to a nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom, and R 7 and R 8 are aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocyclic groups, and at least one of R 7 and R 8 is used.
  • the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocyclic groups are substituted with aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and are characterized in that R 7 and R 8 are different from each other.
  • the xanthene-based dye represented by the above general formula (4) has a monovalent cationic xanthene skeleton and an anionic ⁇ L 1 ⁇ N - - L 2 ⁇ R 9 groups and one intramolecular. Since it has only a salt, it is easy to be electrically stabilized within one molecule.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has improved solvent solubility, and a colored resin composition containing the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is used. When the colored layer is formed, it is presumed that the generation of foreign matter is suppressed.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) since the nitrogen atom bonded to the xanthene skeleton is not directly bonded to the hydrogen atom, the hydrogen atom is desorbed from the nitrogen atom and the coloring material is unstable. Since the nitrogen atom has an aromatic substituent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, the lone electron pair of the nitrogen atom is not only the xanthene skeleton but also the said one. It has a highly stable molecular structure by resonating with an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has a highly stable molecular structure as described above, and therefore has good heat resistance.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 is replaced with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R Since 7 and R 8 are different from each other, the dyes are less likely to aggregate with each other, and foreign matter is less likely to be generated because the dyes are highly soluble in the solvent, so that the amount of transmitted light in the colored layer is not attenuated.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula ( 4 ) has different R7 and R8, and has a wide range of molecular design. Therefore, a wide range of adjustments such as spectral characteristics is possible. It is easy to bring it closer to chromaticity and further improve the brightness.
  • the heat resistance is good, so that the decrease in brightness after baking in the color filter manufacturing process is suppressed, and in the color filter manufacturing process. It is presumed that the brightness of the colored layer can be improved by suppressing the aggregation of dyes and the generation of foreign substances, and by designing the structure according to the desired chromaticity and adjusting the spectral characteristics and the like.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group in R5 and R6 may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is not particularly limited, but for example, it has 1 or more carbon atoms and 20 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include the following linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, or cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 5 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms (aliphatic hydrocarbon groups), and the number of carbon atoms is 10 or less. , Preferred from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
  • a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group which is a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferable.
  • the substituent that the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may have is not particularly limited, but is, for example, a halogen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a carbamoyl group, or a monovalent group represented by —CO—O—R d . , -O-CO-R d' , a monovalent group, -SO 2 -R d " , a -R e -CO-O-R f , a monovalent group, Examples thereof include a monovalent group represented by -R e'-O-CO-R f' , and a monovalent group represented by -R e " -SO 2 -R f" .
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group in R5 to R8 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more and 20 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and among them, a phenyl group. , A group having a naphthyl group or the like is preferable.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group in R7 and R8 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aromatic heterocyclic group having 5 or more and 20 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and examples of the heteroatom include, for example. Those containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable. Specific examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group include furan, thiophene, pyrrole, and pyridine.
  • the substituent which the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group may have is not particularly limited, but for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carbamoyl group, -CO-O.
  • -R d is a monovalent group
  • -O-CO-R d' is a monovalent group
  • -SO 2 -R d " is a monovalent group
  • R f the monovalent group represented by -R e'-O-CO-R f'
  • the monovalent group represented by -R e " -SO 2 -R f" etc.
  • R e , Re e' , Re e " , R d , R d' , R d" , R f , R f'and R f " indicate an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. These substituents are preferably used because they do not adversely affect heat resistance and the like. It is possible to adjust the spectral characteristics by adjusting the electron-withdrawing property and the electron-donating property of these substituents. Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group here may be the same as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group in R5 and R6 .
  • At least one of R5 and R6 is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R5 and R6 are aliphatics, from the viewpoint that the generation of foreign substances is suppressed and a colored layer having improved brightness is easily formed. It is preferably a hydrocarbon group, and more preferably a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 or more and 10 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms. At least one of R 7 and R 8 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and R 7 and R 8 are aromatic, from the viewpoint that the generation of foreign substances is suppressed and a colored layer having improved brightness is easily formed. It is preferably a hydrocarbon group.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms and 10 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group. Further, at least one of R 7 and R 8 which are aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocyclic groups which may have a substituent is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R 7 and R 8 are substituted. Are different from each other.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group substituted with the hydrogen atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 or more and 10 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms.
  • both R 7 and R 8 are substituted with the above-mentioned aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Further, at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 is replaced with two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon groups per aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group. This is preferable because the generation of foreign substances is suppressed and it is easy to form a colored layer having improved brightness.
  • any one of the aliphatic hydrocarbon groups contained in R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 is a linear alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms and 3 or more carbon atoms, it is contained in the molecule. It tends to be easy to adjust the electron density of.
  • R 5 and R 6 When at least one of R 5 and R 6 is substituted with a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group, at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 has a carbon number of carbon atoms.
  • R 7 and R 8 When substituted with two or more linear alkyl groups, the generation of foreign substances tends to be suppressed, and a colored layer with improved brightness tends to be easily formed.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably unsubstituted, or in the case of a branched or linear alkyl group, the substituent is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and is aromatic.
  • the substituent of the hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has a lower polarity, so that the affinity for a low polar solvent such as PGMEA is improved.
  • a lower polar solvent can be used even when the coloring material is dissolved in a solvent, and the use of the low polar solvent improves the stability of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention.
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently directly bonded, -SO 2- , or -CO-, and among them, -SO 2- or-. It is preferably CO-, and more preferably -SO 2- because it suppresses the generation of foreign substances, has excellent heat resistance, and easily forms a colored layer having improved brightness.
  • L 2 -R 9 in 9 groups is a halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and examples of the halogen include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, an iodine atom and the like, and among them, a fluorine atom. Is preferable.
  • the halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group of R9 is preferably a linear or branched halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms, and a linear or branched halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms.
  • the substitution rate of halogen atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more. Above all, it is preferably 100%.
  • the R 9 is preferably a linear or branched perfluoroalkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms.
  • the substitution position of the -L 1 -N --- L 2 -R9 group of the benzene ring bonded to the xanthene skeleton is not particularly limited, but the ortho position with respect to the xanthene skeleton. Alternatively, it is preferably in the para position, and the fact that the -L 1 - N --L 2 -R 9 groups are substituted in the ortho position with respect to the xanthene skeleton is the xanthene system represented by the general formula (4). It is preferable from the viewpoint of various resistances of dyes.
  • the method for producing the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is not particularly limited, and specific examples thereof include the following methods.
  • the sulfofluorane compound and the amine compound corresponding to R7 and R8 were refluxed in a solvent at 60 ° C., and the reaction solution was filtered at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble matter, and then a part of the solvent was removed. Pour into% hydrochloric acid. Then, after adding a large amount of water and stirring at room temperature for 30 minutes, the wet cake is collected by filtration. By washing this wet cake with water or hot water and then drying it, an intermediate of the dye represented by the above general formula (4) can be obtained.
  • the corresponding half of the amine compound is largely diluted.
  • the remaining amine compound is added dropwise, or a 1: 1 solution of each amine compound is slowly added dropwise to the sulfofluorane compound methanol solution.
  • a high yield and asymmetric dye intermediate represented by the general formula (4) can be obtained.
  • the intermediate of the dye represented by the general formula ( 4 ) was prepared with a halide corresponding to R5 and R6 in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate in a polar solvent such as 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, and 80.
  • the reaction is carried out at ° C. for 2 hours with stirring.
  • the reaction solution is allowed to cool to room temperature, and then the reaction solution is added dropwise to 17.5% hydrochloric acid at 0 to 10 ° C. and stirred for 1 hour.
  • the precipitate is collected by filtration and the residue is dried at 60 ° C. for 24 hours to obtain a precursor of the dye represented by the general formula (4).
  • trifluoromethylsulfonamide is dissolved in chloroform in the precursor of the asymmetric colorant of the general formula (4), and triethylamine is added dropwise to cause a reaction. Then, the obtained reaction solution is washed with water, and then the organic layer is separated.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) can be obtained by drying this organic layer with sodium sulfate, purifying it by column chromatography, and concentrating it under reduced pressure.
  • L 1 is represented by —CO—
  • a fluorane compound is used instead of the sulfofluorane compound, and the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) can be obtained in the same manner thereafter.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has high solvent solubility even in a low-polarity solvent, the concentration required for the colored layer application can be obtained without using a solvent having an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
  • the xanthene-based dye represented by the general formula (4) is at 23 ° C. with respect to at least one of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, and diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether.
  • the solubility of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is preferably 2.0 (g / 100 g solvent) or more, and more preferably 2.5 (g / 100 g solvent) or more.
  • the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the rake coloring material of the xanthene dye used in combination with the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the general formula (1) or the general formula.
  • a known xanthene-based dye rake color material different from the rake color material represented by the formula (2) can be used.
  • a metal lake colorant of a xanthene dye obtained by laking a xanthene dye with a rake agent containing a metal atom is preferably used because the colorant has excellent heat resistance and dispersibility and a high-brightness colored layer can be obtained. be able to.
  • the metal lake color material is a lake color material to which a metal is added as a lake agent.
  • the lake color of a xanthene dye different from the lake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) the lake color of a xanthene dye having a phenyl group at the 9-position of the xanthene skeleton.
  • the material is preferred.
  • a rake coloring material obtained by laking a xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (5) with a rake agent is preferably used, and in particular, a xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (5).
  • a metal rake coloring material raked by a rake agent containing a metal atom is preferably used.
  • R 2'and the 4-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, or R 4'and the 2-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure.
  • the above aryl group or heteroaryl group may form a ring structure.
  • the hydrogen atom to have may be substituted with an acidic group or a salt thereof, or a halogen atom.
  • R 5' represents an acidic group or a salt thereof, and x is an integer of 0 to 5.
  • the general formula ( 5) has at least two acidic groups or salts thereof, one of which forms an intramolecular salt.
  • alkyl group in R 1'to R 4' a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable. It is more preferable that the alkyl group is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group and a halogen atom.
  • the aryl group further has a halogen atom, an acidic group or a salt thereof as a substituent. You may be doing it.
  • aryl group in R 1'to R 4' an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a group having a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and the like is more preferable.
  • the heteroaryl group in R 1'to R 4' a heteroaryl group which may have a substituent having 5 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and the hetero atom includes a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom. Is preferable.
  • Examples of the substituent that the aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have include an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an acidic group or a salt thereof, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a nitrile group, a carbamoyl group, and a carboxylic acid. Examples include an ester group.
  • R 1'and R 3' , R 2'and R 4' are bonded to form a ring structure, respectively, that R 1'and R 3'and R 2'and R 4'have nitrogen atoms, respectively. It means that a ring structure is formed through the ring.
  • the ring structure is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a nitrogen-containing heterocycle having a 5- to 7-membered ring, and specific examples thereof include a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, and a morpholine ring.
  • the fact that the carbon atom at the 2-position is bonded to form a ring structure means that the above combination of R 1'to R 4'and the carbon atom at the predetermined position of the xanthene ring is one of a nitrogen atom and a xanthene skeleton, respectively. It means that a ring structure is formed through the portions.
  • the ring structure is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a nitrogen-containing heterocycle having a 5- to 7-membered ring.
  • the acidic group or a salt thereof include a carboxy group (-COOH), a carboxylato group (-COO-), a carboxylic acid base (-COOM, where M represents a metal atom), and a sulfonate group (-SO). 3- ), sulfo group (-SO 3 H), sulfonic acid base (-SO 3 M, where M represents a metal atom), etc., among others, sulfonato group (-SO 3- ), sulfo group. It is preferable to have at least one of (-SO 3 H) or a sulfonic acid base (-SO 3 M).
  • the metal atom M include a sodium atom and a potassium atom.
  • xanthene dye represented by the general formula (5) include acid red 50, acid red 52, acid red 289, acid violet 9, acid violet 30, and acid blue 19.
  • the rake agent used for rake formation of the metal rake coloring material of the xanthene dye may be any rake agent containing a metal atom.
  • a rake agent containing a metal atom having a divalent or higher valent metal cation is preferable, and specifically, barium chloride, calcium chloride, calcium carbonate, aluminum chloride, aluminum sulfate, and aluminum acetate.
  • a rake agent containing a metal atom which becomes a trivalent or higher metal cation is more preferable.
  • a rake agent containing aluminum is preferable because it is easy to synthesize the rake color material and is excellent in the dispersibility of the rake color material.
  • the metal lake color material of the xanthene dye the aluminum lake color material of the xanthene dye is preferable, and the aluminum lake color material of the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (5) is particularly preferable.
  • a rake agent containing aluminum as a trivalent cation, it is presumed that the cohesive force is stronger as a rake agent as compared with the rake agent containing a metal atom as a divalent metal cation. .. Therefore, the solubility of the raked xanthene dye in the solvent is greatly reduced, and the properties are closer to those of the pigment. Therefore, the dispersibility and heat resistance of the coloring material are excellent, and there is also an advantage that the rake coloring material can be easily recovered (filtered) at the time of manufacturing the coloring material.
  • polyaluminum chloride represented by the following general formula (6) is preferable because the heat resistance of the coloring material is excellent and the sublimation of the coloring material is easily suppressed. ..
  • n is an integer of 2 to 20
  • m is an integer of (n / 2) to (3n-1).
  • n represents the number of aluminum atoms, which is 2 to 20.
  • polyaluminum chloride which has a relatively small aluminum atom of 2 to 20, as a rake agent, the dispersed particle size of the coloring material does not become too large, and the dispersibility of the coloring material can be improved.
  • n is preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • m represents the number of hydroxy groups (OH ⁇ groups) and is an integer of (n / 2) to (3n-1).
  • n is an odd number
  • the lower limit of m is ⁇ (n + 1) / 2 ⁇ , which is the smallest integer in the above range.
  • the polyaluminum chloride as a whole has a (3 nm) valent cationic property.
  • the basicity is high, and m is an integer of 2n to (3n-1). Is preferable.
  • n is an integer of 2 to 10 and m is an integer of 2n to (3n-1). This is preferable because the contrast of the coating film is improved.
  • the polyaluminum chloride represented by the general formula (6) has higher heat resistance of the coloring material, is likely to suppress sublimation of the coloring material, and is likely to improve the dispersibility of the coloring material.
  • the basicity defined by m / 3n ⁇ 100 (%)) is preferably 15 to 99%, more preferably 60 to 97%, and even more preferably 70 to 95%.
  • I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is a copper phthalocyanine pigment having an ⁇ -type crystal structure, and is preferable because it is excellent in dispersion stability.
  • I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 may be subjected to basic treatment or acid treatment, and from the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility and storage stability, when the dispersant used in combination is acidic, it shall be basic treatment. When the dispersant used in combination is basic, it is preferably acid-treated. Above all, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferably basic-treated, and the basic-treated C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferably used in combination with an acidic dispersant.
  • a color material derivative having a basic moiety and a colorless compound derivative having a basic moiety are preferably used for the basic treatment.
  • the embodiment having a basic moiety includes an embodiment having a basic group as a substituent, an embodiment in which an acidic group and a basic compound are salt-formed in the substituent, and the like.
  • the basic moiety of the colorant derivative or the derivative of the colorless compound includes, for example, an amino group, an ammonium sulfonic acid salt, a sulfonamide group having an amino group, an amide group having an amino group, and a basic heterocycle. The group etc. can be mentioned.
  • the color material used for the color material derivative having a basic moiety a known color material can be appropriately selected and used. I. It is preferable to have a structure that easily adsorbs to Pigment Blue 15: 6, and it is preferable that it has the same or similar pigment skeleton or a structure that easily interacts with it. In addition, C.I. I. A coloring material that does not impair the color of Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferable. As the color material derivative having a basic moiety, a blue color material derivative is preferable.
  • a phthalocyanine color material As the blue color material used for the color material derivative having a basic moiety, a phthalocyanine color material, a triarylmethane color material, an anthraquinone color material, a naphthol color material, a benzimidazolone color material, or the like may be used. However, it is preferable to use a phthalocyanine-based coloring material from the viewpoint of color and heat resistance. Among them, C.I. I. It is preferable to use a phthalocyanine-based coloring material having the same skeleton as Pigment Blue 15: 6. Further, among them, copper phthalocyanine is preferably used as the blue color material used for the color material derivative having a basic portion from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility and brightness.
  • the colorless compound used for the derivative of the colorless compound having a basic moiety is C.I. I. Even if Pigment Blue 15: 6 was basicly treated with the derivative of the colorless compound, C.I. I. A compound that does not change the color of Pigment Blue 15: 6 can be used as a guide.
  • a condensed ring compound such as a naphthalene type or a triazine type or an aromatic polycyclic compound to which a plurality of aromatic rings are bonded can be used.
  • the triazine-based aromatic polycyclic compound include a structure in which a triazine ring is substituted with three substituents having an aromatic hydrocarbon group such as a phenylamino group. Above all, it is preferable to use a triazine-based aromatic polycyclic compound from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility and brightness.
  • C.I. with a structure derived from a basic compound I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, for example, C.I. I.
  • a coloring material derivative having a basic moiety and C.I. I. Examples thereof include a method in which Pigment Blue 15: 6 and Pigment Blue 15: 6 are dry-ground and then mixed with a coloring material derivative having a basic moiety.
  • a ball mill, a vibration mill, an attritor, or the like can be used as the dry crusher, and the crushing temperature can be freely set at 20 to 130 ° C.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 can be prepared by using a coloring material derivative having a basic moiety and C.I.
  • Pigment Blue 15 6 water-soluble inorganic salts such as sodium chloride, calcium chloride, and ammonium sulfate, and water-soluble organic solvents such as glycol-based organic solvents are mixed and kneaded with a kneader-type polishing machine by the solvent salt milling method. How to do it, etc.
  • water-soluble inorganic salts such as sodium chloride, calcium chloride, and ammonium sulfate
  • water-soluble organic solvents such as glycol-based organic solvents
  • C. including a colorant derivative having a basic moiety or a derivative of a colorless compound is C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6
  • the content of the colorant derivative having a basic moiety or the derivative of the colorless compound is C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6
  • the content of the color material derivative having a basic moiety or the derivative of the colorless compound is excellent in luminance, and thus C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 It is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 30 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 can be appropriately analyzed using, for example, mass spectrometry, elemental analysis, surface analysis, potentiometric titration, and combinations thereof.
  • the basic-treated C.I. I. Examples of the acid dispersant used in combination with Pigment Blue 15: 6 include the same acid dispersants that can be used in the colorant dispersion liquid described later.
  • the total content of the dye and the rake coloring material is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material from the viewpoint that the brightness of the colored layer is easily improved. It is more preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less.
  • the total amount of the coloring material is obtained from the viewpoint that a high-brightness colored layer can be obtained and the effect of suppressing the development residue is improved by improving the compatibility between the coloring material and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer.
  • the content of the rake coloring material is preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass.
  • the total content of the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material. It is preferably 100 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less.
  • the compatibility between the coloring material and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer It is also preferable from the viewpoint that the effect of suppressing the development residue is improved and the heat resistance is improved.
  • the coloring material contains a rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) in combination with a coloring material different from the rake coloring material, a desired color can be obtained. The color is adjusted to, but the effect of suppressing the development residue is improved by obtaining a high-brightness colored layer and improving the compatibility between the coloring material and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer.
  • the total content of the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is 20 parts by mass or more and 98 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material. It is preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and may be 30 parts by mass or more and 95 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring material is a rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), a xanthene dye, and a rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2).
  • the total content of the xanthene dye and the rake coloring material of the xanthene dye is 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material. From the viewpoint of obtaining a desired hue, it may be 2 parts by mass or more, 5 parts by mass or more, and on the other hand, from the viewpoint of suppressing deterioration of heat resistance, it is preferably 30 parts by mass or less. , 25 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring material is the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), and C.I. I. When Pigment Blue 15: 6 is included, C.I. I.
  • the content of Pigment Blue 15: 6 may be 20 parts by mass or more or 30 parts by mass or more from the viewpoint of obtaining a desired hue, while suppressing a decrease in brightness of the colored layer. , And, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of development residue and the deterioration of the heat resistance of the coloring material, it is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, and may be 70 parts by mass or less.
  • the content of the dye and the rake coloring material is usually 0.5% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less, and 1% by mass or more and 30% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention. It is preferably 2% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention has the above-mentioned C.I. I.
  • Other pigments different from Pigment Blue 15: 6 may be further used.
  • the other pigment various organic pigments and inorganic pigments conventionally used as colorants of color filters can be used, and the organic pigment is not particularly limited, but is excellent in color development and heat resistance. preferable.
  • the other pigments include blue pigments such as copper phthalocyanine pigments having an ⁇ -type or ⁇ -type crystal structure, and C.I. I.
  • a purple pigment such as Pigment Violet 23 is preferably used.
  • the copper phthalocyanine pigments having an ⁇ -type or ⁇ -type crystal structure C.I. I.
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4 and 15: 5 is preferably used.
  • the other pigments mentioned above are C.I. I. Similar to Pigment Blue 15: 6, it may be acid-treated or basic-treated in order to improve the dispersion stability.
  • the other pigments are preferably treated with a basic treatment, and when the dispersant used in combination is basic, they are preferably treated with an acid.
  • the above-mentioned other pigments are preferably used in an amount within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention.
  • the content of the other pigment is 25% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition, or the above is made with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the dye and the rake coloring material.
  • the content of other pigments is preferably 80 parts by mass or less. Further, the smaller of the above two upper limit amounts is set as a more preferable upper limit amount.
  • the binder resin contained in the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) described later.
  • a copolymer having a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more and an acid value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g (hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer) is contained.
  • the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is an alkali-soluble copolymer containing a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate in the chain structure of the polymer skeleton.
  • the polymer structure of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer may have a structure having only a main chain or a structure having a main chain and a side chain.
  • the main chain of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer typically has a chain structure in which the structural units generated by the addition polymerization of the monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond are linked, and further, the ethylenically unsaturated bond is obtained. It may contain a structural unit generated by addition polymerization or depolymerization of a monomer having a functional group other than the saturated bond.
  • the side chains of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers are typically via linking groups resulting from the reaction of functional groups on the backbone with the functional groups of the monomers to form the side chains.
  • the main chain It is bonded to the main chain and may be branched from the main chain via a carbon-carbon bond.
  • the reaction of the functional group on the main chain with the functional group of the monomer for forming the side chain to form the side chain for example, when a carboxy group is present on the main chain, the carboxy group may be used.
  • An ester linking group is formed by reacting a monomer having a glycidyl group, and a side chain composed of a structural unit derived from the monomer having a glycidyl group can be introduced.
  • a urethane linking group is formed by reacting the hydroxyl group with a monomer having an isocyanate group, and the side consisting of a structural unit derived from the monomer having an isocyanate group is formed.
  • Chains can be introduced.
  • the side chain may have a pendant structure having one structural unit of a monomer, or may have a polymer structure in which two or more structural units are connected.
  • the side chain has a polymer structure, it may consist only of a structural unit derived from a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, or addition polymerization of a monomer having a functional group other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer includes an acidic group that imparts alkali solubility and other functional groups such as an ethylenically double bond-containing group. It has, if necessary, atomic groups such as groups that regulate the molecular structure, such as bulky groups, which may be present in either the main chain or the side chains.
  • Suitable examples of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers include hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate-derived structural units, structural units with acidic groups, bulky groups, and optionally other components. Examples thereof include a copolymer in which a side chain containing a structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated bond is bonded to a main chain containing a structural unit.
  • alkali solubility is imparted by an acidic group on the main chain, and crosslinkability is imparted by a photopolymerizable functional group of the side chain.
  • the binder resins or the binder resin and the photopolymerizable compound are used in the curing step of the resin composition at the time of producing a color filter. Certain monomers and the like can form crosslinked bonds. As a result, the film strength of the cured film is further improved, the development resistance is improved, the thermal shrinkage of the cured film is suppressed, and the adhesion to the substrate is excellent.
  • Suitable hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer examples include hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having an acidic group, and a bulky group.
  • the functional group After synthesizing the main chain portion by copolymerizing the ethylenically unsaturated monomer and other ethylenically unsaturated monomers as necessary, the functional group reacts with the functional group on the main chain to form a bond.
  • a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer having a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group introduced can be produced. ..
  • the structural units constituting the main chain and side chains of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer and the monomers used to form the structural units will be described below.
  • hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit (Constituent unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A))
  • the structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the following general formula (A) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit”) is an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. It has a chemical structure in which the ethylenic double bond of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate to be contained is cleaved by an addition reaction to form two single bonds.
  • RA represents a methyl group or a hydrogen atom
  • RB represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the structural unit derived from the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) the structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl methacrylate in which RA in the general formula ( A ) is a methyl group is preferable.
  • Specific examples of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit represented by the general formula (A) include hydroxymethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples thereof include structural units derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylates such as 2-hydroxy-1-methylethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-hydroxyisobutyl (meth) acrylate.
  • hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylates such as 2-hydroxy-1-methylethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-hydroxyisobutyl (meth) acrylate.
  • a structural unit derived from 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a structural unit derived from 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and a structural unit derived from 2-hydroxy-1-methylethyl (meth) acrylate are preferable. Building blocks derived from ethyl (meth) acrylate are particularly preferred.
  • the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 5% by mass or more and 25% by mass or more with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the constituent units constituting the copolymer. It shall be mass% or less.
  • the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit within the above range, a colored layer having excellent flatness and suppressed development residue can be obtained.
  • the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit is less than 5% by mass, the fluidization of the coating film cannot be sufficiently suppressed when the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is heated and dried.
  • the flatness of the obtained colored layer is deteriorated.
  • the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit exceeds 25% by mass, the coatability is deteriorated due to the increase in the viscosity of the photosensitive colored resin composition or the solvent resolubility of the photosensitive colored resin composition is deteriorated. As a result, foreign matter or unevenness is likely to occur in the obtained colored layer.
  • the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is preferably 5% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
  • Constant unit having an acidic group examples of the acidic group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group and the like, but among them, a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group can be easily introduced.
  • a carboxy group is preferred.
  • the structural unit having an acidic group for example, a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group can be preferably used.
  • the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group has a chemical structure in which the ethylenically unsaturated bond of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group is cleaved by an addition reaction to form two single bonds.
  • the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer means a structural unit in which a radically polymerizable carbon-carbon double bond of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer becomes a carbon-carbon single bond.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, katsura acid, and acrylic acid dimer. Can be mentioned. Further, a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate or 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate and maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid anhydride, etc.
  • Additive reactants with cyclic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylate and the like can also be used.
  • an anhydride-containing monomer such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride may be used.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, glass transition temperature and the like.
  • the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 8% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the constituent units constituting the copolymer. It is preferable to have.
  • the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group within the above range, sufficient alkali solubility can be imparted to the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition, and deterioration of solvent solubility can be suppressed.
  • the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group is less than 8% by mass, the acid value may be too low to obtain sufficient alkali solubility.
  • the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group is more preferably 10% by mass or more and 28% by mass or less, and further preferably 12% by mass or more and 28% by mass or less.
  • Examples of the structural unit having a bulky group include a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a bulky group.
  • the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a bulky group has a chemical structure in which the ethylenically unsaturated bond of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a bulky group is cleaved by an addition reaction to form two single bonds. is doing.
  • the bulky group may be contained as a monovalent group or may be contained as a divalent or higher valent group.
  • Examples of such bulky groups include an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, and a hydrocarbon ring such as a combination thereof. Can be mentioned.
  • the hydrocarbon ring has a substituent such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkylcycloalkyl group, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an amide group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an amino group and a halogen atom. May be good.
  • Specific examples of the hydrocarbon ring include aliphatic compounds such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, norbornan, isobornane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 (2,6)] decane (dicyclopentane), and adamantane.
  • Hydrocarbon rings such as benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene, and fluorene; chain polycycles such as biphenyl, terphenyl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, and stilben, and cardo structures (9,9-diarylfluorene). ); Examples include groups in which some of these groups are substituted with substituents.
  • the hydrocarbon ring contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, it is preferable because the heat resistance and adhesion of the colored layer are improved and the brightness of the obtained colored layer is improved. Further, when the structural unit includes the cardo structure, it is particularly preferable because the curability of the colored layer is improved, the fading of the coloring material is suppressed, and the solvent resistance (suppression of NMP swelling) is improved.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydrocarbon ring include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl.
  • Examples thereof include (meth) acrylate and styrene, and cyclocarbonate (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, and adamantyl (adamantyl) because the cross-sectional shape of the colored layer after development has a great effect of being maintained even in heat treatment. It is preferable to use at least one selected from meta) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 20% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the structural units constituting the copolymer. Is preferable.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group within this range, the adhesion of the coating film to the substrate can be improved.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group is less than 20% by mass, the adhesion of the coating film to the substrate may be insufficient.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group exceeds 70% by mass, the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit, the acidic group or the photopolymerizable functional group cannot be sufficiently introduced, and the photosensitive coloring is performed.
  • the developability or film-forming property of the resin composition, or the flatness of the obtained colored layer may be insufficient.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group is more preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or more and 55% by mass or less.
  • the side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group may have a pendant structure consisting of only one structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group, or may have a polymer structure in which two or more structural units are linked.
  • the side chain has a pendant structure having a structural unit equivalent to one monomer
  • the functional group of the photopolymerizable functional group-containing monomer that reacts with the functional group on the main chain to form a bond is the main chain. It has a chemical structure that yields a linking group to be attached.
  • the photopolymerizable functional group-containing monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group and a functional group that reacts with a functional group on the main chain to form a bond for example, the photopolymerizable functional group has an ethylenically unsaturated bond. It has a compound such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group as a functional group that reacts with a functional group on the main chain to form a bond, and an ethylenically unsaturated bond as a photopolymerizable functional group.
  • the functional group that reacts with the functional group on the chain to form a bond include a compound having an isocyanate group.
  • a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group can be formed by reacting the monomer with a carboxy group on the main chain.
  • a photopolymerizable functional group is introduced into the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and at the same time, the carboxy group on the main chain is consumed by the reaction with the epoxy group to reduce the acid value.
  • the photocurability and developability of the (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer change in conjunction with each other.
  • the amount of the monomer having a carboxy group or the structural unit derived from the monomer and the photopolymerizable functional group And it is necessary to adjust the amount of the monomer having an epoxy group or the structural unit derived from the monomer.
  • a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group can be formed by reacting the monomer with a hydroxyl group on the main chain.
  • the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is important from the viewpoint of improving the flatness of the colored layer, but the photopolymerizable functional group and the epoxy Since the monomer having a group has high reactivity with the carboxy group and hardly consumes the hydroxyl group in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit can be easily adjusted.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent increases the film strength of the cured film, improves the development resistance, and is different from the substrate. From the viewpoint of obtaining an effect such as excellent adhesion, the range is preferably in the range of 100 to 2000, and particularly preferably in the range of 140 to 1500. When the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is 100 or more, the development resistance and adhesion are excellent.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is the weight average molecular weight per mol of the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and is represented by the following mathematical formula (1). ..
  • Ethylene unsaturated bond equivalent (g / mol) W (g) / M (mol) (In the formula (1), W represents the mass (g) of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and M is the ethylenic double contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Represents the number of moles of bonds (mol).
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is, for example, an ethylenically double bond contained in 1 g of a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer according to a test method for iodine value as described in JIS K0070: 1992. It may be calculated by measuring the number of bonds.
  • the amount of the constituent unit having a photopolymerizable functional group contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 2.5% by mass or more with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the constituent units constituting the copolymer. It is preferably 35% by mass or less.
  • the photocurability of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer can be improved.
  • the photocurability of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer may not be sufficiently obtained.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group exceeds 35% by mass, the acidic group of the main chain may be consumed too much and sufficient alkali solubility may not be obtained.
  • the amount of the structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group is more preferably 4% by mass or more and 32% by mass or less, and further preferably 5% by mass or more and 31% by mass or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 11,000 or more.
  • the viscosity of the softened coating film is increased by hydroxyalkyl (meth) when the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin is heated and dried.
  • It can be increased by the molecular weight effect of the acrylate unit-containing copolymer to suppress the fluidization of the coating film.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 25,000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer exceeds 25,000, the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition becomes too high, and the viscosity deviates from the viscosity suitable for coating. There is.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is more preferably 11,000 or more and 20,000 or less, and further preferably 11,000 or more and 19,000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is a value measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC-8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh was used
  • the elution solvent was N-methylpyrrolidone to which 0.01 mol / liter of lithium bromide was added
  • the polystyrene standard for calibration curve was Mw: 8 ⁇ 105 (F-80).
  • the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 60 mgKOH / g or more and 130 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 60 mgKOH / g or more and 130 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is preferably 65 mgKOH / g or more and 125 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 65 mgKOH / g or more and 110 mgKOH / g or less, and 70 mgKOH / g or more and 100 mgKOH or less. It is more preferably less than / g.
  • the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 100 mgKOH because it is highly effective in suppressing the generation of development residues.
  • It may be / g or more, 110 mgKOH / g or more, or 120 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more and 200 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is less than 50 mgKOH / g, the hydrophobicity of the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition may become too high and the developability may deteriorate. ..
  • the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer exceeds 200 mgKOH / g, the solvent resolubility of the photosensitive colored resin composition may deteriorate and the coatability may be impaired.
  • the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more and 190 mgKOH / g or less, and further preferably 80 mgKOH / g or more and 180 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is usually added to the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter of the present invention in the form of a varnish dissolved in a solvent.
  • the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is a varnish dissolved in a solvent so that the solid content concentration is 60% by mass because a colored layer having excellent flatness can be easily obtained.
  • the viscosity when heated to 90 ° C. is preferably 500 mPa ⁇ s or more, more preferably 600 mPa ⁇ s or more, and even more preferably 700 mPa ⁇ s or more.
  • the viscosity may be 10,000 mPa ⁇ s or less, or 9,000 mPa ⁇ s or less.
  • the solvent used to dissolve the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is not particularly limited, and for example, the same solvent as that contained in the photosensitive resin composition for a color filter of the present invention may be used. Can be used.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention may contain other binder resins in combination with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer.
  • Other binder resins include acrylic resins having a structure obtained by removing the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate units from the structure of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and acrylics containing other structural units and side chains.
  • a photosensitive or non-photosensitive polymer obtained by polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing monomer such as a based resin, a styrene-acrylic resin, or a polyolefin-based resin can be used.
  • a polymer conventionally used as a binder resin for forming a colored layer of a color filter for example, photosensitive or non-photosensitive such as an epoxy resin, a urethane resin, a polyester resin, a polyimide resin, and a novolak resin.
  • the photosensitive resin may be used as another binder resin.
  • the content of the binder resin is usually 4% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less, and 5% by mass or more and 22% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition. It is preferably 5% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
  • the content of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the binder resin is usually 50 parts by mass or more and 95 parts by mass or less, 60. It is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 92 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 65 parts by mass or more and 90 parts by mass or less.
  • the monomer which is a photopolymerizable compound used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, may be any as long as it can be polymerized by a photoinitiator, and is not particularly limited, but has two or more polymerizable double bonds. It is preferable to contain the polyfunctional monomer having.
  • a polyfunctional monomer having two or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds is preferable, and a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having two or more acryloyl groups or methacryloyl groups is particularly preferable.
  • the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate a conventionally known one may be appropriately selected and used.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is required to have excellent photocurability (high sensitivity)
  • the polyfunctional monomer has three or more polymerizable double bonds (trifunctional).
  • Those are preferable, and for example, poly (meth) acrylates of trivalent or higher-valent polyvalent alcohols and dicarboxylic acid-modified products thereof can be preferably used.
  • trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate succinic acid-modified product, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth).
  • the viscosity of the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin composition tends to be appropriate, and the flatness of the obtained colored layer is improved.
  • the content of the functional monomer is preferably 90 parts by mass or more, more preferably 95 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 100 parts by mass.
  • the content of the monomer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition. It is more preferably 10% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less.
  • the content of the monomer is at least the above lower limit value, the photocuring reaction is likely to proceed, so that the exposed portion can suppress elution during development, and when the content of the monomer is at least the above upper limit value, it is alkaline. Developability can be improved.
  • the photoinitiator used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and one or a combination of two or more of various conventionally known initiators can be used.
  • the photoinitiator include benzophenone, N, N-dimethylaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-bisdiethylaminobenzophenone (for example, Hycure ABP, manufactured by Kawaguchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.), 4-methoxy-4'-dimethylaminobenzophenone and the like.
  • the photoinitiator used in the present invention preferably contains at least one selected from oxime esters and ⁇ -aminoketones from the viewpoint of excellent sensitivity, and line width adjustment and development resistance during pattern formation are preferable. From the viewpoint of, ⁇ -aminoketones are preferable. Since ⁇ -aminoketones having a tertiary amine structure have a tertiary amine structure which is an oxygen quencher in the molecule, radicals generated from the initiator are not easily deactivated by oxygen, and the sensitivity can be improved. preferable.
  • water stain means that when a component that enhances alkaline developability is used, traces of water stain are generated after alkaline development and rinsing with pure water. Such water stains disappear after post-baking, so there is no problem as a product, but there is a problem that it is detected as unevenness abnormality in the visual inspection of the patterning surface after development, and it is not possible to distinguish between normal products and abnormal products. Occurs.
  • the inspection sensitivity of the inspection device is lowered in the visual inspection, the yield of the final color filter product is lowered as a result, which becomes a problem.
  • the total content of the photoinitiator used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired, but the total content of the solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition is not particularly limited. It is preferably in the range of 0.1% by mass or more and 12.0% by mass or less, and more preferably 1.0% by mass or more and 8.0% by mass or less.
  • this content is at least the above lower limit value, photocuring is sufficiently promoted and the exposed portion is suppressed from elution during development, while when it is at least the above upper limit value, yellowing of the obtained colored layer is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in brightness.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention further contains an antioxidant because the heat resistance is improved, the fading of the coloring material is suppressed, and the brightness is improved. Since the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains an antioxidant, it is possible to control an excessive radical chain reaction in the micropores without impairing the curability when forming the micropores in the cured film, which is desired. It is possible to more easily form micropores in the shape of. Further, it is preferable that the antioxidant is used in combination with the oxime ester-based photoinitiator from the viewpoint that the above-mentioned effects can be easily obtained.
  • the antioxidant used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected from conventionally known ones.
  • the antioxidant include hindered phenol-based antioxidants, amine-based antioxidants, phosphorus-based antioxidants, sulfur-based antioxidants, hydrazine-based antioxidants, and the like, and have heat resistance. It is preferable to use a hindered phenolic antioxidant from the viewpoint of improving the shape of the dots and the micropores. It may be a latent antioxidant as described in WO 2014/021023.
  • hindered phenol-based antioxidant examples include pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: IRGANOX1010, manufactured by BASF), 1,3.
  • the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10.0% by mass or less, preferably 0.5% by mass, based on the total amount of solids in the photosensitive colored resin composition. More preferably, it is% or more and 5.0% by mass or less. If it is at least the above lower limit value, it is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance. On the other hand, if it is not more than the above upper limit value, the photosensitive resin composition can be made highly sensitive.
  • the content of the antioxidant is 1 part by mass of the antioxidant with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the oxime ester-based photoinitiator. It is preferably 250 parts by mass or less, more preferably 3 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 65 parts by mass or less. If it is within the above range, the effect of the above combination is excellent.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention may contain various additives, if necessary.
  • the additive include a mercapto compound, a polymerization inhibitor, a chain transfer agent, a leveling agent, a plasticizer, a surfactant, a defoaming agent, a silane coupling agent, an ultraviolet absorber, an adhesion accelerator and the like.
  • Specific examples of the surfactant and the plasticizer include those described in JP2013-029832A.
  • the solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic solvent that does not react with each component of the photosensitive coloring resin composition and can dissolve or disperse them.
  • the solvent can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Specific examples of the solvent include alcohol-based solvents such as methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, N-propyl alcohol, i-propyl alcohol, methoxy alcohol and ethoxy alcohol; carbitol solvents such as methoxyethoxyethanol and ethoxyethoxyethanol; Ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl methoxypropionate, ethyl methoxypropionate, ethyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, methyl hydroxypropionate, ethyl hydroxypropionate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, isobutyl butyrate, n-butyl butyrate, Ester solvents such
  • glycol ether acetate-based solvents examples include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, butyl carbitol acetate (BCA), carbitol acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, and ethyl ethoxypropionate.
  • BCA butyl carbitol acetate
  • Ethyl lactate, and 3-methoxybutyl acetate are preferably one or more selected from the group, from the viewpoint of solubility of other components and suitability for application.
  • the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, but is preferably 75% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and preferably 80% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, based on the total amount of the photosensitive colored resin composition. More preferred.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive colored resin composition is not less than the above lower limit value, the solubility and coating suitability of other components can be improved, while when it is not more than the above upper limit value, the color filter can be improved.
  • the amount of the photosensitive colored resin composition used at the time of formation can be reduced.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, each component such as the above-mentioned coloring material, binder resin, monomer, and light initiator can be used.
  • a photosensitive colored resin composition may be produced by mixing with a solvent and dissolving or dispersing it, but a coloring material dispersion liquid in which the coloring material is dispersed in the solvent using a dispersant, or a coloring material in the solvent.
  • a color material solution dissolved in is prepared in advance, and the components of the color material dispersion or the color material solution and the components of the photosensitive coloring resin composition other than the color material such as the binder resin, the monomer, and the photoinitiator are known. It is preferable to produce a photosensitive colored resin composition by mixing it with a solvent using a dispersing means and dissolving or dispersing it. When two or more kinds of coloring materials are used, after preparing a coloring material dispersion or a coloring material solution for each coloring material, each coloring material dispersion or a coloring material solution, a binder resin, and light are used.
  • a photosensitive coloring resin composition may be produced by mixing components of a photosensitive coloring resin composition other than a coloring material such as an initiator with a solvent and dissolving or dispersing them.
  • the colorant dispersion and the colorant solution are used as preparatory preparations for preparing the colored resin composition. That is, the coloring material dispersion liquid and the coloring material solution are pre-prepared in the stage before preparing the coloring resin composition, and the P / V ratio, that is, (mass of the coloring material component in the composition) / (coloring material in the composition).
  • the ratio of solid content (mass other than components) is high.
  • the P / V ratio of the color material dispersion liquid and the color material solution is usually 1.0 or more.
  • the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention produced by using the colorant dispersion liquid contains a dispersant. Since the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention containing a rake coloring material or a pigment is preferably produced using a coloring material dispersion liquid in which a rake coloring material or a pigment is dispersed, it is preferable to contain a dispersant. ..
  • the color material dispersion liquid used for producing the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the color material dispersion liquid used in the present invention contains a solvent, a dispersant, and the above-mentioned color material dispersed in the solvent by the dispersant, and further contains other components such as a dispersion aid, if necessary. You may.
  • Dispersant those conventionally used as a dispersant can be appropriately selected and used.
  • a cationic, anionic, nonionic, amphoteric, silicone-based, or fluorine-based surfactant can be used.
  • a polymer surfactant (polymer dispersant) is preferable because it can be dispersed uniformly and finely.
  • the polymer dispersant include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acids such as polyacrylic acid.
  • (Partial) ammonium salts and (partial) alkylamine salts (co) polymers of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylic acid esters and their modifications; polyurethanes; unsaturated polyamides; polysiloxane Classes; long-chain polyaminoamide phosphates; polyethylene imine derivatives (amides obtained by the reaction of poly (lower alkylene imine) with free carboxy group-containing polyesters and their bases); polyallylamine derivatives (polyallylamine and free carboxy). Examples thereof include a reaction product obtained by reacting one or more compounds selected from three kinds of compounds of a polyester having a group, a polyamide, or a cocondensate of an ester and an amide (polyester amide)).
  • the dispersant one having good dispersibility can be appropriately selected and used depending on the type of coloring material, and the dispersant is not particularly limited, but is a rake color represented by the above general formula (1) or (2).
  • the material or the metal lake color material of the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (5) is dispersed, and these lake color materials and the dye such as the xanthene dye or C.I. I.
  • an acidic dispersant which is an acidic polymer dispersant, as the dispersant.
  • the dye may be used by dissolving it in a solvent.
  • dispersing the pigment it is preferable to use at least one selected from the group consisting of an acidic or basic polymer dispersant and a urethane-based dispersant, depending on the type of the pigment, and it is preferable to use an acidic or basic polymer. It is more preferable to use a dispersant.
  • a basic-treated pigment it is preferable to use an acidic dispersant which is an acidic polymer dispersant, and when dispersing an acid-treated pigment, a base which is a basic polymer dispersant is used. It is preferable to use a sex dispersant.
  • the acidic dispersant used for the dispersion of the rake colorant for example, at least one selected from a polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) described later and a carboxy group-containing block copolymer described later will be used. It can be suitably used.
  • a carboxy group-containing block copolymer can be preferably used.
  • the basic dispersant include a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and at least a part of amino groups in a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and an organic acid compound.
  • the urethane-based dispersant is a compound having one or more urethane bonds (-NH-COO-) in one molecule.
  • a reaction product of polyisocyanates having two or more isocyanate groups in one molecule and polyesters having hydroxyl groups at one end or both ends can be preferably used.
  • the polymer having the structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) can be preferably used as a dispersant for the rake coloring material, and in particular, the rake represented by the above general formula (1) or general formula (2). It can be preferably used as a dispersant for coloring materials.
  • a polymer having a structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) is used as the acidic dispersant, the dispersibility and heat resistance of the rake color material are improved, and the change in chromaticity of the rake color material after heating is suppressed. It is possible.
  • a polymer having a structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) is used as a dispersant to improve the dispersibility and storage stability of the pigment. It is possible to form a colored layer with improved substrate adhesion and improved coating film uniformity. Since the polymer having the structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) is an ethylenically unsaturated monomer polymer, the heat resistance of the skeleton is higher than that of the polyether-based or polyester-based polymer, and the polymer has higher heat resistance.
  • L 11 is a direct bond or a divalent linking group
  • R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 12 is a hydroxyl group or a hydrocarbon group
  • (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O] z1 -R 15 or -OR 16 is a monovalent group
  • R 16 is a hydrocarbon group.
  • R 13 and R 14 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 and R 22 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, or a hydrocarbon group having one or more selected from an ether bond and an ester bond. Yes, R 17 and R 19 may be coupled to each other to form a ring structure.
  • the cyclic structure may further have a substituent R 24 , which is a hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon having one or more selected from an ether bond and an ester bond. It is a hydrogen group.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • X represents a hydrogen atom or an organic cation. x1 is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, y1 is an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, and z1 is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less.
  • L 11 is a direct coupling or a divalent linking group.
  • L 11 when L 11 is directly bonded, it means that the phosphorus atom is directly bonded to the carbon atom of the main chain skeleton without interposing a linking group.
  • the divalent linking group in L 11 is not particularly limited as long as the carbon atom of the main chain skeleton and the phosphorus atom can be linked. Examples of the divalent linking group in L 11 include a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having a hydroxyl group, an arylene group, a —CONH— group, and a —COO— group.
  • the direction of bonding of the divalent linking group is arbitrary. That is, when -CONH- is contained in the divalent linking group, -CO may be on the carbon atom side of the main chain and -NH may be on the phosphorus atom side of the side chain, and conversely, -NH may be on the main chain. -CO may be on the phosphorus atom side of the side chain on the carbon atom side of.
  • L 11 in the general formula (I) is preferably a divalent linking group containing a —CONH— group or a —COO— group.
  • L 11 is a divalent linking group containing a -COO- group
  • L 11 is a -COO-L 11' -group (where L 11'may have a hydroxyl group.
  • X is 1 or more and 18 or less. It is preferable that y is an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, z is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, and w is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less.
  • the alkylene group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms in L 11' may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and may be, for example, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a trimethylene group, a propylene group, or various types. It is a butylene group, various pentylene groups, various hexylene groups, various octylene groups, etc., and a part of hydrogen may be substituted with a hydroxyl group.
  • x is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less, more preferably an integer of 1 or more and 2 or less, and y is an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less, more preferably.
  • z is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less, and more preferably an integer of 1 or more and 2 or less.
  • w is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less.
  • L 11 in the general formula (I) include, for example, -COO-CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 -O-, -COO-CH 2 CH 2 -O-CH 2 CH (OH) CH. 2 -O-, -COO-CH 2 C (CH 2 CH 3 ) (CH 2 OH) CH 2 -O- and the like can be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group in R 12 include an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may be, for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group or n-butyl.
  • Examples thereof include a group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a bornyl group, an isobornyl group, a dicyclopentanyl group, an adamantyl group, a lower alkyl group substituted adamantyl group and the like.
  • the alkenyl group having 2 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic. Examples of such an alkenyl group include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a propenyl group and the like.
  • the position of the double bond of the alkenyl group is not limited, but from the viewpoint of the reactivity of the obtained polymer, it is preferable that the double bond is at the end of the alkenyl group.
  • the aryl group include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group and the like, and may further have a substituent.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 or more and 24 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 or more and 12 or less carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aralkyl group include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a biphenylmethyl group and the like, and may further have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aralkyl group is preferably 7 or more and 20 or less, and more preferably 7 or more and 14 or less.
  • the alkyl group or alkenyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include halogen atoms such as F, Cl and Br, a nitro group and the like.
  • the substituent of the aromatic ring such as the aryl group or the aralkyl group, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, a nitro group, a halogen atom and the like can be used. Can be mentioned.
  • the preferable carbon number does not include the carbon number of the substituent.
  • x1 is the same as the x
  • y1 is the same as the y
  • z1 is the same as the z.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group in R 15 to R 22 include the same group as the hydrocarbon group in R 12 .
  • One group may have two or more ether bonds and ester bonds.
  • Examples of the monovalent hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, and an aryl group. When the hydrocarbon group is divalent, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an arylene group, and a combination thereof are used. The basis of is mentioned.
  • the number of carbon atoms forming the ring structure is preferably 5 or more and 8 or less, and is 6, that is, a 6-membered ring. More preferably, it is preferable to form a cyclohexane ring.
  • the hydrocarbon group in the substituent R 24 or the hydrocarbon group having one or more selected from the ether bond and the ester bond is described in R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 and R 22 . It can be similar to the one.
  • the R 12 is a hydroxyl group, a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[ (CH 2 ) y1 -O] It is preferably a monovalent group represented by z1 -R 15 or -OR 16 , and has a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a vinyl group and a substituent.
  • aryl group or aralkyl group vinyl group, allyl group,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O] z1 -R 15 ,
  • R 12 has a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 or-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O. ] It is preferably a monovalent group represented by z1 - R15 .
  • R 12 has a structure in which a carbon atom is directly bonded to a phosphorus atom, it is presumed that a resin layer having excellent alkali resistance can be formed because it is difficult to be hydrolyzed.
  • R 12 has a methyl group, an ethyl group, an aryl group which may have a substituent or an aralkyl group, a vinyl group, an allyl group, and-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 . -R 15 or-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O]
  • the monovalent groups represented by z1 -R 15 , R 13 and R 14 are independently hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, and R 15 is -CO.
  • R 12 is more preferably an aryl group which may have a substituent from the viewpoint of dispersibility.
  • X represents a hydrogen atom or an organic cation.
  • the organic cation means a cation containing a carbon atom.
  • Examples of the organic cation include ammonium cations such as imidazolium cations, pyridinium cations, aminidium cations, piperidinium cations, pyrrolidinium cations, tetraalkylammonium cations and trialkylammonium cations, and sulfonium cations such as trialkylsulfonium cations.
  • a phosphonium cation such as a tetraalkylphosphonium cation, and the like.
  • a protonated nitrogen-containing organic cation is preferable from the viewpoint of dispersibility and alkali developability.
  • the organic cation has an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, it is preferable because it can impart curability.
  • the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) may be contained alone in the polymer, or may be contained in two or more types.
  • X may contain both a structural unit of a hydrogen atom and X may contain both a structural unit of an organic cation.
  • the ratio of the number of constituent units in which X is an organic cation is the general formula (I). It is preferably 0 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less with respect to the total number of constituent units represented by.
  • the method for synthesizing the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is not particularly limited, but for example, with reference to JP-A-2017-2191, the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) can be used.
  • the polymer can be synthesized.
  • the polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is a reaction product of a polymer having at least one of an epoxy group and a cyclic ether group in the side chain and an acidic phosphorus compound, and is an acidic phosphorus compound. It is preferably a polymer in which at least a part of the group may form a salt.
  • the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) preferably has a solvent-affinity moiety further from the viewpoint of dispersibility.
  • a polymer is, among others, a graft copolymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the following general formula (II), or the above-mentioned polymer.
  • a block copolymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the following general formula (III) is excellent in dispersibility and storage stability, and after long-term storage. However, it is preferable because a high-contrast coating film can be formed.
  • L 21 is a direct bond or a divalent linking group
  • R 25 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Polymer is a polymer chain having a structural unit represented by the following general formula (IV). Represents.
  • R 26 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 27 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2 -R 30 ,-[(CH).
  • R 28 and R 29 are independent hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, respectively, and R 30 is a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, a monovalent group represented by -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 31 .
  • R 30' is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2' -R 30 ,-[(CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 .
  • ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 is a monovalent group
  • R 30 " is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms
  • R 31 is hydrogen. It is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less atoms or carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. x2 and x2'indicate an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, y2 and y2' indicate an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, and z2 and z2'indicate an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less. )
  • R 32 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 33 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 34 ) -CH (R 35 ) -O] x3 -R 36 ,-[((IV).
  • R 34 and R 35 are independent hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, respectively, and R 36 is a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, a monovalent group represented by -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 39 , respectively.
  • R 37 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 34 ) -CH (R 35 ) -O] x4 -R 36 ,-[(CH 2 ) y4 -O] z4 -R 36 ,-[CO- (CH). 2 ) y4 -O]
  • a monovalent group represented by z4 -R 36 , R 38 is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, and R 39 is a hydrogen atom or 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms. It is an alkyl group, and the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • n represents an integer of 5 or more and 200 or less.
  • x3 and x4 are integers of 1 or more and 18 or less
  • y3 and y4 are integers of 1 or more and 5 or less
  • z3 and z4 are integers of 1 or more and 18 or less.
  • L 21 is a direct coupling or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group in L 21 is not particularly limited as long as the carbon atom derived from the ethylenically unsaturated double bond and the polymer chain can be linked. Examples of the divalent linking group in L 21 include the same as the divalent linking group in L 11 .
  • Polymer represents a polymer chain having a structural unit represented by the general formula (IV).
  • the hydrocarbon group in R 33 is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, or an aryl group. Is preferable. These include, for example, the same as the above-mentioned R12 .
  • R 36 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a monovalent group represented by an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 39 .
  • R 37 has an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, an aryl group,-[CH (R 34 ) -CH (R 35 ) -O] x4 -R 36 ,-[(CH 2 ). y4 -O] z4 -R 36 ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y4 -O]
  • the monovalent group represented by z4 -R 36 is preferable.
  • R 38 is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms
  • R 39 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkyl group, aralkyl group, and aryl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms among R 36 and R 37 are the same as those of R 12 .
  • Examples of the alkyl group among the R 38 and R 39 are the same as those of the R 12 described above.
  • the aromatic ring may further have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include linear, branched and cyclic alkyl groups having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms, as well as halogen atoms such as alkenyl groups, nitro groups, F, Cl and Br. ..
  • the preferable carbon number does not include the carbon number of the substituent.
  • x3 and x4 are the same as the x
  • y3 and y4 are the same as the y
  • z3 and z4 are the same as the z.
  • R 33 , R 36 , R 37 , R 38 and R 39 further include an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, an amino group and an epoxy group as long as they do not interfere with the dispersion performance of the graft copolymer. It may be substituted with a substituent such as an isocyanate group or a hydrogen bond forming group. Further, after synthesizing a graft copolymer having these substituents, a compound having a functional group and a polymerizable group that reacts with the substituent may be reacted to add a polymerizable group.
  • a polymerizable group may be added by reacting a graft copolymer having a carboxy group with glycidyl (meth) acrylate, or by reacting a graft copolymer having an isocyanate group with hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate. Can be done.
  • the polymer chain having a structural unit represented by the general formula (IV) includes methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl among the above-mentioned structural units.
  • the R 33 and R 37 are preferably those having excellent solubility in an organic solvent, and are appropriately selected according to the organic solvent used in the colorant dispersion. It's fine. Specifically, for example, when an organic solvent such as ether alcohol acetate-based, ether-based, or ester-based, which is generally used as an organic solvent for a colorant dispersion, is used as an organic solvent, a methyl group or an ethyl group is used. , Isobutyl group, n-butyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-ethoxyethyl group, cyclohexyl group, benzyl group and the like are preferable.
  • the reason for setting the R 33 and R 37 in this way is that the structural unit containing the R 33 and R 37 has solubility in the organic solvent, and the acidic phosphorus compound group of the monomer and the acidic phosphorus compound group of the monomer are used.
  • the salt portion has a high adsorptivity to particles such as a coloring material, so that the dispersibility and stability of the particles such as the coloring material can be made particularly excellent.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain in Polymer is preferably in the range of 500 or more and 15,000 or less, and more preferably in the range of 1000 or more and 8000 or less. Within the above range, a sufficient steric repulsion effect as a dispersant can be maintained, and an increase in time required for dispersion of particles such as a coloring material due to the steric effect can be suppressed.
  • the polymer chain in Polymer preferably has a solubility of 50 (g / 100 g solvent) or more at 23 ° C. with respect to the organic solvent used in combination.
  • the polymer chain may be a homopolymer or a copolymer. Further, the polymer chain contained in the structural unit represented by the general formula (II) may be used alone or in combination of two or more in the graft copolymer.
  • the total of the structural units represented by the general formula (I) is contained in a proportion of 3% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the graft copolymer. It is more preferably 20% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less.
  • the ratio of the affinity sites with the particles in the graft copolymer is appropriate, and the organic solvent is used.
  • the structural unit represented by the general formula (II) is preferably contained in a proportion of 20% by mass or more and 97% by mass or less, preferably 25% by mass, with respect to all the structural units of the graft copolymer. % Or more and 95% by mass or less are more preferable, and 40% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less are further preferable.
  • the content ratio of each structural unit in the copolymer is calculated from the amount charged when synthesizing the copolymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the graft copolymer is preferably in the range of 1,000 or more and 500,000 or less, more preferably in the range of 3,000 or more and 400,000 or less, and in the range of 5,000 or more and 300,000 or less. Is even more preferable. Within the above range, particles such as coloring materials can be uniformly dispersed.
  • the graft copolymer used in the embodiment of the present invention has a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the general formula (II), as well as other structural units. You may be doing it.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated monomer copolymerizable with an ethylenically unsaturated monomer or the like that induces a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is appropriately selected and copolymerized, and another structural unit is introduced. be able to.
  • Block copolymer As the block copolymer preferable as the acidic dispersant, for example, a block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) may be used. Examples thereof include block copolymers having.
  • the block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) contains three or more structural units represented by the general formula (I) in total. ..
  • the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) may function as a color material affinity site, may be composed of one type, or may include two or more types of structural units. When two or more types of structural units are included, two or more types of structural units may be randomly arranged in the block portion including the structural units represented by the general formula (I).
  • the total content ratio of the structural units represented by the general formula (I) is 5% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the block copolymer. It is more preferable that it is 10% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less. If it is within the above range, the ratio of the affinity site with the particles in the block copolymer becomes appropriate, and the decrease in the solubility in the organic solvent can be suppressed, so that the adsorptivity to the particles such as the coloring material becomes good. Excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability can be obtained. Further, since the acidic phosphorus compound group of the block copolymer can be stably localized around the coloring material, a color filter having excellent heat resistance and contrast can be obtained.
  • the block copolymer has good solvent affinity, good dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material, and heat resistance. The properties are also good, and the resistance to N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP) (NMP resistance) is also excellent.
  • NMP N-methylpyrrolidone
  • R 27 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2 -R 30 ,-[(CH 2 ) y2 -O] z2 -R 30 . ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2 -O] z2 -R 30 , -CO-O-R 30'or -O-CO-R 30 " , which is a monovalent group.
  • the hydrocarbon group in R 27 can be the same as that shown in R 12 .
  • R 30 is a monovalent group represented by a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 31 , and R 30'is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH ( R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2' -R 30 ,-[(CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 is a monovalent group, R 30 " is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, and R 31 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • the hydrocarbon group in R 30 can be the same as that shown in R 12 .
  • x2 and x2' are the same as the x
  • y2 and y2' are the same as the y
  • z2 and z2' are the same as the z.
  • the R 27s in the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) may be the same as each other or may be different from each other.
  • R 27 and R 30' it is preferable to use those having excellent solubility in an organic solvent, and examples thereof include the same as those of R 33 and R 37 .
  • R 27 , R 30 , R 30' , R 30 " and R 31 in the general formula (IV) have an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, and the like, as long as they do not interfere with the dispersion performance of the block copolymer. It may be substituted with a substituent such as an amino group, an epoxy group, an isocyanate group or a hydrogen bond forming group, or after the synthesis of the block copolymer, it may be reacted with a compound having the substituent to carry out the substitution. A group may be added.
  • a compound having a functional group and a polymerizable group that reacts with the substituent is reacted to form a polymerizable group. It may be added.
  • a block copolymer having a glycidyl group may be reacted with (meth) acrylic acid, or a block copolymer having an isocyanate group may be reacted with hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate.
  • a polymerizable group can be added.
  • the number of the constituent units constituting the block portion including the constituent unit represented by the general formula (III) is not particularly limited, but the solvent-affinity portion and the color material-affinity portion act effectively, and the color material dispersion liquid From the viewpoint of improving dispersibility, it is preferably 10 or more and 200 or less, more preferably 20 or more and 100 or less, and further preferably 30 or more and 80 or less.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) in the block copolymer is preferably 30% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the block copolymer. It is more preferably 40% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less.
  • the block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) may be selected so as to function as a solvent-affinity site, and the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) is composed of one kind. It may be present, or it may contain two or more kinds of structural units. In the embodiment of the present invention, when the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) includes two or more types of structural units, there are two types in the block portion including the structural units represented by the general formula (III). The above structural units may be randomly arranged.
  • the ratio m / n of the number of units n of the constituent units is preferably in the range of 0.01 or more and 1 or less, and is preferably in the range of 0.1 or more and 0.7 or less for the dispersion of the coloring material. It is more preferable from the viewpoint of property and dispersion stability.
  • the block copolymer has a block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a block portion including the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) as the binding order of the block copolymer, and the coloring material is used. Anything that can be stably dispersed is not particularly limited, but the block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is bonded only to one end of the block copolymer. However, it is preferable because it has excellent interaction with the coloring material and can effectively suppress the aggregation of the dispersants.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the block copolymer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2500 or more and 500,000 or less, and more preferably 3000 or more and 400,000 or less, from the viewpoint of good dispersibility and excellent heat resistance. It is preferable, and more preferably 6000 or more and 300,000 or less.
  • the acid value of the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more, from the viewpoint of the dispersibility and storage stability of the coloring material. It is more preferably present, and more preferably 40 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the acid value of the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less. , 100 mgKOH / g or less is more preferable.
  • the acid value refers to the number of mg of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acid component contained in 1 g of the sample, and can be measured according to JIS K 0070: 1992.
  • the color material dispersion liquid of the present invention may further contain other acidic dispersants different from the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I).
  • other acidic dispersants include dispersants having an acidic group.
  • examples of the acidic group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and the like, and the acidic group contained in the dispersant of other acidic dispersants is dispersed, among which, the carboxy group. It is preferable because it has excellent properties.
  • the acid value of the other acidic dispersants is preferably in the range of 30 mgKOH / g or more and 250 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 40 mgKOH / g or more, and 50 mgKOH / g or more, from the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility. Is more preferable, and 70 mgKOH / g or more is further preferable.
  • the acid value of the other acidic dispersants is preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 190 mgKOH / g or less, and even more preferably 180 mgKOH / g or less. ..
  • the other acidic dispersant has a carboxy group from the viewpoint of improving the suppressibility of the development residue when used in combination with the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I). It is preferably a polymer dispersant, and above all, when it is used in combination with a polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I), the suppressibility of development residue is improved and the coating film is uniform. From the viewpoint of better properties, a block copolymer containing an A block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer and a B block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. It is preferable to include.
  • a block copolymer containing an A block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer and a B block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is simply referred to as "carboxy group-containing.”
  • block copolymer Sometimes referred to as "block copolymer”.
  • the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is suitably used, for example, as a dispersant for metal lake coloring materials and pigments of xanthene dyes.
  • the A block is a polymer block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
  • Examples of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer used in the A block include the same as the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group used in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. ..
  • each structural unit in the A block may be contained in any mode such as random copolymerization and block copolymerization, and is randomly co-polymerized from the viewpoint of uniformity. It is preferably contained in the form of polymerization.
  • the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and more preferably the carboxy group, based on all the structural units of the A block. It is even more preferable that the polymer block is composed of only the structural units derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer contained.
  • the A block may be composed of only a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer, or may be a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer in a range in which the acidity of the A block is stronger than that of the B block. May contain building blocks derived from different ethylenically unsaturated monomers.
  • the A block contains a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer different from the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer, it is preferably 60% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the A block. It is more preferable to make it by mass% or less.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer different from the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer include structural units used in the B block described later.
  • the content of A block is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more, based on all the constituent units of the block copolymer. It is preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 40% by mass or less.
  • the B block is a polymer block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
  • the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester monomer used in the B block may be the same as the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester monomer used in the polymer chain having the structural unit represented by the general formula (IV). It is used by one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
  • the B block may contain a structural unit derived from another ethylenically unsaturated monomer in addition to the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. Examples of the structural unit derived from the other ethylenically unsaturated monomer include a structural unit represented by the general formula (III), which is different from the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
  • each structural unit in the B block may be contained in any mode such as random copolymerization, block copolymerization, etc., and is a random copolymer from the viewpoint of uniformity. It is preferably contained in the form of polymerization.
  • the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having an acidic group is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total structural unit of the B block. It is more preferably mass% or less.
  • the B block is more preferably a polymer block containing no structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having an acidic group.
  • the carboxy group-containing block copolymer may be an AB block copolymer or a BAB block copolymer.
  • the block copolymer is a BAB block copolymer
  • the content ratio of the two B blocks to each other is preferably adjusted in the range of 50:50 to 70:30 in terms of mass ratio from the viewpoint of dispersibility. ..
  • the acid value of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is preferably in the range of 30 mgKOH / g or more and 250 mgKOH / g or less from the viewpoint of dispersibility, so that the acid value of the block copolymer is in this range.
  • a block preferably contains a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
  • the acid value is preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the acid value is preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is preferably 5,000 or more and 100,000 or less from the viewpoint of dispersibility.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is more preferably 8,000 or more, further preferably 10,000 or more, and more preferably 80,000 or less, 70. It is more preferably 000 or less.
  • the molecular weight distribution of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is preferably less than 2, more preferably less than 1.5, and even more preferably less than 1.3.
  • the molecular weight distribution is determined by "weight average molecular weight (Mw)) / (number average molecular weight (Mn)".
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • Mn number average molecular weight
  • the larger the molecular weight distribution the larger the molecular weight as compared with the molecular weight of the designed polymer. It is preferable that the molecular weight distribution is small because those having a small molecular weight and those having a large molecular weight are included and tend to deteriorate the dispersibility of the coloring material.
  • a conventionally known method for producing a block copolymer can be appropriately selected and used. Since it is easy to produce a polymer having a uniform composition, it is preferable to use a living polymerization method, and as the living polymerization method, a method using an organic acid catalyst and a silyl-based initiator (GTP method) and a method using a transition metal catalyst ( ATRP method), a method using a sulfur-based reversible chain transfer agent (RAFT method), a method using an organic tellurium compound (TERP method), and the like can be mentioned.
  • GTP method organic acid catalyst and a silyl-based initiator
  • ATRP method transition metal catalyst
  • RAFT method sulfur-based reversible chain transfer agent
  • TMP method organic tellurium compound
  • the content of the dispersant in the color material dispersion may be appropriately adjusted, but from the viewpoint of dispersibility and storage stability, the content may be 5 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the color material. It is more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 70 parts by mass or less.
  • the colorant dispersion may further contain a dispersion auxiliary resin and other components, if necessary, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • the dispersion auxiliary resin include an alkali-soluble resin. Since the steric hindrance of the alkali-soluble resin makes it difficult for the coloring material particles to come into contact with each other, the dispersion of the coloring material may be stabilized, or the amount of the dispersant may be reduced due to the dispersion stabilizing effect.
  • examples of other components include a surfactant for improving wettability, a silane coupling agent for improving adhesion, a defoaming agent, an anti-repellent agent, an anti-aggregation agent, an ultraviolet absorber, and the like. ..
  • solvent As the solvent contained in the color material dispersion liquid, the same solvent as that contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention can be used.
  • the amount of the solvent is usually preferably in the range of 55% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and particularly preferably in the range of 65% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the colorant dispersion liquid. , 70% by mass or more and 88% by mass or less is more preferable. If the amount of solvent is too small, the viscosity increases and the dispersibility tends to decrease. Further, if the amount of the solvent is too large, the concentration of the coloring material decreases, and it may be difficult to achieve the target chromaticity coordinates.
  • the method for producing the color material dispersion liquid is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for obtaining a color material dispersion liquid in which the color material is dispersed in a solvent by a dispersant.
  • a manufacturing method having a step of preparing a coloring material, a step of preparing a dispersant, and a step of dispersing the coloring material in a solvent in the presence of the dispersant can be applied.
  • Two or more kinds of coloring materials may be co-dispersed in a solvent in the presence of a dispersant, or one or more kinds of coloring materials may be dispersed or co-dispersed, and then two or more kinds of coloring material dispersions are mixed. May be.
  • the colorant can be dispersed using a conventionally known disperser.
  • the disperser include a roll mill such as a two-roll and three-roll mill, a ball mill such as a ball mill and a vibrating ball mill, a paint conditioner, a continuous disc type bead mill, and a bead mill such as a continuous annular type bead mill.
  • the bead diameter used is preferably 0.03 mm or more and 3.0 mm or less, and more preferably 0.05 mm or more and 2.0 mm or less.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention contains a monomer which is a photopolymerizable compound as a photocurable component
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is subjected to a photopolymerization reaction.
  • the cured product of the present invention can be obtained.
  • the cured product of the present invention can be obtained by forming a coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, drying the coating film, exposing the coating film, and developing the coating film as necessary.
  • a method for forming, exposing, and developing a coating film for example, the same method as that used for forming a colored layer included in the color filter according to the present invention described later can be used.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention also has a polymerizable functional group in a binder resin such as a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer.
  • the cured product of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention in such a preferred embodiment is a dye in a matrix produced by a photopolymerization reaction of a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer and a monomer.
  • a cured product in which a coloring material containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a rake coloring material is dissolved or dispersed.
  • a coloring material containing at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and rake coloring materials is dissolved or dissolved in a matrix containing a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Since it is dispersed, it has high brightness, excellent flatness, and suppresses the generation of development residue when developed, and is suitably used as a colored layer of a color filter.
  • the color filter according to the present invention includes at least a transparent substrate and a colored layer provided on the transparent substrate, and at least one of the colored layers is a cured product of the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention.
  • at least one of the colored layers is selected from the group consisting of a dye and a lake colorant in a matrix containing a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Since it is formed of a cured product in which a coloring material containing seeds is dissolved or dispersed, it has a colored layer having high brightness, excellent flatness, and suppressed generation of development residue.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention.
  • the color filter 10 of the present invention shown in FIG. 1 has a transparent substrate 1, a light-shielding portion 2, and a red colored layer 3R, a green colored layer 3G, and a blue colored layer 3B as the colored layer 3.
  • the colored layer is usually formed in the opening of the light-shielding portion on the transparent substrate described later, and is composed of three or more colored patterns.
  • the red colored layer 3R, the green colored layer 3G, and the blue colored layer 3B are formed and arranged in a predetermined order.
  • the colored layer of each color is formed in the order of the red colored layer 3R, the green colored layer 3G, and the blue colored layer 3B.
  • the arrangement method of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a general arrangement such as a stripe type, a mosaic type, a triangle type, and a 4-pixel arrangement type. Further, the width, area and the like of the colored layer can be arbitrarily set.
  • the thickness of the colored layer is appropriately controlled by adjusting the coating method, the solid content concentration, the viscosity, and the like of the colored resin composition, but it is usually preferably in the range of 1 ⁇ m or more and 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • Colored layers of individual colors can be formed by the following procedure.
  • the photosensitive colored resin composition is applied onto a transparent substrate on which a light-shielding portion is previously formed by using a coating means such as a spray coating method, a dip coating method, a bar coating method, a roll coating method, and a spin coating method. Apply to form a wet coating.
  • the wet coating film is dried using a hot plate, an oven, or the like, and then exposed to the wet coating film through a mask having a predetermined pattern, and the binder resin, the monomer, or the like is subjected to a photopolymerization reaction to make the wet coating film photosensitive. Use as a coating.
  • Examples of the light source used for exposure include ultraviolet rays such as low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps, electron beams, and the like.
  • the exposure amount is appropriately adjusted depending on the light source used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
  • heat treatment may be performed in order to accelerate the polymerization reaction after exposure.
  • the heating conditions are appropriately selected depending on the mixing ratio of each component in the colored resin composition to be used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
  • a coating film is formed in a desired pattern by developing with a developing solution to dissolve and remove the unexposed portion.
  • a developing solution a solution obtained by dissolving an alkali in water or a water-soluble solvent is usually used. An appropriate amount of a surfactant or the like may be added to this alkaline solution. Further, a general method can be adopted as the developing method.
  • the developer is usually washed and the cured coating film of the colored resin composition is dried to form a colored layer.
  • a heat treatment may be performed in order to sufficiently cure the coating film.
  • the heating conditions are not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the intended use of the coating film.
  • the light-shielding portion in the color filter of the present invention is formed in a pattern on the substrate, and can be the same as that used as the light-shielding portion in a general color filter.
  • the pattern shape of the light-shielding portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a stripe shape and a matrix shape.
  • the light-shielding portion may be a metal thin film such as chromium obtained by a sputtering method, a vacuum vapor deposition method, or the like.
  • the light-shielding portion may be a resin layer in which light-shielding particles such as carbon fine particles, metal oxides, inorganic pigments, and organic pigments are contained in the resin binder.
  • the film thickness of the light-shielding portion is set to about 0.2 ⁇ m or more and 0.4 ⁇ m or less in the case of a metal thin film, and about 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 2 ⁇ m or less in the case of a black pigment dispersed or dissolved in a binder resin. Set in.
  • the transparent substrate may be a substrate that is transparent to visible light, and is not particularly limited, and a transparent substrate used for a general color filter can be used. Specifically, it has flexibility and flexibility such as inflexible transparent rigid material such as quartz glass, non-alkali glass, and synthetic quartz plate, or transparent resin film, optical resin plate, flexible glass, and the like. A transparent flexible material can be mentioned.
  • the transparent substrate used for such a color filter usually has a polar group on the surface. From the viewpoint of improving the substrate adhesion of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the transparent substrate is preferably a substrate containing silicon dioxide such as quartz glass, non-alkali glass, and synthetic quartz plate.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, but for example, one having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m or more and 1 mm or less can be used depending on the use of the color filter.
  • the color filter of the present invention forms, for example, an overcoat layer, a transparent electrode layer, an alignment film for orienting a liquid crystal material, a columnar spacer, and the like. It may be the one that has been done.
  • the color filter of the present invention is not limited to the above-exemplified configuration, and a known configuration generally used for a color filter can be appropriately selected and used.
  • the display device according to the present invention is characterized by having the color filter according to the present invention.
  • the configuration of the display device is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known display devices, and examples thereof include a liquid crystal display device and an organic light emitting display device.
  • the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is characterized by having the above-mentioned color filter according to the present invention, a facing substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the facing substrate.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device belonging to the display device of the present invention.
  • the liquid crystal display device 40 of the present invention has a liquid crystal layer formed between a color filter 10, a facing substrate 20 having a TFT array substrate and the like, and the color filter 10 and the facing substrate 20. It has 30 and.
  • the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 2, and can be generally known as a liquid crystal display device using a color filter.
  • the drive method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a drive method generally used for the liquid crystal display device can be adopted.
  • a drive system include a TN system, an IPS system, an OCB system, an MVA system, and the like. In the present invention, any of these methods can be suitably used.
  • the facing substrate it can be appropriately selected and used according to the drive method and the like of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
  • a method for forming the liquid crystal layer a method generally used as a method for producing a liquid crystal cell can be used, and examples thereof include a vacuum injection method and a liquid crystal dropping method.
  • the organic light emitting display device according to the present invention is characterized by having the above-mentioned color filter according to the present invention and an organic light emitting body.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing an example of an organic light emitting display device belonging to the display device of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the organic light emitting display device 100 of the present invention has a color filter 10 and an organic light emitting body 80. An organic protective layer 50 or an inorganic oxide film 60 may be provided between the color filter 10 and the organic light emitter 80.
  • a transparent anode 71, a hole injection layer 72, a hole transport layer 73, a light emitting layer 74, an electron injection layer 75, and a cathode 76 are sequentially formed on the upper surface of a color filter.
  • Examples thereof include a method and a method in which an organic light emitter 80 formed on another substrate is bonded onto an inorganic oxide film 60.
  • the transparent anode 71, the hole injection layer 72, the hole transport layer 73, the light emitting layer 74, the electron injection layer 75, the cathode 76, and other configurations of the organic light emitter 80 known ones can be appropriately used.
  • the organic light emitting display device 100 produced in this way can be applied to, for example, both a passive drive type organic EL display and an active drive type organic EL display.
  • the organic light emitting display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 3, and can be generally known as an organic light emitting display device using a color filter.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was determined as a standard polystyrene-equivalent value by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) according to the above-mentioned measuring method of the present invention.
  • the acid value and the hydroxyl value were determined by a method according to JIS K 0070: 1992.
  • the viscosity of the binder resin produced in each production example is such that the obtained binder resin solution (solid content 40% by mass) is dried under reduced pressure under the conditions of a pressure of 20 to 30 hPa and a temperature of 80 ° C., and the solid content concentration is 60% by mass. After concentrating until it became, the mixture was circulated and heated in a hot water bath at 90 ° C., and determined using a B-type viscometer.
  • a xanthene-based metal lake coloring material 3 which is a metal lake coloring material of a xanthene dye.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 ( ⁇ -type copper phthalocyanine pigment, DIC FASTOGEN BLUE A510) 100 parts by mass and 5 parts by mass of the blue color material derivative 1 having the basic moiety are 1.5 by mass at 60 ° C. with an attritor. Time-dried crushed. C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, basic treatment PB 15: 6 was obtained.
  • Synthesis Example 6 Synthesis of Acid Dispersant A1 (Polymer having a Structural Unit Represented by the General Formula (I))
  • Synthesis of macromonomer MM-1 80.0 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (abbreviated as PGMEA) was added to a reactor equipped with a cooling tube, an addition funnel, an inlet for nitrogen, a mechanical stirrer, and a digital thermometer. The mixture was charged and heated to a temperature of 90 ° C. while stirring under a nitrogen stream.
  • PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • AIBN bisisobutyronitrile
  • a 49.5% by mass solution of macromonomer MM-1 was obtained by adding 10 parts by mass and 10 parts by mass of PGMEA and stirring for 3 hours.
  • the obtained macromonomer MM-1 had a weight average molecular weight (Mw) 4010, a number average molecular weight (Mn) 1910, and a molecular weight distribution (Mw / Mn) 2.10.
  • graft copolymer A1 had a weight average molecular weight (Mw) 10570, a number average molecular weight (Mn) 4370, and a molecular weight distribution (Mw / Mn) 2.42.
  • a polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) A reactor equipped with a cooling tube, a funnel for addition, an inlet for nitrogen, a mechanical stirrer, and a digital thermometer. 2.80 parts by mass of PGMEA and 9.27 parts by mass of phenylphosphonic acid (product name "PPA” manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were charged and heated to a temperature of 90 ° C. while stirring under a nitrogen stream.
  • a polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) (acidic dispersant A1) is obtained by dropping 100.0 parts by mass of the graft copolymer A1 over 30 minutes and heating and stirring for 2 hours.
  • a solution (solid content 25.0% by mass) was obtained.
  • the progress of the esterification reaction between GMA and PPA of the obtained acidic dispersant A1 was confirmed by acid value measurement and 1 H-NMR measurement (it was confirmed that the epoxy-derived peak had disappeared).
  • the acid value of the obtained acid dispersant A1 was 98 mgKOH / g.
  • a lake color material 4 which is a black-blue solid and has an average primary particle size of 40 nm and is a lake color material of a triarylmethane dye and a polyacid anion is obtained. rice field.
  • the addition reaction was carried out for 15 hours to obtain one solution of the binder resin (weight average molecular weight (Mw) 14,900, acid value 67 mgKOH / g, hydroxyl value 129 mgKOH / g, solid content 40% by mass).
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • Preparation Example 1 Preparation of rake coloring material 1 dispersion
  • 10 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 of Synthesis Example 1 10 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 of Synthesis Example 1, 20 parts by mass of the acidic dispersant A1 solution of Synthesis Example 6 (effective solid content 5.0 parts by mass), and 7.5 parts by mass of the alkali-soluble resin
  • a solution of Synthesis Example 8 A portion (3.0 parts by mass of effective solid content) and 62.5 parts by mass of PGMEA are mixed, and 2 mm zirconia beads are used as a pre-dispersion in a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Iron Works) for 1 hour, and 0.1 mm zirconia as a main dispersion. The mixture was dispersed with beads for 4 hours to obtain a rake coloring material 1 dispersion.
  • Preparation Example 7 Preparation of Rake Color Material 4 Dispersion Liquid
  • the rake color is the same as in Preparation Example 1 except that 10 parts by mass of the rake color material 4 of Synthesis Example 6 is used instead of 10 parts by mass of the rake color material 1 of Synthesis Example 1.
  • a dispersion liquid of the material 4 was prepared.
  • Irgacure 907 BASF, ⁇ -aminoketone-based photoinitiator 3.53 parts by mass, KayaCure DETX-S (Nippon Kayaku, thioxanthone-based photoinitiator, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone) 0
  • a photosensitive binder component 1 was obtained by adding .39 parts by mass, 0.78 parts by mass of IRGANOX1010 (manufactured by BASF) and 44.1 parts by mass of PGMEA as an antioxidant.
  • Example 1 23.2 parts by mass of 1 dispersion of rake colorant of Preparation Example 1, 32.1 parts by mass of photosensitive binder component 1 of Preparation Example I, 0.03 parts by mass of surfactant Megafuck R08MH (manufactured by DIC), 44.7 parts by mass of PGMEA The parts by mass were mixed to obtain the photosensitive colored resin composition of Example 1.
  • Examples 2 to 9, Comparative Examples 1 to 10 In the preparation of the photosensitive colored resin composition of Example 1, instead of the photosensitive binder component 1, the photosensitive binder components 2 to 9 are used in Examples 2 to 9, and the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 is used in Comparative Examples 1 to 10.
  • the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 2 to 9 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that C10 was used.
  • Example 10 Comparative Examples 13 to 15
  • the mass ratio of the rake coloring material 1 and the xanthene-based metal rake coloring material 3 was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion. : 17.6 parts by mass of the lake color material 1 dispersion and 1.32 parts by mass of the xanthene metal lake color material 3 dispersion so that the xanthene-based metal lake color material 3) is 93.0: 7.0.
  • the photosensitive binder component 1 32.1 parts by mass the photosensitive binder component 2 34.0 parts by mass was used in Example 10, and the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 34.0 parts by mass was used in Comparative Example 13.
  • Comparative Example 14 34.0 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C4 was used, and in Comparative Example 15, 34.0 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used, and the amount of PGMEA added was 47.1 to 47.1 parts by mass.
  • the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Example 10 and Comparative Examples 13 to 15 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the parts were changed to parts by mass.
  • Example 11 Comparative Examples 16 to 18
  • the mass ratio of the lake coloring material 1 to the xanthene dye 1 (lake coloring material 1: xanthene based) instead of 23.2 parts by mass of the lake coloring material 1 dispersion.
  • the photosensitive binder component 1 32 .1 instead of 1 part by mass, in Example 11, the photosensitive binder component 2 34.4 parts by mass, in Comparative Example 16, the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 34.4 parts by mass, and in Comparative Example 17, the comparative photosensitive binder component.
  • Example 12 Comparative Examples 19 to 21
  • the mass ratio of the lake coloring material 1 and the xanthene dye 2 (lake coloring material 1: xanthene based) instead of 23.2 parts by mass of the lake coloring material 1 dispersion.
  • the dye 2) 94.2: 5.8, use 17.3 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion and 1.06 parts by mass of the xanthene dye 2 solution, and further, the photosensitive binder component 1 32. .1
  • the photosensitive binder component 2 34.4 parts by mass
  • Comparative Example 19 the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 34.4 parts by mass
  • Comparative Example 20 the comparative photosensitive binder component.
  • Example 21 except that 34.4 parts by mass of C4 was used and 34.4 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used in Comparative Example 21 and the amount of PGMEA added was changed from 44.7 parts by mass to 47.2 parts by mass.
  • photosensitive colored resin compositions of Example 12 and Comparative Examples 19 to 21 were obtained.
  • Example 13 Comparative Examples 24-26
  • the mass ratio of the rake coloring material 1 to the basic treatment PB 15: 6 was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion (lake coloring material 1: 18.3 parts by mass of rake coloring material 1 dispersion and 12.4 parts by mass of PB15: 6 dispersion were used so that the basic treatment PB15: 6) was 59.6: 40.4, and further photosensitive.
  • Binder component 1 instead of 32.1 parts by mass, in Example 13, the photosensitive binder component 2 28.7 parts by mass was compared, in Comparative Example 24, the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 28.7 parts by mass was compared, and in Comparative Example 25, the comparison was made. 28.7 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component C4 was used, and 28.7 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used in Comparative Example 26, except that the amount of PGMEA added was changed from 44.7 parts by mass to 40.6 parts by mass. Obtained the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Example 13 and Comparative Examples 24 to 26 in the same manner as in Example 1.
  • Examples 1-2 to 9-2, Comparative Examples 1-2 to 10-2 In the preparation of the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10, the rake colorant 4 dispersion of Preparation Example 7 was used instead of the rake colorant 1 dispersion of Preparation Example 1. Obtained photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 1-2 to 9-2 and Comparative Examples 1-2 to 10-2 in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10.
  • a colored layer which is a cured film of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the comparative example, was formed. After forming the colored layer, the pattern profile was measured with a film thickness meter of a stylus type profiler "P-17" manufactured by KLA-Tencor. Using the center of the base pattern as a reference, the film thickness difference between the portion 15 ⁇ m away from the center and the central portion was determined and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. (Colored layer shape evaluation criteria) A: Film thickness difference is less than 0.05 ⁇ m B: Film thickness difference is 0.05 ⁇ m or more and less than 0.1 ⁇ m C: Film thickness difference is 0.1 ⁇ m or more
  • lens cleaner manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc., trade name: Toraysee MK Clean Cloth
  • the brightness (Y) of the obtained colored substrate was measured using a "microspectroscopy measuring device OSP-SP200" manufactured by Olympus Corporation, and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • ⁇ Eab ⁇ (L 1 ⁇ L 0 ) 2 + (a 1 ⁇ a 0 ) 2 + (b 1 ⁇ b 0 ) 2 ⁇ 1/2 It is evaluated that the smaller the value of ⁇ Eab, the better the heat resistance. If ⁇ Eab is less than 3.0, it is judged that there is no practical problem. (Heat resistance evaluation standard) A: ⁇ Eab is less than 2.0 B: ⁇ Eab is 2.0 or more and less than 3.0 C: ⁇ Eab is 3.0 or more
  • the metal lake coloring material 3 means the xanthene-based metal lake coloring material 3 obtained in Synthesis Example 4
  • PB15: 6 means the basic treatment obtained in Synthesis Example 5. It means PB15: 6, and PV23 is a commercially available C.I. I. Means Pigment Violet 23.
  • the dispersant A1 means the acidic dispersant A1 obtained in Synthesis Example 6, and the dispersant B1 means the acidic dispersant B1 obtained in Synthesis Example 7.
  • the structural units derived from the color material containing at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake color materials and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) are 5 to 5.
  • Comparative Examples 1 to 4, 13 to 14, 16 to 17, 19 to 20, 24 to 25 and 1-2 to 4-2 the comparative binder resins C1 to C4 containing no hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit were used. Since either one was used, the effect of suppressing the development residue was inferior. Among them, Comparative Examples 4, 14, 17, 20, 25 using the comparative binder resin C4 which does not contain hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate units, has a weight average molecular weight of less than 11000, and has an acid value of more than 130 mgKOH / g. And 4-2 were particularly inferior in the effect of suppressing the development residue.
  • the copolymer used as the binder resin contained a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit. It is considered that the reason why the colored layer was excellent in flatness even though it was not contained was that the acid value of the copolymer was relatively high at 108 to 147 mgKOH / g.
  • the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer used as the binder resin contains the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the above-mentioned specific amount, so that the acid value is 60.
  • the generation of development residue is suppressed even if the acid value is relatively high.
  • the acid values of the binder resins 8 and 9 used are as high as those of Comparative Examples 1 to 3, but the generation of development residues is suppressed.
  • the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer used as the binder resin contains the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the above-mentioned specific amount, whereby the binder in the resin composition is contained.
  • the generation of residue is suppressed because the component having low developability other than the resin interacts with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit and the component having low developability is involved in the development. If the binder resin does not contain enough hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate units and has a high acid value, the developability of the binder resin alone becomes too high, and the components with low developability are left behind, resulting in a residue. It is thought that it is likely to occur.
  • Comparative Examples 5 and 5-2 since the comparative binder resin C5 which does not contain the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit and has a weight average molecular weight of less than 11000 was used, Comparative Examples 6 to 10, 15, 18, 21, 26 and In 6-2 to 10-2, the comparative binder resins C6 to C10 having a weight average molecular weight of less than 11000 were used, so that the flatness of the colored layer was inferior.
  • Comparative Examples 11 to 12, 22 to 23 and 27 to 28 the brightness of the colored layer was inferior because only the pigment was used as the coloring material.
  • Comparative Examples 12, 23 and 28 the same comparative binder resin C5 as in Comparative Example 5 was used, but the flatness of the colored layer was excellent. As a result, it was clarified that when a pigment is used as a coloring material, the problem of impairing the flatness of the colored layer is unlikely to occur.
  • Substrate 2 Light-shielding part 3 Colored layer 3R Red colored layer 3G Green colored layer 3B Blue colored layer 3B'Blue coating 10 Color filter 20 Opposing substrate 30 Liquid crystal layer 40 Liquid crystal display device 50 Organic protective layer 60 Inorganic oxide film 71 Transparent anode 72 Hole injection layer 73 Hole transport layer 74 Light emitting layer 75 Electron injection layer 76 Cathode 80 Organic light emitter 100 Organic light emission display device

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a photosensitive colored resin composition for color filters that contains a coloring material, a binder resin, a monomer, a photoinitiator, and a solvent, wherein the coloring material is at least one material selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials, and the binder resin contains a copolymer that has a polymer structure including 5-25 mass% of a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylate and represented by general formula (A), that has a weight-average molecular weight of not less than 11000, and that has an acid value of 60-130 mgKOH/g. (In general formula (A), RA represents a methyl group or a hydrogen atom, and RB represents a C1-C4 alkylene group.)

Description

カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物、硬化物、カラーフィルタ、及び表示装置Photosensitive colored resin compositions for color filters, cured products, color filters, and display devices
 本発明は、カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物及びその硬化物、カラーフィルタ、並びに表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter, a cured product thereof, a color filter, and a display device.
 近年、パーソナルコンピューターの発達、特に携帯用パーソナルコンピューターの発達に伴って、液晶ディスプレイの需要が増加している。モバイルディスプレイ(携帯電話、スマートフォン、タブレットPC)の普及率も高まっており、益々液晶ディスプレイの市場は拡大する状況にある。また、最近においては、自発光により視認性が高い有機ELディスプレイのような有機発光表示装置も、次世代画像表示装置として注目されている。これらの画像表示装置の性能においては、コントラストや色再現性の向上といったさらなる高画質化や消費電力の低減が強く望まれている。 In recent years, with the development of personal computers, especially portable personal computers, the demand for liquid crystal displays has increased. The penetration rate of mobile displays (mobile phones, smartphones, tablet PCs) is also increasing, and the market for liquid crystal displays is expanding more and more. Recently, organic light emitting display devices such as organic EL displays having high visibility due to self-luminous light have also attracted attention as next-generation image display devices. In terms of the performance of these image display devices, further improvement in image quality and reduction in power consumption such as improvement in contrast and color reproducibility are strongly desired.
 これらの液晶表示装置や有機発光表示装置には、カラーフィルタが用いられる。例えば液晶表示装置のカラー画像の形成は、カラーフィルタを通過した光がそのままカラーフィルタを構成する各画素の色に着色されて、それらの色の光が合成されてカラー画像を形成する。その際の光源としては、従来の冷陰極管のほか、白色発光の有機発光素子や白色発光の無機発光素子が利用される場合がある。また、有機発光表示装置では、色調整などのためにカラーフィルタを用いる。
 このような状況下、カラーフィルタにおいても、高輝度化や高コントラスト化、色再現性の向上といった要望が高まっている。
Color filters are used in these liquid crystal displays and organic light emitting displays. For example, in the formation of a color image of a liquid crystal display device, the light that has passed through the color filter is colored as it is in the color of each pixel constituting the color filter, and the light of those colors is combined to form a color image. As the light source at that time, in addition to the conventional cold cathode fluorescent lamp, an organic light emitting element that emits white light or an inorganic light emitting element that emits white light may be used. Further, in the organic light emission display device, a color filter is used for color adjustment and the like.
Under such circumstances, there is an increasing demand for color filters as well, such as higher brightness, higher contrast, and improved color reproducibility.
 ここで、カラーフィルタは、一般的に、透明基板と、透明基板上に形成され、赤、緑、青の三原色の着色パターンからなる着色層と、各着色パターンを区画するように透明基板上に形成された遮光部とを有している。
 カラーフィルタにおける着色層の形成方法としては、例えば、分散剤等により色材を分散してなる色材分散液にバインダー樹脂、光重合性化合物及び光開始剤を添加してなる感光性着色樹脂組成物をガラス基板に塗布して乾燥後、フォトマスクを用いて露光し、現像を行うことによって着色パターンを形成し、加熱することによりパターンを固着して着色層を形成する。これらの工程を、各色ごとに繰り返してカラーフィルタを形成する。
Here, the color filter is generally formed on a transparent substrate, a colored layer formed on the transparent substrate and composed of colored patterns of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue, and on the transparent substrate so as to partition each colored pattern. It has a formed light-shielding portion.
As a method for forming a colored layer in a color filter, for example, a photosensitive colored resin composition obtained by adding a binder resin, a photopolymerizable compound and a photoinitiator to a color material dispersion liquid in which a color material is dispersed with a dispersant or the like. An object is applied to a glass substrate, dried, exposed with a photomask, and developed to form a colored pattern, and heated to fix the pattern to form a colored layer. These steps are repeated for each color to form a color filter.
 カラーフィルタ形成用感光性着色樹脂組成物には、着色層を正確に形成できる優れた現像性が要求される。
 特許文献1には、顔料、バインダー樹脂、多官能性モノマー、光開始剤、分散剤、および溶剤を含有し、前記バインダー樹脂が、アルキルシクロヘキシル基を有するアルキルシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレートと、酸基を有するモノマーとが少なくとも共重合されてなる主鎖構造を有する共重合体を含み、前記共重合体の水酸基価が15mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gの範囲内であるカラーフィルタ用着色感光性樹脂組成物が開示されている。
 特許文献1には、当該着色感光性樹脂組成物が、未露光箇所における現像残渣が少なく、露光箇所における残膜率が高いことが記載されている。
The photosensitive colored resin composition for forming a color filter is required to have excellent developability capable of accurately forming a colored layer.
Patent Document 1 contains a pigment, a binder resin, a polyfunctional monomer, a photoinitiator, a dispersant, and a solvent, and the binder resin contains an alkylcyclohexyl (meth) acrylate having an alkylcyclohexyl group and an acid group. A colored photosensitive resin composition for a color filter, which comprises a copolymer having a main chain structure obtained by at least copolymerizing a monomer having the same, and the hydroxyl value of the copolymer is in the range of 15 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g. Is disclosed.
Patent Document 1 describes that the colored photosensitive resin composition has a small amount of development residue in unexposed areas and a high residual film ratio in exposed areas.
 また、カラーフィルタ形成用感光性着色樹脂組成物には、高輝度の着色層を形成できることが要求される。そのため、色材として、微細化した顔料を使用すること、或いは、より高透過率な色材として染料又はレーキ色材を使用することが検討されている。 Further, the photosensitive coloring resin composition for forming a color filter is required to be able to form a high-luminance coloring layer. Therefore, it is considered to use a finely divided pigment as a coloring material, or to use a dye or a lake coloring material as a coloring material having a higher transmittance.
特開2009-276674号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-276674
 本発明者らは、カラーフィルタの輝度を高めるために、感光性着色樹脂組成物の色材として染料又はレーキ色材を使用することを試みた。しかし、染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を使用して赤、緑、青など2色以上の着色層が所定パターン状に配列された着色層パターンを形成する場合には、画素内膜厚分布が不均一となって、画素の平坦性が損なわれることが判明した。
 本発明は、上記実情に鑑みてなされたものであり、染料及びレーキ色材から選ばれる少なくとも1種の色材を含有することにより高輝度であり、しかも、平坦性に優れ、現像残渣の発生が抑制された着色層を形成できるカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物を提供することを目的とする。また、本発明は、当該感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物、並びに、当該感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成されたカラーフィルタ及び表示装置を提供することを目的とする。
The present inventors have attempted to use a dye or a lake colorant as the colorant of the photosensitive coloring resin composition in order to increase the brightness of the color filter. However, when a photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material is used to form a colored layer pattern in which two or more colored layers such as red, green, and blue are arranged in a predetermined pattern, the colored layer pattern is formed. It was found that the in-pixel film thickness distribution became non-uniform and the flatness of the pixels was impaired.
The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and by containing at least one color material selected from dyes and lake color materials, it has high brightness, excellent flatness, and generation of development residue. It is an object of the present invention to provide a photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter capable of forming a colored layer in which the amount is suppressed. Another object of the present invention is to provide a cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition, and a color filter and a display device formed by using the photosensitive coloring resin composition.
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物は、色材、バインダー樹脂、モノマー、光開始剤、および溶剤を含有するカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物であって、
 前記色材が、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
 前記バインダー樹脂が、下記一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を5~25質量%含む高分子構造を有し、重量平均分子量が11000以上であり、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gである共重合体を含む。
The photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention is a photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter containing a coloring material, a binder resin, a monomer, a light initiator, and a solvent.
The coloring material contains at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials.
The binder resin has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the following general formula (A), has a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and has an acid value. Contains a copolymer of 60-130 mgKOH / g.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(一般式(A)中、Rはメチル基又は水素原子を表し、Rは、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(In the general formula ( A ), RA represents a methyl group or a hydrogen atom, and RB represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.)
 本発明は、前記本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物を提供する。
 本発明は、基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタであって、当該着色層の少なくとも1つが、前記本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物である、カラーフィルタを提供する。
The present invention provides a cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention.
The present invention is a color filter including at least a substrate and a colored layer provided on the substrate, and at least one of the colored layers is a curing of the photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention. It provides a color filter, which is a thing.
 本発明は、前記本発明に係るカラーフィルタを有する、表示装置を提供する。 The present invention provides a display device having the color filter according to the present invention.
 本発明によれば、染料及びレーキ色材から選ばれる少なくとも1種の色材を含有することにより高輝度であり、しかも、平坦性に優れ、現像残渣の発生が抑制された着色層を形成できるカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物が提供される。また、本発明によれば、当該感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物、並びに、当該感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成されたカラーフィルタ及び表示装置が提供される。 According to the present invention, by containing at least one color material selected from a dye and a lake color material, it is possible to form a colored layer having high brightness, excellent flatness, and suppressed generation of development residue. A photosensitive colored resin composition for a color filter is provided. Further, according to the present invention, there is provided a cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition, and a color filter and a display device formed by using the photosensitive coloring resin composition.
図1は、本発明のカラーフィルタの一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention. 図2は、本発明の液晶表示装置の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention. 図3は、本発明の有機発光表示装置の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing an example of the organic light emitting display device of the present invention. 図4は、顔料を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いてカラーフィルタの着色層を形成する従来法の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method for forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a pigment. 図5は、染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いてカラーフィルタの着色層を形成する従来法の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method for forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material.
 以下、本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物及びその製造方法、並びに、本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物、本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成されたカラーフィルタ及び表示装置について、順に詳細に説明する。
 なお、本発明において光には、可視及び非可視領域の波長の電磁波、さらには放射線が含まれ、放射線には、例えばマイクロ波、電子線が含まれる。具体的には、波長5μm以下の電磁波、及び電子線のことをいう。
 本発明において(メタ)アクリロイルとは、アクリロイル及びメタクリロイルの各々を表し、(メタ)アクリルとは、アクリル及びメタクリルの各々を表し、(メタ)アクリレートとは、アクリレート及びメタクリレートの各々を表す。
 また、本明細書において数値範囲を示す「~」とは、その前後に記載された数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本発明において固形分とは、感光性着色樹脂組成物に含有される成分のうち溶剤以外のもの全てであり、モノマー等の液状成分も含まれる。
Hereinafter, a photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention and a method for producing the same, a cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention, and a photosensitive coloring resin for a color filter according to the present invention. The color filter and the display device formed by using the composition will be described in detail in order.
In the present invention, the light includes electromagnetic waves having wavelengths in the visible and invisible regions, and further includes radiation, and the radiation includes, for example, microwaves and electron beams. Specifically, it refers to an electromagnetic wave having a wavelength of 5 μm or less and an electron beam.
In the present invention, (meth) acryloyl represents each of acryloyl and methacrylic, (meth) acrylic represents each of acrylic and methacrylic, and (meth) acrylate represents each of acrylate and methacrylate.
Further, in the present specification, "-" indicating a numerical range is used in the sense that the numerical values described before and after the numerical range are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
In the present invention, the solid content is all the components other than the solvent among the components contained in the photosensitive coloring resin composition, and also includes liquid components such as monomers.
I.カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物(以下において「感光性着色樹脂組成物」と称する場合がある。)は、色材、バインダー樹脂、モノマー、光開始剤、および溶剤を含有するカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物であって、
 前記色材が、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
 前記バインダー樹脂が、後述する一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を5~25質量%含む高分子構造を有し、重量平均分子量が11000以上であり、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gである共重合体を含む、カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物である。
I. Photosensitive Colored Resin Composition for Color Filters The photosensitive colored resin composition for color filters according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “photosensitive colored resin composition”) is a coloring material, a binder resin, a monomer, and the like. A photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter containing a light initiator and a solvent.
The coloring material contains at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials.
The binder resin has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) described later, has a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and is an acid. A photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter, which comprises a copolymer having a value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g.
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物は、色材として染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含有する。染料及びレーキ色材は、顔料と比べて透過率が高いため、感光性着色樹脂組成物の色材として染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を用いることにより高輝度の着色層を形成することができる。
 しかし、感光性着色樹脂組成物を基板上に塗布し、所定パターン状に露光し、現像して着色層を形成する一連の工程を、色材の色を変えて一つの基板に順次行うことにより、赤、緑、青など2色以上の着色層が所定パターン状に配列された着色層パターンを形成する方法において、染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を使用する場合には、2番目以降に形成される着色層の膜厚分布が不均一となって、画素の平坦性が損なわれることが判明した。
 画素内膜厚分布の均一性は、画素内の色度均一性にかかわり、画質向上にとって重要な要素である。特に、表示装置の高解像度化に合わせて画素密度が高くなると、画素内膜厚分布の均一性が画質に与える影響は大きくなる。
 画素の平坦性が損なわれるという問題は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の色材として染料又はレーキ色材を用いる場合に特に顕著である。
The photosensitive coloring resin composition according to the present invention contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a dye and a rake coloring material as a coloring material. Since the dye and the rake coloring material have higher transmittance than the pigment, a high-brightness coloring layer is used as the coloring material of the photosensitive coloring resin composition by using at least one selected from the group consisting of the dye and the rake coloring material. Can be formed.
However, by applying a photosensitive colored resin composition on a substrate, exposing it in a predetermined pattern, and developing it to form a colored layer, a series of steps of changing the color of the coloring material are sequentially performed on one substrate. In the method of forming a colored layer pattern in which two or more colored layers such as red, green, and blue are arranged in a predetermined pattern, when a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material is used, It was found that the film thickness distribution of the second and subsequent colored layers became non-uniform, and the flatness of the pixels was impaired.
The uniformity of the film thickness distribution in the pixel is related to the uniformity of the chromaticity in the pixel and is an important factor for improving the image quality. In particular, as the pixel density increases as the resolution of the display device increases, the effect of the uniformity of the film thickness distribution in the pixel on the image quality increases.
The problem that the flatness of the pixels is impaired is particularly remarkable when a dye or a lake coloring material is used as the coloring material of the photosensitive coloring resin composition.
 図4は、顔料を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いてカラーフィルタの着色層を形成する従来法の一例を示す概略図である。図4は、基板上に、赤色着色層3Rおよび緑色着色層3Gをこの順に形成した後、青色着色層3Bを形成する工程を示す。図4の4(a)は、各着色層の境界となる遮光部2、赤色着色層3Rおよび緑色着色層3Gを設けた基板上に、青色の感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて青色塗膜3B’を形成した状態を示している。青色塗膜3B’は塗布面の凹凸形状に追従するため、塗膜表面の高さが青色着色層を形成する領域では相対的に低くなり、赤色着色層3Rおよび緑色着色層3Gを設けた領域では相対的に高くなる。青色着色層を形成する領域内に限れば、青色塗膜3B’は厚さが一定であり、その表面が下地の表面形状に追従して平坦になる。次に、この青色塗膜3B’を加熱乾燥する。加熱乾燥後の青色塗膜3B’は、図4の4(b)に示すように、加熱乾燥前と同じ形状を維持している。加熱乾燥後、青色塗膜3B’を所定パターン状に露光して、青色着色層を形成する領域を選択的に硬化させた後、現像することにより、図4の4(c)に示すように、平坦な形状の青色着色層3Bが形成される。 FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method of forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a pigment. FIG. 4 shows a step of forming the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G on the substrate in this order, and then forming the blue colored layer 3B. 4 (a) of FIG. 4 shows a blue coating film using a blue photosensitive colored resin composition on a substrate provided with a light-shielding portion 2, a red colored layer 3R, and a green colored layer 3G, which are boundaries of each colored layer. It shows the state in which 3B'is formed. Since the blue coating film 3B'follows the uneven shape of the coated surface, the height of the coating film surface is relatively low in the region forming the blue colored layer, and the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G. Then it will be relatively high. As long as it is limited to the region where the blue colored layer is formed, the thickness of the blue coating film 3B'is constant, and the surface thereof becomes flat according to the surface shape of the base. Next, the blue coating film 3B'is heated and dried. As shown in 4 (b) of FIG. 4, the blue coating film 3B'after heat-drying maintains the same shape as before heat-drying. After heat-drying, the blue coating film 3B'is exposed to a predetermined pattern, the region forming the blue colored layer is selectively cured, and then developed, as shown in 4 (c) of FIG. , A flat blue colored layer 3B is formed.
 一方、図5は、染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いてカラーフィルタの着色層を形成する従来法の一例を示す概略図である。図5は、基板上に、赤色着色層3Rおよび緑色着色層3Gをこの順に形成した後、青色着色層3Bを形成する工程を示す。図5の5(a)は、各着色層の境界となる遮光部2、赤色着色層3Rおよび緑色着色層3Gを設けた基板上に、青色の感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて青色塗膜3B’を形成した状態を示している。この段階では、染料又はレーキ色材を含有する青色塗膜3B’は、図4の4(a)の顔料を含有する青色塗膜3B’と同様に、塗膜表面の高さが青色着色層を形成する領域では相対的に低くなり、赤色着色層3Rおよび緑色着色層3Gを設けた領域では相対的に高くなるが、青色着色層を形成する領域内に限れば、青色塗膜3B’は厚さが一定であり、その表面が下地の表面形状に追従して平坦になる。なお、図5の5(a)に示されている緑色着色層3Gは、基板上に2番目に形成された着色層であり、図4の4(a)の顔料を含有する緑色着色層3Gとは異なり、平坦性に劣る形状を有している。この点については後で説明する。
 次に、この青色塗膜3B’を加熱乾燥すると、青色塗膜が加熱によって流動するため、図5の5(b)に示すように、青色塗膜3B’のうち、赤色着色層3R及び緑色着色層3Gを設けた領域に存在する塗膜表面の高さが相対的に高い部分が、赤色着色層3Rを設けた領域と青色着色層を形成する領域の境界、及び、緑色着色層3Gを設けた領域と青色着色層を形成する領域の境界を越えて、青色着色層を形成する領域に存在する塗膜表面の高さが相対的に低い部分に流入する。そのため、加熱乾燥後の青色塗膜3B’は、下地の表面形状への追従性を失い、赤色着色層3Rを設けた領域と青色着色層を形成する領域の境界付近、及び、緑色着色層3Gを設けた領域と青色着色層を形成する領域の境界付近において塗膜表面が相対的に高くなり、中央部において塗膜表面が相対的に低くなり、全体的には中央部がへこんだ表面形状になる。加熱乾燥後、青色塗膜を所定パターン状に露光して、青色着色層を形成する領域を選択的に硬化させた後、現像することにより、図5の5(c)に示すように、中央部がへこんだ形状の青色着色層3Bが形成される。
On the other hand, FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing an example of a conventional method of forming a colored layer of a color filter using a photosensitive colored resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material. FIG. 5 shows a step of forming the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G on the substrate in this order, and then forming the blue colored layer 3B. 5 (a) of FIG. 5 shows a blue coating film using a blue photosensitive colored resin composition on a substrate provided with a light-shielding portion 2, a red colored layer 3R, and a green colored layer 3G, which are boundaries of each colored layer. It shows the state where 3B'is formed. At this stage, the blue coating film 3B'containing the dye or the rake coloring material has a blue-colored layer having a coating film surface height similar to that of the blue coating film 3B'containing the pigment of FIG. 4 (a). It is relatively low in the region forming the blue colored layer, and relatively high in the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the green colored layer 3G, but the blue coating film 3B'is limited to the region forming the blue colored layer. The thickness is constant, and the surface of the surface follows the surface shape of the base and becomes flat. The green colored layer 3G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the second colored layer formed on the substrate, and is the green colored layer 3G containing the pigment of FIG. 4 (a). Unlike, it has a shape that is inferior in flatness. This point will be described later.
Next, when the blue coating film 3B'is heated and dried, the blue coating film flows by heating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), of the blue coating film 3B', the red colored layer 3R and the green color are used. The portion where the height of the coating film surface existing in the region provided with the colored layer 3G is relatively high forms the boundary between the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the region forming the blue colored layer, and the green colored layer 3G. Beyond the boundary between the provided region and the region forming the blue colored layer, it flows into the portion where the height of the coating film surface existing in the region forming the blue colored layer is relatively low. Therefore, the blue coating film 3B'after heat drying loses the ability to follow the surface shape of the base, and is near the boundary between the region provided with the red colored layer 3R and the region forming the blue colored layer, and the green colored layer 3G. The surface of the coating film is relatively high near the boundary between the region where the blue color is formed and the region where the blue colored layer is formed, the surface of the coating film is relatively low in the central portion, and the surface shape is dented in the central portion as a whole. become. After heat-drying, the blue coating film is exposed to a predetermined pattern, the region forming the blue colored layer is selectively cured, and then developed, so that the center is shown in FIG. 5 (c). A blue colored layer 3B having a dented portion is formed.
 染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて、基板上に2番目以降の着色層を形成する場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜が加熱乾燥工程で上記と同じように軟化、流動し、下地の表面形状への追従性を失うため、基板上に先に形成されていた着色層と隣接する境界付近において塗膜表面が相対的に高い形状の着色層が形成されやすい。
 例えば、染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて、基板上に、赤色着色層、緑色着色層および青色着色層をこの順に形成する場合に、緑色着色層は図5の5(a)に示すように、赤色着色層と隣接する境界部の塗膜高さが相対的に高く、中央部および赤色着色層から遠い部分の塗膜高さが相対的に低い形状になりやすい。
When the second and subsequent colored layers are formed on the substrate by using the photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a rake coloring material, the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin composition is described above in the heating and drying step. In the same way, it softens and flows, and loses its ability to follow the surface shape of the substrate. Therefore, a colored layer having a relatively high coating film surface near the boundary adjacent to the colored layer previously formed on the substrate is formed. Easy to form.
For example, when a red coloring layer, a green coloring layer, and a blue coloring layer are formed in this order on a substrate by using a photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a lake coloring material, the green coloring layer is shown in FIG. As shown in 5 (a), the height of the coating film at the boundary portion adjacent to the red colored layer is relatively high, and the height of the coating film at the central portion and the portion far from the red colored layer is relatively low. Cheap.
 感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときの流動性が、用いる色材によって異なる原因については、色材として顔料を用いる場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物中に顔料の微粒子が分散しているため加熱乾燥時に塗膜が軟化しても粘度がそれほど低くならないのに対し、色材として染料又はレーキ色材を用いる場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物中に染料又はレーキ色材が溶解または顔料粒子よりも微細化した状態で分散しているため、加熱乾燥時に塗膜が軟化すると粘度が低くなり、流動性が大きくなるためと推測される。 The reason why the fluidity of the photosensitive coloring resin composition when the coating film is heated and dried differs depending on the coloring material used is that when a pigment is used as the coloring material, fine particles of the pigment are contained in the photosensitive coloring resin composition. Since it is dispersed, the viscosity does not decrease so much even if the coating film softens during heating and drying, whereas when a dye or lake coloring material is used as the coloring material, the dye or lake color is added to the photosensitive coloring resin composition. It is presumed that since the material is dissolved or dispersed in a state of being finer than the pigment particles, the viscosity decreases and the fluidity increases when the coating film softens during heating and drying.
 本発明においては、感光性着色樹脂組成物の色材として染料又はレーキ色材を用いる場合に特有の上記問題を、後述する一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を5~25質量%含む高分子構造を有し、重量平均分子量が11000以上であり、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gである共重合体(以下「ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体」と称する場合がある。)を含むバインダー樹脂を用いることにより解決する。
 染料又はレーキ色材を含有する感光性着色樹脂組成物に、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を含むバインダー樹脂を用いる場合には、基板上に形成した感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときに流動性の増大が抑制されるので、感光性着色樹脂組成物を基板に塗布したときの塗膜の平坦性が加熱乾燥後も変わらず維持されやすく、平坦性に優れた形状の着色層が形成される。
 上記のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を含むバインダー樹脂を用いる場合に、平坦性に優れた形状の着色層が形成される理由は、次のように推測される。
 感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときに、塗膜中の溶媒量が減少してバインダー樹脂分子の分子間距離が小さくなり、バインダー樹脂分子間の結合力に対する水素結合の影響が増大する。上記のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位の含有量が適切な範囲に調節されているので、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときに、軟化した塗膜の粘度を、バインダー樹脂分子間の水素結合をヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基が促進する効果によって上昇させて、塗膜の流動化を抑制することができると考えられる。
 また、上記のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、重量平均分子量が適切な範囲に調節されているので、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときに、軟化した塗膜の粘度を分子量効果によって上昇させて、塗膜の流動化を抑制することができると考えられる。
 感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜の軟化を抑制する他の方法として、溶融粘度が高い他の樹脂をバインダー樹脂として使用する方法や、バインダー樹脂内の水素結合を促進する他の官能基を有する樹脂をバインダー樹脂として使用する方法も考えられるが、上記のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、比較的少量で着色層の形状を効果的に平坦化することができ、かつ、着色層の色調へ悪影響を及ぼさない点で優れている。
In the present invention, the above-mentioned problem peculiar to the case where a dye or a rake coloring material is used as the coloring material of the photosensitive coloring resin composition is solved by a configuration derived from a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) described later. A copolymer having a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of units, a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and an acid value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g (hereinafter, “hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer weight”). It may be referred to as "coalescence"), which can be solved by using a binder resin.
When a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is used as the photosensitive coloring resin composition containing a dye or a rake coloring material, the photosensitive coloring resin composition formed on the substrate is coated. Since the increase in fluidity is suppressed when the film is heated and dried, the flatness of the coating film when the photosensitive colored resin composition is applied to the substrate is easily maintained even after heating and drying, and is excellent in flatness. A colored layer having a different shape is formed.
When the binder resin containing the above hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is used, the reason why the colored layer having an excellent flatness is formed is presumed as follows.
When the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is heated and dried, the amount of the solvent in the coating film is reduced and the intermolecular distance between the binder resin molecules is reduced, and the influence of hydrogen bonds on the binding force between the binder resin molecules is affected. Increase. In the above hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the content of the constituent units derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate is adjusted to an appropriate range, so that the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin composition is heated. When dried, the viscosity of the softened coating film is increased by the effect of promoting hydrogen bonds between the binder resin molecules by the hydroxyl group of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, thereby suppressing the fluidization of the coating film. It is thought that it can be done.
Further, since the weight average molecular weight of the above-mentioned hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is adjusted to an appropriate range, the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is softened when the coating film is heated and dried. It is considered that the viscosity of the film can be increased by the molecular weight effect to suppress the fluidization of the coating film.
As another method of suppressing the softening of the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition, a method of using another resin having a high melt viscosity as a binder resin and another method of promoting hydrogen bonding in the binder resin have other functional groups. A method of using a resin as a binder resin is also conceivable, but the above-mentioned hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer can effectively flatten the shape of the colored layer with a relatively small amount, and is colored. It is excellent in that it does not adversely affect the color tone of the layer.
 さらに、上記のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を含むバインダー樹脂を用いる場合には、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価が適切な範囲に調節されているので、現像残渣を少なくすることができる。
 一般的に、バインダー樹脂の酸価が大きいほどバインダー樹脂内の水素結合が形成されやすくなるため、上記の説明に従うとすれば、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価が大きいほど着色層の形状を平坦化する効果を向上させることができる。しかし、バインダー樹脂の酸価が大きすぎると、基板上の現像残渣が増えてしまう。
 本発明においては、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量およびヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位の含有量を適切な範囲に調節したことによって、着色層の形状を効果的に平坦化することができるので、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価を、着色層の平坦化の観点から極端に大きくする必要がなく、現像残渣を少なくする観点で適切な範囲とすることができる。
Further, when the binder resin containing the above-mentioned hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is used, the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is adjusted to an appropriate range. The development residue can be reduced.
In general, the higher the acid value of the binder resin, the easier it is for hydrogen bonds to be formed in the binder resin. Therefore, according to the above explanation, the higher the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the higher the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. The effect of flattening the shape of the colored layer can be improved. However, if the acid value of the binder resin is too high, the development residue on the substrate increases.
In the present invention, the shape of the colored layer is effective by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer and the content of the constituent units derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate to an appropriate range. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer extremely high from the viewpoint of flattening the colored layer, and it is appropriate from the viewpoint of reducing the development residue. Range can be set.
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物が含有する各成分について、以下に説明する。
[色材]
<染料及びレーキ色材>
 本発明においては、色材として、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を用いる。
 本発明において、染料とは、着色機能を発揮し得る有効量を溶媒に溶解することができる色材を意味する。レーキ色材とは、染料をレーキ化剤によりレーキ化したものである。
 染料及びレーキ色材は、バインダー樹脂等のマトリックス中に溶解するか又は極めて微細な粒子の状態で分散し、組成物の透明性を損なわないため、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を色材として用いることによって、カラーフィルタの輝度を高くすることができる。
Each component contained in the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to the present invention will be described below.
[Color material]
<Dyes and rake coloring materials>
In the present invention, at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials is used as the coloring material.
In the present invention, the dye means a coloring material capable of dissolving an effective amount capable of exhibiting a coloring function in a solvent. The rake coloring material is a dye that has been raked with a rake agent.
The dye and the rake colorant are at least selected from the group consisting of the dye and the rake colorant because they are dissolved in a matrix such as a binder resin or dispersed in the form of extremely fine particles and do not impair the transparency of the composition. By using one type as a coloring material, the brightness of the color filter can be increased.
 本発明で用いられる染料及びレーキ色材は特に制限されない。
 染料としては、例えば、アゾ系染料、金属錯塩アゾ系染料、アントラキノン系染料、トリアリールメタン系染料、キサンテン系染料、シアニン系染料、ナフトキノン系染料、キノンイミン系染料、メチン系染料、フタロシアニン系染料などを挙げることができる。
 レーキ色材としては、例えば、上記のような染料をレーキ化剤によりレーキ化したもの等が挙げられる。レーキ化剤は、染料に応じて適宜選択して用いられ、アニオン染料(酸性染料)には、レーキ化剤として当該染料のカウンターカチオンを生じる化合物が用いられ、カチオン染料(塩基性染料)には、レーキ化剤として当該染料のカウンターアニオンを生じる化合物が用いられる。このようなレーキ化剤としては、公知のものを使用することができ、特に限定はされないが、カチオン染料(塩基性染料)に用いられるレーキ化剤としては、例えば、有機アニオンのアルカリ金属塩やアルカリ土類金属塩、及び、無機アニオンのアルカリ塩やアルカリ金属塩等が挙げられ、アニオン染料(酸性染料)に用いられるレーキ化剤としては、例えば、アンモニウムカチオンを発生するアミン化合物、及び、所望の金属イオンを有する金属塩等を挙げることができる。
 また、本発明に用いられるレーキ色材としては、例えば、1価又は2価以上のカチオン染料(塩基性染料)と、2価以上のポリアニオンとが塩を形成したレーキ色材、及び、1価又は2価以上のアニオン染料(酸性染料)と、2価以上のポリカチオンとが塩を形成したレーキ色材等を好ましく用いることができる。
 本発明に用いられる染料及びレーキ色材として、具体的には例えば、特開2015-96947号公報に記載される染料、特開2016-27149号公報に記載される青色染料、特開2017-16099号公報に記載されるレーキ色材である化合物(Aa)、及び染料(Ab)等を挙げることができる。
The dye and rake coloring material used in the present invention are not particularly limited.
Examples of the dyes include azo dyes, metal complex salt azo dyes, anthraquinone dyes, triarylmethane dyes, xanthene dyes, cyanine dyes, naphthoquinone dyes, quinoneimine dyes, methine dyes, phthalocyanine dyes and the like. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the rake coloring material include those obtained by rake-forming the above dyes with a rake agent. The rake agent is appropriately selected and used according to the dye, and the anionic dye (acid dye) is a compound that produces a counter cation of the dye as the rake agent, and the cationic dye (basic dye) is used. , A compound that produces a counter anion of the dye is used as the rake agent. As such a rake agent, known ones can be used, and the rake agent used for the cationic dye (basic dye) is not particularly limited, but the rake agent used is, for example, an alkali metal salt of an organic anion or the like. Examples thereof include alkaline earth metal salts, alkaline salts of inorganic anions, alkali metal salts, and the like, and examples of the rake agent used for anionic dyes (acidic dyes) include amine compounds that generate ammonium cations, and desired ones. A metal salt having a metal ion of the above can be mentioned.
The rake color material used in the present invention includes, for example, a rake color material in which a monovalent or divalent or higher cation dye (basic dye) and a divalent or higher polyanion form a salt, and a monovalent rake color material. Alternatively, a lake color material or the like in which a divalent or higher anionic dye (acidic dye) and a divalent or higher polycation form a salt can be preferably used.
Specific examples of the dye and rake color material used in the present invention include dyes described in JP-A-2015-96947, blue dyes described in JP-A-2016-27149, and JP-A-2017-160099. Examples thereof include a compound (Aa) and a dye (Ab), which are lake coloring materials described in Japanese Patent Publication No.
 中でも、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、レーキ色材を含むと、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価が比較的大きくても現像残渣の発生を抑制しやすい点から好ましい。レーキ色材は、酸と塩基の塩構造を有することにより水酸基との親和性が高いため、レーキ色材は染料及び顔料に比べて、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体との相溶性が良好である。そのため、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、レーキ色材とヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体とを組み合わせて含むと、現像液への溶解性が均一化されることにより、現像残渣の発生を抑制することができる。中でも、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基価が後述する好ましい範囲内である場合は、レーキ色材との相溶性が更に向上するため、現像残渣抑制効果が特に優れる。 Above all, when the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains a lake coloring material, it is easy to suppress the generation of development residue even if the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is relatively large. preferable. Since the lake color material has a high affinity with hydroxyl groups due to its acid-base salt structure, the lake color material is more compatible with hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers than dyes and pigments. Is good. Therefore, when the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains a rake coloring material and a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer in combination, the solubility in a developing solution is made uniform, so that the developing material is developed. The generation of residue can be suppressed. Above all, when the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is within the preferable range described later, the compatibility with the rake coloring material is further improved, so that the effect of suppressing the development residue is particularly excellent.
 また、レーキ色材の中でも、トリアリールメタン系又はキサンテン系レーキ色材は、着色層の輝度及び耐熱性を向上しやすい点から好ましい。青色調色時に高輝度を達成可能な点、及び耐熱性がより向上しやすい点から、トリアリールメタン系染料のレーキ色材を含むことが特に好ましい。
 レーキ色材に用いられるトリアリールメタン系染料及びキサンテン系染料は、公知のものの中から適宜選択することができ、特に限定はされない。トリアリールメタン系染料としては、例えば、C.I.ベーシックブルー7、8、11、26等が挙げられる。キサンテン系染料としては、例えば、C.I.アシッドレッド50、51、52、87、92、94、289、388、C.I.アシッドバイオレット9、30、102、スルホローダミンG、スルホローダミンB、スルホローダミン101、スルホローダミン640等のキサンテン系酸性染料;C.I.ベーシックバイオレット11等のキサンテン系塩基性染料等が挙げられる。
Further, among the lake coloring materials, triarylmethane-based or xanthene-based lake coloring materials are preferable because they can easily improve the brightness and heat resistance of the colored layer. It is particularly preferable to include a rake coloring material of a triarylmethane dye because high brightness can be achieved at the time of blue toning and heat resistance is easily improved.
The triarylmethane dye and the xanthene dye used for the rake coloring material can be appropriately selected from known dyes, and are not particularly limited. Examples of the triarylmethane dye include C.I. I. Basic blue 7, 8, 11, 26 and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the xanthene dye include C.I. I. Acid Red 50, 51, 52, 87, 92, 94, 289, 388, C.I. I. Xanthene acid dyes such as Acid Violet 9, 30, 102, Sulforhodamine G, Sulforhodamine B, Sulforhodamine 101, Sulforhodamine 640; C.I. I. Examples thereof include xanthene-based basic dyes such as Basic Violet 11.
 また、本発明に用いられるレーキ色材は、発色性部位を1つのみ有するものであってもよいが、発色性部位を2つ以上有するものであると、より高輝度で耐熱性に優れる着色層が得られる点から好ましい。ここで、発色性部位を2つ以上有するレーキ色材とは、1つの発色性部位を有する複数の染料分子がレーキ化剤とイオン結合したものであってもよいし、複数の発色性部位を有する1つの染料分子がレーキ化剤とイオン結合したものであってもよいし、複数の発色性部位を有する複数の染料分子がレーキ化剤とイオン結合したものであってもよい。
 中でも、高輝度で耐熱性に優れる着色層を得る点から、本発明に用いられる色材は、下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材を含むことが好ましく、下記一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材を含むことがより好ましい。下記一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材は、2価以上のカチオン染料(塩基性染料)と、2価以上のポリ酸アニオンとが塩を形成したレーキ色材であり、下記一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材は、1価のカチオン染料2つ以上と、2価以上のポリ酸アニオンとが塩を形成したレーキ色材である。いずれのレーキ色材も、ポリ酸アニオンと塩を形成しない染料分子が生じる場合があり、特に、下記一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材においてカチオンの数とアニオンの数が異なる場合に、ポリ酸アニオンと塩を形成しない染料分子が生じやすい。ポリ酸アニオンと塩を形成しない染料分子は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中の酸性基と塩を形成し得る。下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材は、酸と塩基の塩構造が上記共重合体中のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位との親和性が高いことに加えて、ポリ酸アニオンと塩を形成しない染料分子が上記共重合体中の酸性基を有する構成単位と塩を形成し得るため、下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材を含む本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、当該レーキ色材と上記共重合体とが会合した複合体が形成されて、熱運動を阻害する効果が大きくなるため、耐熱性が向上すると推定される。
 また、下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材も、酸と塩基の塩構造を有することにより、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体との相溶性が良好であるため、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価が比較的大きくても現像残渣の発生を抑制することができる。
 中でも、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基価が後述する好ましい範囲内である場合は、下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材との相溶性が更に向上するため、現像残渣抑制効果が特に優れる。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価及び水酸基価が後述する好ましい範囲内である場合は、下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材と会合した複合体が形成されやすいため、耐熱性向上効果に特に優れる。
Further, the rake coloring material used in the present invention may have only one color-developing portion, but if it has two or more color-developing portions, it is colored with higher luminance and excellent heat resistance. It is preferable because a layer can be obtained. Here, the rake coloring material having two or more color-developing parts may be a material in which a plurality of dye molecules having one color-developing part are ionically bonded to a rake agent, or a plurality of color-developing parts may be formed. One dye molecule having a dye molecule may be ionically bonded to a rake agent, or a plurality of dye molecules having a plurality of color-developing sites may be ionically bonded to the rake agent.
Above all, from the viewpoint of obtaining a colored layer having high brightness and excellent heat resistance, the coloring material used in the present invention preferably contains a rake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2). It is more preferable to include a rake colorant represented by the following general formula (1). The rake color material represented by the following general formula (1) is a rake color material in which a divalent or higher cationic dye (basic dye) and a divalent or higher polyacid anion form a salt, and the following general formula is used. The rake color material represented by (2) is a rake color material in which two or more monovalent cation dyes and a divalent or more polyacid anion form a salt. In any of the lake coloring materials, a dye molecule that does not form a salt with the polyacid anion may be generated, and particularly when the number of cations and the number of anions are different in the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1). , Dye molecules that do not form salts with polyacid anions are likely to occur. Dye molecules that do not form salts with polyacid anions can form salts with acidic groups in hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers. In the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2), in addition to the fact that the salt structure of the acid and the base has a high affinity with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the above-mentioned copolymer. Since the dye molecule that does not form a salt with the polyacid anion can form a salt with the structural unit having an acidic group in the above-mentioned copolymer, the rake represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2). In the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention containing a coloring material, a composite in which the rake coloring material and the copolymer are associated is formed, and the effect of inhibiting thermal motion is increased, so that the heat resistance is improved. It is estimated that.
Further, the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2) also has a salt structure of an acid and a base, so that the compatibility with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is high. Since it is good, the generation of development residue can be suppressed even if the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is relatively large.
Above all, when the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is within the preferable range described later, compatibility with the rake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2). Is further improved, so that the effect of suppressing the development residue is particularly excellent. When the acid value and the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer were within the preferable ranges described later, they were associated with the lake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2). Since the complex is easily formed, the effect of improving heat resistance is particularly excellent.
(一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材)
 以下に、本発明において好ましく用いられる一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材について詳細に説明する。
(Rake color material represented by the general formula (1))
Hereinafter, the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) preferably used in the present invention will be described in detail.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(一般式(1)中、Aは、Nと直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないa価の有機基であって、当該有機基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基、又は当該脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基を表し、炭素鎖中にヘテロ原子が含まれていてもよい。Bc-はc価のポリ酸アニオンを表す。R~Rは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、RiiとRiii、RivとRが結合して環構造を形成してもよい。Rvi及びRviiは各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基を表す。Arは置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族基を表す。複数あるR~Rvii及びArはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 a及びcは2以上の整数、b及びdは1以上の整数を表す。eは0又は1であり、eが0のとき結合は存在しない。f及びgは0以上4以下の整数を表し、f+e及びg+eは0以上4以下である。複数あるe、f及びgはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(In the general formula (1), A is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N does not have a π bond, and the organic group is at least saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon at the terminal directly bonded to N. It represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a hydrogen group or an aromatic group having the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and a hetero atom may be contained in the carbon chain. B c- represents a c-valent polyacid anion. Represented. R i to R v each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and represents R ii and R ii i , and R iv and R. v may be bonded to form a ring structure. R vi and R vii may independently have an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano. Representing a group. Ar 1 represents a divalent aromatic group which may have a substituent. A plurality of Ri to R vii and Ar 1 may be the same or different from each other.
a and c represent integers of 2 or more, and b and d represent integers of 1 or more. e is 0 or 1, and when e is 0, there is no bond. f and g represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and f + e and g + e are 0 or more and 4 or less. The plurality of e, f, and g may be the same or different from each other. )
 前記一般式(1)で表される色材は、2価以上のアニオンと、2価以上のカチオンとを含むため、当該色材の凝集体においては、アニオンとカチオンが単に1分子対1分子でイオン結合しているのではなく、イオン結合を介して複数の分子が会合する分子会合体を形成し得ることから、見かけの分子量が、従来のレーキ色材の分子量に比べて格段に増大する。このような分子会合体の形成により固体状態での凝集力がより高まり、熱運動を低下させ、イオン対の解離やカチオン部の分解を抑制でき、従来のレーキ色材に比べて退色し難いと推定される。 Since the coloring material represented by the general formula (1) contains a divalent or higher anion and a divalent or higher cation, in the aggregate of the coloring material, the anion and the cation are simply one molecule to one molecule. The apparent molecular weight is significantly increased compared to the molecular weight of the conventional rake coloring material because it is possible to form a molecular assembly in which a plurality of molecules are associated via an ionic bond instead of being ionic bonded in the above. .. The formation of such molecular aggregates further enhances the cohesive force in the solid state, reduces thermal motion, suppresses the dissociation of ion pairs and the decomposition of cations, and is less likely to fade than conventional lake coloring materials. Presumed.
 前記一般式(1)におけるAは、N(窒素原子)と直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないa価の有機基であって、当該有機基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基、又は当該脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基を表し、炭素鎖中にO(酸素原子)、S(硫黄原子)、N(窒素原子)等のヘテロ原子が含まれていてもよいものである。すなわち、当該有機基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、炭素鎖中にO、S、N等のヘテロ原子が含まれてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、Nと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、炭素鎖中にO、S、N等のヘテロ原子が含まれてもよい芳香族基を表す。Nと直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないため、カチオン性の発色部位が有する色調や透過率等の色特性は、連結基Aや他の発色部位の影響を受けず、単量体と同様の色を保持することができる。 A in the general formula (1) is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N (nitrogen atom) does not have a π bond, and the organic group is saturated at least at the terminal directly bonded to N. Represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic group having the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and O (oxygen atom), S (sulfur atom), N (nitrogen atom), etc. in the carbon chain. Heteroatoms may be contained. That is, the organic group has a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at least at the terminal directly bonded to N, and a heteroatom such as O, S, N may be contained in the carbon chain. Alternatively, it represents an aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N, and a heteroatom such as O, S, N may be contained in the carbon chain. .. Since the carbon atom directly bonded to N does not have a π bond, the color characteristics such as color tone and transmittance of the cationic color-developing site are not affected by the linking group A and other color-developing sites, and are not affected by the monomer. Similar colors can be retained.
  Aにおいて、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基は、Nと直接結合する末端の炭素原子がπ結合を有しなければ、直鎖、分岐又は環状のいずれであってもよく、末端以外の炭素原子が不飽和結合を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよく、炭素鎖中に、O、S、Nが含まれていてもよい。例えば、カルボニル基、カルボキシ基、オキシカルボニル基、アミド基等が含まれていてもよく、水素原子が更にハロゲン原子等に置換されていてもよい。
  また、Aにおいて上記脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基を有する、単環又は多環芳香族基が挙げられ、置換基を有していてもよく、O、S、Nが含まれる複素環であってもよい。
  中でも、骨格の堅牢性の点から、Aは、環状の脂肪族炭化水素基又は芳香族基を含むことが好ましい。
 環状の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、シクロヘキサン、シクロペンタン、ノルボルナン、ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン、トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカン、アダマンタンを含む基等が挙げられる。また、芳香族基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環を含む基等が挙げられる。例えば、Aが2価の有機基の場合、炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐、又は環状のアルキレン基や、キシリレン基等の炭素数1~20のアルキレン基を2個置換した芳香族基等が挙げられる。
In A, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at least at the terminal directly bonded to N is linear, branched or cyclic if the carbon atom at the terminal directly bonded to N does not have a π bond. Any of these may be used, carbon atoms other than the terminal may have an unsaturated bond, or may have a substituent, and the carbon chain contains O, S, and N. May be good. For example, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an amide group and the like may be contained, and a hydrogen atom may be further substituted with a halogen atom or the like.
Further, in A, the aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at a terminal that is directly bonded to at least N. It may be mentioned and may have a substituent, and may be a heterocycle containing O, S, N.
Above all, from the viewpoint of skeletal robustness, A preferably contains a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic group.
Examples of the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group include a group containing cyclohexane, cyclopentane, norbornane, bicyclo [2.2.2] octane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane, and adamantane. .. Examples of the aromatic group include a group containing a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring. For example, when A is a divalent organic group, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aromatic group in which two alkylene groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a xylylene group are substituted is substituted. And so on.
 本発明においては、堅牢性と、分子運動の自由度を両立して、耐熱性を向上する点から、Aが、2個以上の環状脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、Nと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、炭素鎖中にO、S、Nが含まれてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。Aは、2個以上のシクロアルキレン基を有し、Nと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有し、炭素鎖中にO、S、Nが含まれてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、中でも、2個以上の環状脂肪族炭化水素基が直鎖又は分岐の脂肪族炭化水素基で連結した構造を有することが更に好ましい。
 2個以上ある環状脂肪族炭化水素基は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよく、例えば、前記環状の脂肪族炭化水素基と同様のものが挙げられ、中でもシクロヘキサン、シクロペンタンが好ましい。
In the present invention, A has two or more cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and is directly bonded to N from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance by achieving both robustness and freedom of molecular movement. It is preferable that the aliphatic hydrocarbon group has a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group and O, S, and N may be contained in the carbon chain. A is an aliphatic hydrocarbon having two or more cycloalkylene groups, having a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group at the terminal directly bonded to N, and may contain O, S, N in the carbon chain. It is more preferably a group, and more preferably has a structure in which two or more cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups are linked by a linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
The two or more cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups may be the same or different from each other. For example, the same group as the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group can be mentioned, and cyclohexane and cyclopentane are preferable.
 本発明においては、耐熱性の点から、中でも、前記Aが、下記一般式(1a)で表される置換基であることが好ましい。 In the present invention, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, it is preferable that A is a substituent represented by the following general formula (1a).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(一般式(1a)中、Rxiは置換基として炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基を有してもよい炭素数1以上3以下のアルキレン基を表し、Rxii及びRxiiiは各々独立に炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基を表し、pは1以上3以下の整数を、q及びrは各々独立に0以上4以下の整数を表す。Rxi、Rxii、Rxiii及びrが複数ある場合、当該複数あるRxi、Rxii、Rxiii及びrは互いに同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
(In the general formula (1a), R xi has an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms as a substituent, or an alkylene group having 1 or more and 3 or less carbon atoms which may have an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms. R xii and R xiii independently represent an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, p is an integer of 1 or more and 3 or less, and q and r are independent of each other. Represents an integer of 0 or more and 4 or less. When there are a plurality of R xi, R xi, R xiii and r, the plurality of R xi , R xii , R xiii and r may be the same or different from each other. .)
 堅牢性と、発色部位の熱運動との両立に優れ、耐熱性が向上する点から、Rxiにおける炭素数1以上3以下のアルキレン基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基等が挙げられ、中でもメチレン基又はエチレン基が好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。
 炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基が挙げられ、直鎖状であっても分岐を有していてもよい。
 また、炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基としては、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基が挙げられ、直鎖状であっても分岐を有していてもよい。
Examples of the alkylene group having 1 or more and 3 or less carbon atoms in R xi include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group and the like from the viewpoint of excellent compatibility between fastness and thermal motion of the colored portion and improvement in heat resistance. Of these, a methylene group or an ethylene group is preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group, which may be linear or have a branch.
Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group and a butoxy group, which may be linear or have a branch.
 Rxii及びRxiiiにおける、炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、及び、炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基は、前記Rxiが有してもよい置換基と同様のものが挙げられる。 Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms and the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms in R xii and R xiii are the same as the substituents that R xi may have.
 一般式(1a)において、シクロヘキサン(シクロヘキシレン基)は2個以上4個以下、即ち、pが1以上3以下であることが、耐熱性の点から好ましく、中でもpが1以上2以下であることがより好ましい。
 またシクロヘキシレン基が有する置換基Rxii及びRxiiiの置換数は、特に限定されないが、耐熱性の点から、1個以上3個以下であることが好ましく、1個以上2個以下であることがより好ましい。即ちq及びrが1以上3以下の整数であることが好ましく、q及びrが1以上2以下の整数であることが好ましい。
In the general formula (1a), it is preferable that the number of cyclohexane (cyclohexylene group) is 2 or more and 4 or less, that is, p is 1 or more and 3 or less, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, and p is 1 or more and 2 or less. Is more preferable.
The number of substitutions of the substituents R xii and R xiii contained in the cyclohexylene group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more and 3 or less, and preferably 1 or more and 2 or less, from the viewpoint of heat resistance. Is more preferable. That is, q and r are preferably integers of 1 or more and 3 or less, and q and r are preferably integers of 1 or more and 2 or less.
 このような連結基Aの好適な具体例としては、以下のものが挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Preferable specific examples of such a linking group A include, but are not limited to, the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 R~Rにおけるアルキル基は、特に限定されない。例えば、炭素数1~20の直鎖、分岐状又は環状のアルキル基等が挙げられ、中でも、炭素数が1~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることが挙げられ、炭素数が1~5の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることが、輝度及び耐熱性の点から挙げられ、R~Rにおけるアルキル基がエチル基又はメチル基であることが挙げられる。アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アリール基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、アルコキシ基等が挙げられ、置換されたアルキル基としては、ベンジル基のようなアラルキル基等が挙げられる。
 R~Rにおけるアリール基は、特に限定されない。例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基等が挙げられる。アリール基が有してもよい置換基としては、例えばアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、水酸基等が挙げられる。
 中でも化学的安定性の点からR~Rとしては、各々独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、RiiとRiii、RivとRが結合してピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、モルホリン環を形成していることが好ましい。
The alkyl group in R i to R v is not particularly limited. For example, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms can be mentioned, and among them, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms can be mentioned, and the number of carbon atoms is 1. The linear or branched alkyl group of to 5 is mentioned from the viewpoint of brightness and heat resistance, and the alkyl group in Ri to Rv is an ethyl group or a methyl group. The substituent which the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group and the like, and the substituted alkyl group is an aralkyl group such as a benzyl group. And so on.
The aryl group in R i to R v is not particularly limited. For example, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group may have include an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group and the like.
Among them, from the viewpoint of chemical stability, R i to R v are independently bonded to a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or R ii and R ii , and R iv and R v . It is preferable to form a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, and a morpholine ring.
 耐熱性の点からは、Rii~Rのうち少なくとも一つが、置換基を有してもよいシクロアルキル基、又は、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基であることが好ましい。Rii~Rのうち少なくとも一つが、シクロアルキル基、又は、アリール基を有することにより、立体障害による分子間相互作用が低減するため、発色部位の熱に対する影響を抑制できることから、耐熱性に優れていると考えられる。 From the viewpoint of heat resistance, it is preferable that at least one of R ii to R v is a cycloalkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent. Since at least one of Rii to Rv has a cycloalkyl group or an aryl group, the intramolecular interaction due to steric hindrance is reduced, and the influence on the heat of the color-developing site can be suppressed. Considered to be excellent.
 耐熱性の点からは、Rii~Rのうち少なくとも一つが、下記一般式(1b)又は、下記一般式(1c)で表される置換基であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of heat resistance, it is preferable that at least one of R ii to R v is a substituent represented by the following general formula (1b) or the following general formula (1c).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(一般式(1b)中、Rxiv、Rxv、及びRxviは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
(In the general formula (1b), R xiv , R xv , and R xvi may each independently have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, or a substituent. It represents a good alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(一般式(1c)中、Rxvii、Rxviii、及びRxixは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(In the general formula (1c), R xvii , R xviii , and R xix may each independently have a hydrogen atom and a substituent, even if they have an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, or a substituent. It represents a good alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms.)
 Rxiv、Rxv、Rxvi、Rxvii、Rxviii、及びRxixにおける炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基が挙げられ、直鎖状であっても分岐を有していてもよい。また、炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基としては、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基が挙げられ、直鎖状であっても分岐を有していてもよい。
 前記アルキル基及びアルコキシ基が有してもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms in R xiv , R xv , R xvi , R xvii , R xviii , and R xix include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group, and are linear. It may be present or have a branch. Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group and a butoxy group, which may be linear or have a branch.
Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may have include a halogen atom and a hydroxyl group.
 前記一般式(1b)で表される置換基を有する場合、耐熱性の点から、Rxiv、Rxv、及びRxviの少なくとも一つが、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、Rxiv及びRxvの少なくとも一つが、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基であることがより好ましい。 When having a substituent represented by the general formula (1b), at least one of R xiv , R xv , and R xvi may have a substituent having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms from the viewpoint of heat resistance. Is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms which may have an alkyl group or a substituent, and at least one of R xiv and R xv may have 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. More preferably, it is an alkyl group having 4 or less, or an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
 また前記一般式(1c)で表される置換基を有する場合、耐熱性の点から、Rxvii、Rxviii、及びRxixの少なくとも一つが、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、Rxvii及びRxviiiの少なくとも一つが、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基、又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Further, when having a substituent represented by the general formula (1c), at least one of R xvii , R xviii , and R xix may have a substituent having 1 or more carbon atoms 4 from the viewpoint of heat resistance. The following alkyl group or alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferable, and at least one of R xvii and R xviii may have a substituent and has 1 carbon number. It is more preferable that the alkyl group has 4 or less or an alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
 一般式(1b)で表される置換基、及び、一般式(1c)で表される置換基の好適な具体例としては、以下のものが挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Preferable specific examples of the substituent represented by the general formula (1b) and the substituent represented by the general formula (1c) include, but are not limited to, the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 Rvi及びRviiは各々独立に置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基を表す。Rvi及びRviiにおけるアルキル基としては、特に限定されないが、炭素数が1以上8以下の直鎖、又は分岐を有するアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1以上4以下のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基が挙げられ、直鎖状であっても分岐を有していてもよい。アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アリール基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、アルコキシ基等が挙げられる。
 また、Rvi及びRviiにおけるアルコキシ基としては、特に限定されないが、炭素数が1以上8以下の直鎖、又は分岐を有するアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1以上4以下のアルコキシ基であることがより好ましい。炭素数1以上4以下のアルコキシ基としては、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基が挙げられ、直鎖状であっても分岐を有していてもよい。アルコキシ基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アリール基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、アルコキシ基等が挙げられる。
 Rvi及びRviiにおけるハロゲン原子としては、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 Rvi及びRviiの置換数、即ち、f及びgはそれぞれ独立に0以上4以下の整数を表し、中でも0以上2以下であることが好ましく、0以上1以下であることがより好ましい。複数あるf及びgはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 また、Rvi及びRviiは、トリアリールメタン骨格、又は、キサンテン骨格内の共鳴構造を有する芳香環のいずれの部位に置換されていてもよいが、中でも、-NRiiiii又は-NRivで表されるアミノ基の置換位置を基準にメタ位に置換されていることが好ましい。
R vi and R vii each represent an alkyl group which may independently have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano group. The alkyl group in R vi and R vii is not particularly limited, but is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms. It is more preferable to have. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group, which may be linear or have a branch. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and an alkoxy group.
The alkoxy group in R vi and R vii is not particularly limited, but is preferably a linear or branched alkoxy group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms, and has 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms. It is more preferable that it is a group. Examples of the alkoxy group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group and a butoxy group, which may be linear or have a branch. The substituent that the alkoxy group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and an alkoxy group.
Examples of the halogen atom in R vi and R vii include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
The number of substitutions of R vi and R vii , that is, f and g independently represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and among them, 0 or more and 2 or less are preferable, and 0 or more and 1 or less are more preferable. The plurality of f and g may be the same or different from each other.
Further, R vi and R vii may be substituted with any site of a triarylmethane skeleton or an aromatic ring having a resonance structure in a xanthene skeleton, and among them, -NR ii R ii or -NR iv . It is preferable that the amino group is substituted at the meta position based on the substitution position of the amino group represented by Rv .
 Arにおける2価の芳香族基は特に限定されない。Arにおける芳香族基は、炭素環からなる芳香族炭化水素基の他、複素環基であってもよい。芳香族炭化水素基における芳香族炭化水素としては、ベンゼン環の他、ナフタレン環、テトラリン環、インデン環、フルオレン環、アントラセン環、フェナントレン環等の縮合多環芳香族炭化水素;ビフェニル、ターフェニル、ジフェニルメタン、トリフェニルメタン、スチルベン等の鎖状多環式炭化水素が挙げられる。当該鎖状多環式炭化水素においては、ジフェニルエーテル等のように鎖状骨格中にO、S、Nを有していてもよい。一方、複素環基における複素環としては、フラン、チオフェン、ピロール、オキサゾール、チアゾール、イミダゾール、ピラゾール等の5員複素環;ピラン、ピロン、ピリジン、ピロン、ピリダジン、ピリミジン、ピラジン等の6員複素環;ベンゾフラン、チオナフテン、インドール、カルバゾール、クマリン、ベンゾ-ピロン、キノリン、イソキノリン、アクリジン、フタラジン、キナゾリン、キノキサリン等の縮合多環式複素環が挙げられる。これらの芳香族基は更に置換基として、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、及び、これらで置換されていても良いフェニル基等を有していてもよい。 The divalent aromatic group in Ar 1 is not particularly limited. The aromatic group in Ar 1 may be a heterocyclic group as well as an aromatic hydrocarbon group composed of a carbon ring. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbons in the aromatic hydrocarbon group include fused polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons such as naphthalene ring, tetraline ring, inden ring, fluorene ring, anthracene ring, and phenanthrene ring, in addition to the benzene ring; biphenyl, terphenyl, and the like. Examples thereof include chain polycyclic hydrocarbons such as diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, and stilben. The chain polycyclic hydrocarbon may have O, S, and N in the chain skeleton like diphenyl ether and the like. On the other hand, the heterocycles in the heterocyclic group include 5-membered heterocycles such as furan, thiophene, pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole and pyrazole; and 6-membered heterocycles such as pyran, pyrone, pyridine, pyrone, pyridazine, pyrimidine and pyrazine. ; Condensed polycyclic heterocycles such as benzofuran, thionaphthene, indol, carbazole, coumarin, benzo-pyrone, quinoline, isoquinoline, acridin, phthalazine, quinazoline, quinoxalin and the like can be mentioned. These aromatic groups may further have an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, a phenyl group which may be substituted with these, or the like as a substituent.
 1分子内に複数あるR~Rvii及びArは、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。R~Rvii及びArの組み合わせにより、所望の色に調整することができる。 A plurality of R i to R vii and Ar 1 in one molecule may be the same or different. The desired color can be adjusted by the combination of R i to R vii and Ar 1 .
  Aにおける価数aは、カチオンを構成する発色性カチオン部位の数であり、aは2以上の整数である。このレーキ色材においては、カチオンの価数aが2以上であるため、耐熱性に優れている。aの上限は特に限定されないが、製造の容易性の点から、aが4以下であることが好ましく、3以下であることがより好ましい。 The valence a in A is the number of color-developing cation sites constituting the cation, and a is an integer of 2 or more. In this rake coloring material, since the cation valence a is 2 or more, it is excellent in heat resistance. The upper limit of a is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of ease of production, a is preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less.
 一般式(1)で表される色材において、カチオン部は、耐熱性に優れ、加熱時の色変化が抑制され易い点から、分子量が1200以上であることが好ましく、1300以上であることが好ましい。 In the coloring material represented by the general formula (1), the cation portion has excellent heat resistance and color change during heating is easily suppressed. Therefore, the molecular weight is preferably 1200 or more, and preferably 1300 or more. preferable.
  一般式(1)で表される色材において、アニオン部(Bc-)は、高輝度で耐熱性に優れる点から、c価のポリ酸アニオンであって、2価以上のアニオンである。 In the coloring material represented by the general formula (1), the anion portion (B c− ) is a c-valent polyacid anion and is a divalent or higher anion because of its high brightness and excellent heat resistance.
 複数のオキソ酸が縮合したポリ酸アニオンとしては、イソポリ酸アニオン(Mc-であってもヘテロポリ酸アニオン(Xc-であってもよい。上記イオン式中、Mはポリ原子、Xはヘテロ原子、mはポリ原子の組成比、nは酸素原子の組成比、lはヘテロ原子の組成比を表す。ポリ原子Mとしては、例えば、Mo、W、V、Ti、Nb等が挙げられる。またヘテロ原子Xとしては、例えば、Si、P、As、S、Fe、Co等が挙げられる。また、一部にNaやH等の対カチオンが含まれていてもよい。
 中でも、耐熱性に優れる点から、タングステン(W)及びモリブデン(Mo)より選択される1種以上の元素を有するポリ酸であることが好ましい。
 このようなポリ酸としては、例えば、イソポリ酸である、タングステン酸イオン[W10324-、モリブデン酸イオン[Mo192-や、ヘテロポリ酸である、リンタングステン酸イオン[PW12403-、[P18626-、ケイタングステン酸イオン[SiW12404-、リンモリブデン酸イオン[PMo12403-、ケイモリブデン酸イオン[SiMo12404-、リンタングストモリブデン酸イオン[PW12-sMo403-(sは1以上11以下の整数)、[P18-tMo626-(tは1以上17以下の整数)、ケイタングストモリブデン酸イオン[SiW12-uMo404-(uは1以上11以下の整数)等が挙げられる。タングステン(W)及びモリブデン(Mo)の少なくとも1種を含むポリ酸としては、耐熱性の点、及び原料入手の容易さの点から、上記の中でもヘテロポリ酸であることが好ましく、更にリン(P)を含むヘテロポリ酸であることがより好ましい。
 さらに、リンタングストモリブデン酸イオン[PW10Mo403-、[PW11Mo403-、リンタングステン酸イオン[PW12403-のいずれかであることが耐熱性の点からさらに好ましい。
The polyacid anion in which a plurality of oxo acids are condensed may be an isopolyacid anion ( MmOn ) c- or a heteropolyacid anion ( XlMmOn ) c- . In the above ionic formula, M represents a poly atom, X represents a hetero atom, m represents a composition ratio of a poly atom, n represents a composition ratio of an oxygen atom, and l represents a composition ratio of a hetero atom. Examples of the poly atom M include Mo, W, V, Ti, Nb and the like. Examples of the heteroatom X include Si, P, As, S, Fe, and Co. Further, a counter cation such as Na + or H + may be partially contained.
Among them, a polyacid having one or more elements selected from tungsten (W) and molybdenum (Mo) is preferable from the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance.
Examples of such polyacids include tungstate ion [W 10 O 32 ] 4- , molybdenum acid ion [Mo 6 O 19 ] 2- which is an isopoly acid, and phosphotung acid ion [W 10 O 19] which is a heteropoly acid. PW 12 O 40 ] 3- , [P 2 W 18 O 62 ] 6- , Heteropolymetalate ion [SiW 12 O 40 ] 4- , Phosphormolybdenum acid ion [PMo 12 O 40 ] 3- , Heteropolymolybdenum acid ion [ SiMo 12 O 40 ] 4- , Lintangst molybdenum acid ion [PW 12-s Mo s O 40 ] 3- (s is an integer between 1 and 11), [P 2 W 18-t Mo t O 62 ] 6- (T is an integer of 1 or more and 17 or less), Caetangst molybdenum acid ion [SiW 12-u Mo u O 40 ] 4- (u is an integer of 1 or more and 11 or less) and the like. The polyacid containing at least one of tungsten (W) and molybdenum (Mo) is preferably a heteropolyacid among the above, from the viewpoint of heat resistance and easy availability of raw materials, and further, phosphorus (P). ) Is more preferable.
Further, it is heat resistant to be one of lintangustomolybdate ion [PW 10 Mo 2 O 40 ] 3- , [PW 11 Mo 1 O 40 ] 3- , and phosphotungstic acid ion [PW 12 O 40 ] 3- . It is more preferable from the viewpoint of.
  一般式(1)におけるbはカチオンの数を、dは分子会合体中のアニオンの数を示し、b及びdは1以上の整数を表す。bが2以上の場合、分子会合体中に複数あるカチオンは、1種単独であっても、2種以上が組み合わされていてもよい。また、dが2以上の場合、分子会合体中に複数あるアニオンは、1種単独であっても、2種以上が組み合わされていてもよい。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体との組み合わせにより耐熱性を向上しやすい点から、一般式(1)におけるbとdは互いに異なる整数であることが好ましい。一般式(1)におけるbとdが互いに異なる整数である場合は、カチオンである染料分子がヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体と相互作用しやすく、色材と当該共重合体とが会合した複合体が形成されやすいため、熱運動を阻害する効果が大きくなり、耐熱性が向上すると推定される。
In the general formula (1), b represents the number of cations, d represents the number of anions in the molecular assembly, and b and d represent integers of 1 or more. When b is 2 or more, a plurality of cations in the molecular assembly may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, when d is 2 or more, a plurality of anions in the molecular assembly may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
It is preferable that b and d in the general formula (1) are integers different from each other from the viewpoint that the heat resistance can be easily improved by the combination with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. When b and d in the general formula (1) are integers different from each other, the dye molecule which is a cation easily interacts with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and the coloring material and the copolymer are separated from each other. Since the associated complex is likely to be formed, it is presumed that the effect of inhibiting thermal motion is increased and the heat resistance is improved.
  一般式(1)におけるeは、0又は1の整数であり、eが0のとき結合は存在しない。e=0はトリアリールメタン骨格を表し、e=1はキサンテン骨格を表す。複数あるeは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。本発明に用いられる一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材においては、少なくともトリアリールメタン骨格を含むものが好適に用いられる。
  なお、一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材としては、例えば、国際公開第2012/144520号パンフレット、国際公開第2018/003706号パンフレットを参考にして調製することができる。
 一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材は、1種単独で用いても良いし、2種以上を組み合わせて用いても良い。
E in the general formula (1) is 0 or an integer of 1, and when e is 0, there is no combination. e = 0 represents a triarylmethane skeleton and e = 1 represents a xanthene skeleton. A plurality of e may be the same or different. In the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) used in the present invention, a material containing at least a triarylmethane skeleton is preferably used.
The rake color material represented by the general formula (1) can be prepared with reference to, for example, International Publication No. 2012/144520 Pamphlet and International Publication No. 2018/003706 Pamphlet.
The rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
(一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材)
 次に、本発明において好ましく用いられる一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材について詳細に説明する。
(Rake color material represented by the general formula (2))
Next, the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (2) preferably used in the present invention will be described in detail.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(一般式(2)中、R~RVIは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、RとRII、RIIIとRIV、RとRVIが結合して環構造を形成してもよい。RVII及びRVIIIは各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基を表す。Arは置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族複素環基を表し、複数あるR~RVIII及びArはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。Em-はm価のポリ酸アニオンを表す。
 mは2以上の整数を表す。jは0又は1であり、jが0のとき結合は存在しない。k及びlは0以上4以下の整数を表し、k+j及びl+jは0以上4以下である。複数あるj、k及びlはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
(In the general formula (2), RI to RVI each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and RI and R represent each. II , R III and R IV , R V and R VI may be bonded to form a ring structure. R VII and R VIII may independently have an alkyl group and a substituent which may have a substituent. It represents an alkoxy group, a halogen atom or a cyano group which may have, Ar 2 represents a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and a plurality of RI to R VIII and Ar 2 are represented. They may be the same or different. Em- represents an m-valent polyacid anion.
m represents an integer of 2 or more. j is 0 or 1, and when j is 0, there is no bond. k and l represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and k + j and l + j are 0 or more and 4 or less. The plurality of j, k, and l may be the same or different. )
 一般式(2)中、R~RVIは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、RとRII、RIIIとRIV、RとRVIが結合して環構造を形成してもよいものである。R~RVIは各々、前述の一般式(1)のR~Rと同様であって良い。
 一般式(2)中、RVII及びRVIIIは各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基を表すが、これらも前述の一般式(1)のRvi及びRviiと同様であって良い。
 一般式(2)中、Arは置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族複素環基を表すが、当該Arは、前述の一般式(1)のArのうち、芳香族複素環基と同様であって良い。
 また、一般式(2)中、Em-はm価のポリ酸アニオンを表すが、当該m価のポリ酸アニオンは、前述の一般式(1)のc価のポリ酸アニオンと同様であって良い。
In the general formula (2), RI to RVI each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and RI and R II . , R III and R IV , R V and R VI may be combined to form a ring structure. R I to R VI may be the same as R i to R v of the above-mentioned general formula (1), respectively.
In the general formula (2), R VII and R VIII each independently represent an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano group, and these also represent. It may be the same as R vi and R vii of the above-mentioned general formula (1).
In the general formula (2), Ar 2 represents a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and the Ar 2 is an aromatic among Ar 1 of the above-mentioned general formula (1). It may be the same as the group heterocyclic group.
Further, in the general formula (2), Em- represents an m-valent polyacid anion, and the m-valent polyacid anion is the same as the c-valent polyacid anion of the above-mentioned general formula (1). Good.
 一般式(2)中、mは、カチオンの数及びアニオンの数を示し、2以上の整数を表す。一般式(2)中に複数あるカチオンは、1種単独であっても、2種以上が組み合わされていてもよい。また、アニオンについても、1種単独であっても、2種以上が組み合わされていてもよい。
 一般式(2)中、jは0又は1であり、jが0のとき結合は存在しない。一般式(2)中のjは、前述の一般式(1)のeと同様であって良い。また、一般式(2)中のk及びlは、前述の一般式(1)のf及びgと同様であって良い。
 なお、一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材としては、例えば、特開2017-16099号公報を参考にして調製することができる。
 一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材は、1種単独で用いても良いし、2種以上を組み合わせて用いても良い。
In the general formula (2), m indicates the number of cations and the number of anions, and represents an integer of 2 or more. The plurality of cations in the general formula (2) may be one type alone or a combination of two or more types. Further, as for the anion, one type may be used alone or two or more types may be combined.
In the general formula (2), j is 0 or 1, and when j is 0, no bond exists. J in the general formula (2) may be the same as e in the above-mentioned general formula (1). Further, k and l in the general formula (2) may be the same as f and g in the above-mentioned general formula (1).
The rake color material represented by the general formula (2) can be prepared, for example, with reference to JP-A-2017-16099.
The rake coloring material represented by the general formula (2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明に用いられる色材は、色相を調整するために複数種の色材を含んでいてよい。
 本発明に用いられる色材が前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材を含み、色相を調整するために更に別の色材を含む場合、当該別の色材としては、高輝度な着色層が得られる点から、キサンテン系染料、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材とは異なるキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材、及びC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
The coloring material used in the present invention may contain a plurality of types of coloring materials in order to adjust the hue.
When the color material used in the present invention contains the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) and further contains another color material for adjusting the hue, the other color material is said. As a result, a xanthene dye, a rake color material of a xanthene dye different from the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), and C .. I. At least one selected from the group consisting of Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferred.
(キサンテン系染料)
 前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材と組み合わせて用いられるキサンテン系染料としては、分子内にキサンテン骨格を有する染料であればよく、公知のキサンテン系染料を用いることができ、特に限定はされない。中でも、高輝度な着色層が得られる点から、下記一般式(3)又は一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料が好ましい。
(Xanthene dye)
The xanthene-based dye used in combination with the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) may be any dye having a xanthene skeleton in the molecule, and a known xanthene-based dye is used. It can be, and there is no particular limitation. Among them, the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (3) or general formula (4) is preferable from the viewpoint of obtaining a high-luminance colored layer.
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物においては、下記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料を用いることにより、着色層の輝度及び耐光性を向上させることができる。 In the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention, the brightness and light resistance of the colored layer can be improved by using the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
(一般式(3)中、R及びRは各々独立にアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R及びRは各々独立にアリール基又はヘテロアリール基である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
(In the general formula (3), R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl groups or aryl groups, respectively, and R 3 and R 4 are independently aryl groups or hetero aryl groups, respectively.)
 上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、キサンテンを基本骨格として有することの他、SOを含む官能基を1つのみ有し、窒素原子と結合するR~Rのいずれも水素原子ではなく、R及びRがアリール基又はヘテロアリール基であるので、窒素原子に飽和炭化水素基のみが結合していることがなく、アルカリ金属イオンを有しないことを特徴とする。このような特徴を有する上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料を用いることにより、着色層の輝度及び耐光性が向上する作用は、未解明の部分はあるが、以下のように考えられる。上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、カチオン性のキサンテン骨格と、アニオン性の-SO 基1個とを有するため、電気的に安定化する。そのため、溶剤中に分散させても、解離することなく安定性に優れているものと推定される。また、窒素原子が、アリール基又はヘテロアリール基のような芳香族性の置換基を有するため、当該窒素原子が有する孤立電子対が、キサンテン骨格のみならず当該アリール基又はヘテロアリール基とも共鳴することにより、分子がより安定化するものと推定される。更に、窒素原子は直接水素原子と結合していないため、窒素原子から水素原子が脱離して当該色材が不安定化することはない。これらのことから、前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、光照射下でも安定で、耐光性に優れており、当該色材を用いることにより耐光性に優れた着色層が形成可能となる。また、色材の退色が抑制される結果、着色層の輝度を向上することができる。
 また、上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、R及びRを互いに異なるものとすることができるため、分子設計の幅が広く、これにより分光特性等の調整幅も広いため、当該色材を目標色度に近づけ、さらに輝度を向上することが容易である。
 また、上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、カチオン性のキサンテン骨格と、アニオン性の-SO 基を1個のみ有し、分子内塩のみを有するため、アルカリ金属イオンを含有しない。これにより、上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料を用いて着色層を形成する場合、液晶パネルとしたときに着色層から液晶層へのアルカリ金属イオンの溶出を抑制することができるため、電気信頼性に優れる着色層を得ることができる。
 さらに、上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、SOを含む官能基が1つのみであることから、PGMEA等の低極性溶媒との親和性が高くなる。また、上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料を溶剤に溶解させる場合に、比較的極性の低い溶媒を用いることができるので、感光性着色樹脂組成物の安定性を向上することができる。
The xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) has xanthene as a basic skeleton, has only one functional group containing SO 2 , and is any of R 1 to R 4 bonded to a nitrogen atom. Also, since R 3 and R 4 are not hydrogen atoms but are aryl groups or heteroaryl groups, only saturated hydrocarbon groups are not bonded to the nitrogen atoms, and they do not have alkali metal ions. .. The effect of improving the luminance and light resistance of the colored layer by using the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) having such characteristics is considered as follows, although there are some unexplained parts. Be done. Since the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) has a cationic xanthene skeleton and one anionic —SO- 3 - group, it is electrically stabilized. Therefore, it is presumed that even if it is dispersed in a solvent, it does not dissociate and is excellent in stability. Further, since the nitrogen atom has an aromatic substituent such as an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, the isolated electron pair of the nitrogen atom resonates not only with the xanthene skeleton but also with the aryl group or the heteroaryl group. Therefore, it is presumed that the molecule becomes more stable. Further, since the nitrogen atom is not directly bonded to the hydrogen atom, the hydrogen atom is not desorbed from the nitrogen atom and the coloring material is not destabilized. From these facts, the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is stable even under light irradiation and has excellent light resistance, and by using the coloring material, a colored layer having excellent light resistance is formed. It will be possible. Further, as a result of suppressing the fading of the coloring material, the brightness of the colored layer can be improved.
Further, since the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) can have R 3 and R 4 different from each other, the range of molecular design is wide, and the range of adjustment of spectral characteristics and the like is also wide. Therefore, it is easy to bring the color material closer to the target chromaticity and further improve the brightness.
Further, since the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) has only one cationic xanthene skeleton and one anionic —SO 3 group and has only an intramolecular salt, it is an alkali metal ion. Does not contain. As a result, when the colored layer is formed by using the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3), it is possible to suppress the elution of alkali metal ions from the colored layer to the liquid crystal layer when the liquid crystal panel is formed. Therefore, a colored layer having excellent electrical reliability can be obtained.
Further, since the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) has only one functional group containing SO 2 , the affinity with a low polar solvent such as PGMEA is high. Further, when the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (3) is dissolved in a solvent, a solvent having a relatively low polarity can be used, so that the stability of the photosensitive colored resin composition can be improved. can.
 前記一般式(3)において、R及びRにおけるアルキル基とは、特に限定されないが、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基等が挙げられ、中でも、炭素数が1~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~5の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、カルバモイル基、-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-O-CO-Ra’で示される一価の基、-SO-Ra”で示される一価の基、-R-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-Rb’-O-CO-Rc’で示される一価の基、及び-Rb”-SO-Rc”で示される一価の基等が挙げられる。
 R~Rにおけるアリール基とは、特に限定されないが、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6~20のアリール基が挙げられ、中でも、フェニル基、ナフチル基等を有する基が好ましい。
 R及びRにおけるヘテロアリール基とは、特に限定されないが、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数5~20のヘテロアリール基が挙げられ、ヘテロ原子として、例えば、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子を含むものが好ましい。また、ヘテロアリール基として具体的には例えば、フラン、チオフェン、ピロール、ピリジン等が挙げられる。
 アリール基又はヘテロアリール基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、水酸基、カルバモイル基、-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-O-CO-Ra’で示される一価の基、-SO-Ra”で示される一価の基、-R-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-Rb’-O-CO-Rc’で示される一価の基、-Rb”-SO-Rc”で示される一価の基等が挙げられる。
 前記R、Ra’、Ra”、R、Rc’及びRc”はアルキル基を示し、前記R、Rb’及びRb”はアルキレン基を示す。これらの置換基は、耐熱性等に悪影響を及ぼさない点から好適に用いられる。これらの置換基による電子吸引性及び電子供与性を調整することにより、分光特性の調整をすることが可能である。
 なお、R~Rにおけるアルキル基は、無置換であるか又は置換基がアリール基であることが好ましく、アリール基又はヘテロアリール基の置換基は、アルキル基であることが好ましい。このような場合、前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は極性が低下するため、PGMEA等の低極性溶媒に対する親和性が向上するからである。また、前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料を溶剤に溶解させる場合においてもより低極性溶媒を用いることができ、低極性溶媒を用いることで感光性着色樹脂組成物の安定性が向上する。
 また、R~Rは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていても良く、前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料のR~Rは、キサンテン環に対して対称であっても非対称であっても良い。中でも、R及びRが互いに異なるものとする場合には、前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料の分子設計の幅が広がり、分光特性の調整幅も広くなるため、当該色材を目標色度に近づけ、さらに輝度を向上することが容易になる点から好ましい。
 また、前記一般式(3)において、キサンテン骨格に結合したベンゼン環が有する-SO 基の置換位置は、特に限定されないが、キサンテン骨格に対して、オルト位又はパラ位であることが好ましく、-SO 基がキサンテン骨格に対してオルト位に置換されていることが、耐熱性と耐光性の点から好ましい。その作用機構は明らかではないが、-SO 基がオルト位にあると、ベンゼン環が結合しているキサンテン骨格の炭素原子と共鳴して環構造を形成でき、そのために耐熱性と耐光性が向上すると推定される。
In the general formula (3), the alkyl group in R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, but for example, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent may be used. Among them, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, but for example, a halogen atom, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, a monovalent group represented by —CO—O—R a , —O—CO—R. A monovalent group represented by a' , a monovalent group represented by -SO 2 -R a " , a monovalent group represented by -R b -CO-OR c , -R b' - O- Examples thereof include a monovalent group represented by CO-R c'and a monovalent group represented by -R b" -SO 2 -R c " .
The aryl group in R 1 to R 4 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and among them, a group having a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and the like. Is preferable.
The heteroaryl group in R 3 and R 4 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a heteroaryl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and examples of the hetero atom include a nitrogen atom and an oxygen atom. , Those containing a sulfur atom are preferable. Specific examples of the heteroaryl group include furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyridine and the like.
The substituent which the aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have is not particularly limited, but is, for example, an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carbamoyl group, or a monovalent group represented by —CO—O—Ra. Group, a monovalent group represented by -O-CO-R a' , a monovalent group represented by -SO2 -R a" , a monovalent group represented by -R b -CO-OR c . Examples thereof include a monovalent group represented by -R b'-O-CO-R c' , a monovalent group represented by -R b" -SO 2 -R c " , and the like.
The R a , R a' , R a " , R c , R c'and R c" indicate an alkyl group, and the R b , R b'and R b " indicate an alkylene group. It is preferably used because it does not adversely affect heat resistance and the like. It is possible to adjust the spectral characteristics by adjusting the electron attraction and electron donating properties of these substituents.
The alkyl group in R 1 to R 4 is preferably unsubstituted or the substituent is preferably an aryl group, and the substituent of the aryl group or the heteroaryl group is preferably an alkyl group. In such a case, the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) has a lower polarity, so that the affinity for a low polar solvent such as PGMEA is improved. Further, a lower polar solvent can be used even when the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is dissolved in a solvent, and the stability of the photosensitive colored resin composition can be improved by using the low polar solvent. improves.
Further, R 1 to R 4 may be the same or different from each other, and R 1 to R 4 of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) are symmetrical with respect to the xanthene ring. It may be asymmetrical. Above all, when R 3 and R 4 are different from each other, the range of molecular design of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is widened, and the range of adjustment of the spectral characteristics is also widened. It is preferable because it is easy to bring the material closer to the target chromaticity and further improve the brightness.
Further, in the above general formula (3) , the substitution position of the -SO 3- group of the benzene ring bonded to the xanthene skeleton is not particularly limited, but is preferably the ortho-position or the para-position with respect to the xanthene skeleton. , -SO 3- Group is preferably substituted at the ortho position with respect to the xanthene skeleton from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance. Although its mechanism of action is not clear , when the -SO 3- group is in the ortho position, it can resonate with the carbon atom of the xanthene skeleton to which the benzene ring is bonded to form a ring structure, and therefore heat resistance and light resistance. Is estimated to improve.
 また、前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、-SO 基を-SOH基に変換して用いることができる。-SO 基を-SOH基に変換する方法は特に限定されない。例えば、弱酸遊離反応を利用する酸処理法、陽イオン交換樹脂を利用する方法等が挙げられる。
 酸処理法としては、例えば、前記色材をメタノール等の良溶媒で且つ酸が溶解する溶媒に溶解し、酸を加えることにより、-SO 基を-SOH基に変換する方法が挙げられる。当該酸処理法に用いる酸は、-SO 基を-SOH基に変換した酸よりも酸性度の高い酸であれば特に限定されない。汎用性の高い酸としては、例えば、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、p-トルエンスルホン酸(PTS)、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸等が挙げられる。
 一方、陽イオン交換樹脂を利用する方法に用いられるイオン交換樹脂としては、ダイヤイオンPK-216H(三菱化学社製 商品名)等のスルホン酸末端の陽イオン交換樹脂等が挙げられる。
 なお、色材の-SO 基を-SOH基に変換するスルホン酸化処理は、色材を良溶媒に溶かした後に行い、固体としてスルホ基(-SOH)を有する色材を取り出すことなく、続いてPGMEAや分散剤を加える等、感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製をする際に行ってもよい。あるいは、色材のスルホン酸化を行った後、再沈殿法や再結晶法により固体としてスルホ基を有する色材を取り出してから、感光性着色樹脂組成物を調製してもよい。中でも、色材の回収率の観点から、前者の方法が好ましい。
Further, the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) can be used by converting the —SO 3 group into the −SO 3 H group. The method for converting the -SO 3 -group to the -SO 3 H group is not particularly limited. For example, an acid treatment method using a weak acid liberation reaction, a method using a cation exchange resin, and the like can be mentioned.
As an acid treatment method, for example, a method of dissolving the coloring material in a good solvent such as methanol and a solvent in which the acid dissolves and adding an acid to convert -SO 3 - groups into -SO 3 H groups is used. Can be mentioned. The acid used in the acid treatment method is not particularly limited as long as it is an acid having a higher acidity than the acid obtained by converting the -SO 3- group to the -SO 3 H group. Examples of the highly versatile acid include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid (PTS), trifluoromethanesulfonic acid and the like.
On the other hand, examples of the ion exchange resin used in the method using a cation exchange resin include sulfonic acid-terminated cation exchange resins such as Diaion PK-216H (trade name manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation).
The sulfone oxidation treatment for converting the -SO 3- group of the coloring material into the -SO 3 H group is performed after the coloring material is dissolved in a good solvent, and the coloring material having a sulfo group (-SO 3 H) as a solid is used. It may be carried out when preparing a photosensitive colored resin composition, such as adding PGMEA or a dispersant without taking it out. Alternatively, after performing sulfonic oxidation of the coloring material, the coloring material having a sulfo group as a solid may be taken out by a reprecipitation method or a recrystallization method, and then a photosensitive colored resin composition may be prepared. Above all, the former method is preferable from the viewpoint of the recovery rate of the coloring material.
 前記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料の製造方法は、特に限定されないが、具体的には例えば下記の方法が挙げられる。
 スルホフルオラン化合物と対応するアミン化合物を溶媒中で還流させ、この反応液を60℃でろ過して不溶解分を除いた後、溶媒の一部を除き、6%塩酸に注ぐ。次いで、大量の水を加えて室温で30分間攪拌した後、ウェットケーキをろ取する。このウェットケーキを水やお湯で洗浄後、乾燥させることにより上記一般式(3)の色材が得られる。また、R及びRとR及びRの一部の構造が異なり、キサンテン環に対して非対称である一般式(3)の色材を製造する場合は、対応する半分のアミン化合物を、大希釈のスルホフルオラン化合物メタノール溶液に、少量ずつ滴下し、反応後、残る一方のアミン化合物を滴下したり、各アミン化合物の1:1溶液をスルホフルオラン化合物メタノール溶液にゆっくり滴下したりすることにより、高収率で非対称の一般式(3)の色材を得ることができる。
 なお、上記一般式(3)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、1種単独で用いても良いし、2種以上を組み合わせて用いても良い。
The method for producing the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) is not particularly limited, and specific examples thereof include the following methods.
The sulfofluorane compound and the corresponding amine compound are refluxed in a solvent, and the reaction solution is filtered at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble matter, and then a part of the solvent is removed and poured into 6% hydrochloric acid. Then, after adding a large amount of water and stirring at room temperature for 30 minutes, the wet cake is collected by filtration. By washing this wet cake with water or hot water and then drying it, the coloring material of the above general formula (3) can be obtained. Further, when producing a coloring material of the general formula (3) in which the structures of some of R 1 and R 3 and R 2 and R 4 are different and asymmetric with respect to the xanthene ring, the corresponding half of the amine compound is used. , A small amount is added dropwise to a highly diluted sulfofluorane compound methanol solution, and after the reaction, the remaining amine compound is added dropwise, or a 1: 1 solution of each amine compound is slowly added dropwise to the sulfofluorane compound methanol solution. By doing so, it is possible to obtain a coloring material of the general formula (3) with high yield and asymmetry.
The xanthene dye represented by the general formula (3) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物においては、下記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料を用いることにより、異物の発生を抑制することができ、輝度が向上した着色層を形成することができる。 In the photosensitive coloring resin composition according to the present invention, by using the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (4), the generation of foreign substances can be suppressed and a colored layer having improved brightness is formed. be able to.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(一般式(4)中、R及びRは各々独立に、置換基を有していても良い脂肪族炭化水素基又は芳香族炭化水素基であり、R及びRは各々独立に、置換基を有していても良い芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基であって、R及びRの少なくとも1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基は脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されており、R及びRが互いに異なる。L及びLは各々独立に、直接結合、-SO-、又は-CO-であり、Rはハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(In the general formula (4), R 5 and R 6 are each independently an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and R 7 and R 8 are independent of each other. , An aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, wherein at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon. Substituentally substituted, R 7 and R 8 are different from each other. L 1 and L 2 are independently directly bonded, -SO 2- , or -CO-, and R 9 is a halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Is the basis.)
 上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、キサンテンを基本骨格として有することの他、特定の-L-N-L-Rというアニオン部を含む官能基を1つのみ有し、窒素原子と結合するR~Rのいずれも水素原子ではなく、R及びRが芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基であって、R及びRの少なくとも1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基は脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されており、R及びRが互いに異なるという特徴を有する。このような特徴を有する上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料を用いることにより、異物の発生が抑制され、輝度が向上した着色層を形成することができる作用は、未解明の部分はあるが、以下のように考えられる。上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、1価のカチオン性のキサンテン骨格と、アニオン性の-L-N-L-R基1個とを有し、分子内塩のみを有するため、1分子内で電気的に安定化しやすい。一方で、アニオン性の-L-N-L-R基においては、Rにおいて電気陰性度の高いハロゲンが結合していることにより、アニオン部位の電子がRに吸引されやすく、アニオン性が弱まることで分子間でのイオン結合が弱くなっていると推定される。また、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、窒素原子と結合するR~Rのいずれも水素原子ではなく、R及びRが芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基であって、R及びRの少なくとも1つは脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されており、R及びRが互いに異なりキサンテン骨格に対して非対称構造であることから、結晶性が低く、凝集し難く、且つ溶剤親和性が高くなっていると推定される。これらの相乗効果から、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、溶剤溶解性が向上し、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料を含む着色樹脂組成物を用いて着色層を形成した場合に、異物の発生が抑制されると推定される。
 また、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、キサンテン骨格に結合した窒素原子が直接水素原子と結合していないため、窒素原子から水素原子が脱離して当該色材が不安定化することはなく、窒素原子が、芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基のような芳香族性の置換基を有するため、当該窒素原子が有する孤立電子対が、キサンテン骨格のみならず当該芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基とも共鳴することにより、安定性が高い分子構造を有する。上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、このように安定性の高い分子構造を有することから耐熱性が良好なものである。
 更に、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、R及びRの少なくとも1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基が脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されており、R及びRが互いに異なるため、染料同士が凝集し難く、かつ溶剤溶解性が高いことから異物も発生し難いため、着色層の透過光量を減衰させることもない。
 また、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、R及びRが互いに異なり、分子設計の幅が広いことから、分光特性等の調整幅も広いため、当該色材を目標色度に近づけ、さらに輝度を向上することが容易である。
 上記のように、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料を用いると、耐熱性が良好なためにカラーフィルタ製造工程のベイク後の輝度低下が抑制されること、カラーフィルタ製造工程において染料の凝集や異物の発生が抑制されること、所望の色度に合わせて構造を設計して分光特性等を調整できることにより、着色層の輝度も向上することができると推定される。
The xanthene dye represented by the above general formula ( 4 ) has xanthene as a basic skeleton and also has only one functional group containing a specific anion moiety of −L1 −N --L2 - R9. None of R 5 to R 8 having and bonded to a nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom, and R 7 and R 8 are aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocyclic groups, and at least one of R 7 and R 8 is used. The two aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocyclic groups are substituted with aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and are characterized in that R 7 and R 8 are different from each other. By using the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) having such characteristics, the action of suppressing the generation of foreign substances and forming a colored layer having improved brightness has not been clarified yet. However, it can be considered as follows. The xanthene-based dye represented by the above general formula (4) has a monovalent cationic xanthene skeleton and an anionic −L 1 − N - - L 2 −R 9 groups and one intramolecular. Since it has only a salt, it is easy to be electrically stabilized within one molecule. On the other hand, in the anionic -L 1 - N --L 2 -R 9 groups, the halogen having a high electronegativity is bonded to R 9 , so that the electrons at the anionic site are easily attracted to R 9 . It is presumed that the weakening of the anionic property weakens the ionic bond between the molecules. Further, in the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula ( 4 ), none of R5 to R8 bonded to the nitrogen atom is a hydrogen atom, and R7 and R8 are aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocycles. Of the ring groups, at least one of R 7 and R 8 is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and since R 7 and R 8 are different from each other and have an asymmetric structure with respect to the xanthene skeleton, the crystallinity is high. It is presumed that it is low, difficult to aggregate, and has high solvent affinity. Due to these synergistic effects, the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has improved solvent solubility, and a colored resin composition containing the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is used. When the colored layer is formed, it is presumed that the generation of foreign matter is suppressed.
Further, in the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4), since the nitrogen atom bonded to the xanthene skeleton is not directly bonded to the hydrogen atom, the hydrogen atom is desorbed from the nitrogen atom and the coloring material is unstable. Since the nitrogen atom has an aromatic substituent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, the lone electron pair of the nitrogen atom is not only the xanthene skeleton but also the said one. It has a highly stable molecular structure by resonating with an aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has a highly stable molecular structure as described above, and therefore has good heat resistance.
Further, in the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4), at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 is replaced with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R Since 7 and R 8 are different from each other, the dyes are less likely to aggregate with each other, and foreign matter is less likely to be generated because the dyes are highly soluble in the solvent, so that the amount of transmitted light in the colored layer is not attenuated.
In addition, the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula ( 4 ) has different R7 and R8, and has a wide range of molecular design. Therefore, a wide range of adjustments such as spectral characteristics is possible. It is easy to bring it closer to chromaticity and further improve the brightness.
As described above, when the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is used, the heat resistance is good, so that the decrease in brightness after baking in the color filter manufacturing process is suppressed, and in the color filter manufacturing process. It is presumed that the brightness of the colored layer can be improved by suppressing the aggregation of dyes and the generation of foreign substances, and by designing the structure according to the desired chromaticity and adjusting the spectral characteristics and the like.
 前記一般式(4)において、R及びRにおける脂肪族炭化水素基とは、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれであってもよく、特に限定されないが、例えば、炭素数1以上20以下の直鎖又は分岐状脂肪族炭化水素基、或いは、炭素数5以上8以下の環状脂肪族炭化水素基(脂環式炭化水素基)等が挙げられ、炭素数が10以下であることが、耐熱性の点から好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基としては、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基である、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 当該脂肪族炭化水素基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、ハロゲン原子、芳香族炭化水素基、カルバモイル基、-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-O-CO-Rd’で示される一価の基、-SO-Rd”で示される一価の基、-R-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-Re’-O-CO-Rf’で示される一価の基、及び-Re”-SO-Rf”で示される一価の基等が挙げられる。
 R~Rにおける芳香族炭化水素基とは、特に限定されないが、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数6以上20以下の芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられ、中でも、フェニル基、ナフチル基等を有する基が好ましい。
 R及びRにおける芳香族複素環基とは、特に限定されないが、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数5以上20以下の芳香族複素環基が挙げられ、ヘテロ原子として、例えば、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子を含むものが好ましい。また、芳香族複素環基として具体的には例えば、フラン、チオフェン、ピロール、ピリジン等が挙げられる。
 芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、脂肪族炭化水素基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、水酸基、カルバモイル基、-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-O-CO-Rd’で示される一価の基、-SO-Rd”で示される一価の基、-R-CO-O-Rで示される一価の基、-Re’-O-CO-Rf’で示される一価の基、-Re”-SO-Rf”で示される一価の基等が挙げられる。前記R、Re’、Re”、R、Rd’、Rd”、R、Rf’及びRf”は、脂肪族炭化水素基を示す。これらの置換基は、耐熱性等に悪影響を及ぼさない点から好適に用いられる。これらの置換基による電子吸引性及び電子供与性を調整することにより、分光特性の調整をすることが可能である。また、ここでの脂肪族炭化水素基は、R及びRにおける脂肪族炭化水素基と同様であって良い。
In the general formula ( 4 ), the aliphatic hydrocarbon group in R5 and R6 may be linear, branched or cyclic, and is not particularly limited, but for example, it has 1 or more carbon atoms and 20 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include the following linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, or cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups having 5 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms (aliphatic hydrocarbon groups), and the number of carbon atoms is 10 or less. , Preferred from the viewpoint of heat resistance. As the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group which is a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferable.
The substituent that the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may have is not particularly limited, but is, for example, a halogen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a carbamoyl group, or a monovalent group represented by —CO—O—R d . , -O-CO-R d' , a monovalent group, -SO 2 -R d " , a -R e -CO-O-R f , a monovalent group, Examples thereof include a monovalent group represented by -R e'-O-CO-R f' , and a monovalent group represented by -R e " -SO 2 -R f" .
The aromatic hydrocarbon group in R5 to R8 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more and 20 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and among them, a phenyl group. , A group having a naphthyl group or the like is preferable.
The aromatic heterocyclic group in R7 and R8 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aromatic heterocyclic group having 5 or more and 20 or less carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and examples of the heteroatom include, for example. Those containing a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable. Specific examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group include furan, thiophene, pyrrole, and pyridine.
The substituent which the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group may have is not particularly limited, but for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carbamoyl group, -CO-O. -R d is a monovalent group, -O-CO-R d' is a monovalent group, -SO 2 -R d " is a monovalent group, -R e -CO-O- The monovalent group represented by R f , the monovalent group represented by -R e'-O-CO-R f' , the monovalent group represented by -R e " -SO 2 -R f" , etc. The above-mentioned R e , Re e' , Re e " , R d , R d' , R d" , R f , R f'and R f " indicate an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. These substituents are preferably used because they do not adversely affect heat resistance and the like. It is possible to adjust the spectral characteristics by adjusting the electron-withdrawing property and the electron-donating property of these substituents. Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group here may be the same as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group in R5 and R6 .
 異物の発生が抑制され、輝度が向上した着色層を形成しやすい点から、R及びRの少なくとも1つは、脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、R及びRが脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、中でも直鎖脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。当該脂肪族炭化水素基としては、炭素数1以上10以下であることが好ましく、更に炭素数1以上6以下の直鎖アルキル基であることが好ましい。
 異物の発生が抑制され、輝度が向上した着色層を形成しやすい点から、R及びRの少なくとも1つは、芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、R及びRが芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。当該芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素数6以上10以下の芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、更にフェニル基であることが好ましい。
 また、置換基を有していても良い芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基であるR及びRの少なくとも1つは脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されており、R及びRが互いに異なるものである。
 当該芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基の水素原子と置換されている脂肪族炭化水素基としては、中でも直鎖脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。当該脂肪族炭化水素基としては、炭素数1以上10以下であることが好ましく、更に炭素数1以上6以下の直鎖アルキル基であることが好ましい。また、R及びRの両方共が、前記のような脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されていることが好ましい。
 また、R及びRの少なくとも1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基は、1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基当たり、2つ以上の脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されていることが、異物の発生が抑制され、輝度が向上した着色層を形成しやすい点から好ましい。
 また、R、R、R及びRに含まれる脂肪族炭化水素基のいずれか1つが、炭素数2以上、更に炭素数3以上の直鎖アルキル基である場合には、分子中の電子密度を調整し易い傾向がある。
 R及びRの少なくとも1つが直鎖肪族炭化水素基で置換されている場合であって、R及びRの少なくとも1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基が、炭素数2以上の直鎖アルキル基で置換されている場合には、異物の発生が抑制され易く、輝度が向上した着色層が形成され易い傾向がある。
At least one of R5 and R6 is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R5 and R6 are aliphatics, from the viewpoint that the generation of foreign substances is suppressed and a colored layer having improved brightness is easily formed. It is preferably a hydrocarbon group, and more preferably a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 or more and 10 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms.
At least one of R 7 and R 8 is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and R 7 and R 8 are aromatic, from the viewpoint that the generation of foreign substances is suppressed and a colored layer having improved brightness is easily formed. It is preferably a hydrocarbon group. The aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 or more carbon atoms and 10 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
Further, at least one of R 7 and R 8 which are aromatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic heterocyclic groups which may have a substituent is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R 7 and R 8 are substituted. Are different from each other.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group substituted with the hydrogen atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 1 or more and 10 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 or more and 6 or less carbon atoms. Further, it is preferable that both R 7 and R 8 are substituted with the above-mentioned aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
Further, at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 is replaced with two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon groups per aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group. This is preferable because the generation of foreign substances is suppressed and it is easy to form a colored layer having improved brightness.
When any one of the aliphatic hydrocarbon groups contained in R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 is a linear alkyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms and 3 or more carbon atoms, it is contained in the molecule. It tends to be easy to adjust the electron density of.
When at least one of R 5 and R 6 is substituted with a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group, at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 has a carbon number of carbon atoms. When substituted with two or more linear alkyl groups, the generation of foreign substances tends to be suppressed, and a colored layer with improved brightness tends to be easily formed.
 また、R~Rにおいて、脂肪族炭化水素基は、無置換であるか、分岐状又は直鎖状のアルキル基の場合は置換基が芳香族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基の置換基は、脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。このような場合、前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は極性が低下するため、PGMEA等の低極性溶媒に対する親和性が向上するからである。また、前記色材を溶剤に溶解させる場合においてもより低極性溶媒を用いることができ、低極性溶媒を用いることで本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の安定性が向上する。中でも、低極性溶媒に対する親和性が向上する点からは、芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基の置換基としては、脂肪族炭化水素基のみを有することが好ましい。 Further, in R5 to R8, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably unsubstituted, or in the case of a branched or linear alkyl group, the substituent is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and is aromatic. The substituent of the hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. In such a case, the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has a lower polarity, so that the affinity for a low polar solvent such as PGMEA is improved. Further, a lower polar solvent can be used even when the coloring material is dissolved in a solvent, and the use of the low polar solvent improves the stability of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention. Above all, from the viewpoint of improving the affinity for a low-polarity solvent, it is preferable to have only an aliphatic hydrocarbon group as a substituent of the aromatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic heterocyclic group.
 -L-N-L-R基における、L及びLは各々独立に、直接結合、-SO-、又は-CO-であるが、中でも、-SO-、又は-CO-であることが好ましく、更に、-SO-であることが、異物の発生が抑制され、耐熱性に優れ、輝度が向上した着色層を形成しやすい点から好ましい。 -L 1 -N --- L 2 -R In 9 units, L 1 and L 2 are independently directly bonded, -SO 2- , or -CO-, and among them, -SO 2- or-. It is preferably CO-, and more preferably -SO 2- because it suppresses the generation of foreign substances, has excellent heat resistance, and easily forms a colored layer having improved brightness.
 -L-N-L-R基における、Rはハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基であるが、当該ハロゲンとしては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、ヨウ素原子等が挙げられ、中でもフッ素原子であることが好ましい。Rのハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基としては、炭素数が1以上8以下の直鎖又は分岐のハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1以上5以下の直鎖又は分岐のハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、炭素数が1以上3以下の直鎖又は分岐のハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基であることがより更に好ましい。中でも脂肪族炭化水素基におけるハロゲン原子の置換率(ハロゲン原子数/脂肪族炭化水素基の水素原子の合計数)は、50%以上であることが好ましく、更に70%以上であることが好ましく、中でも100%であることが好ましい。
 Rとしては、中でも炭素数が1以上5以下の直鎖又は分岐のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましい。
-L 1 -N --- L 2 -R 9 in 9 groups is a halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and examples of the halogen include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, an iodine atom and the like, and among them, a fluorine atom. Is preferable. The halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group of R9 is preferably a linear or branched halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms, and a linear or branched halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms. It is more preferably a branched halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and even more preferably a linear or branched halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 or more and 3 or less carbon atoms. Above all, the substitution rate of halogen atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group (the number of halogen atoms / the total number of hydrogen atoms of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group) is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more. Above all, it is preferably 100%.
The R 9 is preferably a linear or branched perfluoroalkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms.
 また、前記一般式(4)において、キサンテン骨格に結合したベンゼン環が有する-L-N-L-R基の置換位置は、特に限定されないが、キサンテン骨格に対して、オルト位又はパラ位であることが好ましく、-L-N-L-R基がキサンテン骨格に対してオルト位に置換されていることが、前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料の各種耐性の点から好ましい。その作用機構は明らかではないが、-L-N-L-R基がオルト位にあると、ベンゼン環が結合しているキサンテン骨格の炭素原子と共鳴して環構造を形成でき、分子の安定性が高くなり、そのために色材の各種耐性が向上すると推定される。 Further, in the above general formula ( 4 ), the substitution position of the -L 1 -N --- L 2 -R9 group of the benzene ring bonded to the xanthene skeleton is not particularly limited, but the ortho position with respect to the xanthene skeleton. Alternatively, it is preferably in the para position, and the fact that the -L 1 - N --L 2 -R 9 groups are substituted in the ortho position with respect to the xanthene skeleton is the xanthene system represented by the general formula (4). It is preferable from the viewpoint of various resistances of dyes. The mechanism of action is not clear, but when the -L 1 - N --L 2 -R 9 groups are in the ortho position, a ring structure can be formed by resonating with the carbon atom of the xanthene skeleton to which the benzene ring is bonded. It is presumed that the stability of the molecule is increased, and therefore the resistance of various coloring materials is improved.
 前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料の製造方法は、特に限定されないが、具体的には例えば下記の方法が挙げられる。
 スルホフルオラン化合物とR及びRに対応するアミン化合物を溶媒中60℃で還流させ、この反応液を60℃でろ過して不溶解分を除いた後、溶媒の一部を除き、6%塩酸に注ぐ。次いで、大量の水を加えて室温で30分間攪拌した後、ウェットケーキをろ取する。このウェットケーキを水やお湯で洗浄後、乾燥させることにより上記一般式(4)で表される色素の中間体が得られる。なお、本発明においては、R及びRの一部の構造が異なり、キサンテン環に対して非対称である一般式(4)の色素を製造するため、対応する半分のアミン化合物を、大希釈のスルホフルオラン化合物メタノール溶液に、少量ずつ滴下し、反応後、残る一方のアミン化合物を滴下したり、各アミン化合物の1:1溶液をスルホフルオラン化合物メタノール溶液にゆっくり滴下したりすることにより、高収率で非対称の一般式(4)で表される色素の中間体を得ることができる。
 次いで一般式(4)で表される色素の中間体を、1-メチル-2-ピロリジノン等の極性溶媒中炭酸カリウム等の塩基存在下で、R及びRに対応するハロゲン化物と、80℃で2時間、撹拌して反応させる。反応終了後、反応溶液を室温まで放冷した後、反応溶液を0~10℃の17.5%塩酸に滴下して1時間、撹拌をする。その後、析出物をろ取して、残渣を60℃で24時間、乾燥することにより、一般式(4)で表される色素の前駆体を得る。
 次いで、非対称の一般式(4)の色材の前駆体に、トリフルオロメチルスルホンアミドをクロロホルムに溶解させ、トリエチルアミンを滴下し、反応させる。その後、得られた反応溶液を水洗し、次いで有機層を分取する。この有機層を硫酸ナトリウムにて乾燥させ、カラムクロマトグラフィーにて精製し、減圧濃縮することにより、上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料を得ることができる。
 また、Lが-CO-で表される場合は、スルホフルオラン化合物の代わりにフルオラン化合物を用い、以降同様にして上記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料を得ることができる。
The method for producing the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is not particularly limited, and specific examples thereof include the following methods.
The sulfofluorane compound and the amine compound corresponding to R7 and R8 were refluxed in a solvent at 60 ° C., and the reaction solution was filtered at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble matter, and then a part of the solvent was removed. Pour into% hydrochloric acid. Then, after adding a large amount of water and stirring at room temperature for 30 minutes, the wet cake is collected by filtration. By washing this wet cake with water or hot water and then drying it, an intermediate of the dye represented by the above general formula (4) can be obtained. In the present invention, in order to produce the dye of the general formula (4), which has a partially different structure of R 7 and R 8 and is asymmetric with respect to the xanthene ring, the corresponding half of the amine compound is largely diluted. By dropping a small amount into the sulfofluorane compound methanol solution of the above, and after the reaction, the remaining amine compound is added dropwise, or a 1: 1 solution of each amine compound is slowly added dropwise to the sulfofluorane compound methanol solution. , A high yield and asymmetric dye intermediate represented by the general formula (4) can be obtained.
Next, the intermediate of the dye represented by the general formula ( 4 ) was prepared with a halide corresponding to R5 and R6 in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate in a polar solvent such as 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, and 80. The reaction is carried out at ° C. for 2 hours with stirring. After completion of the reaction, the reaction solution is allowed to cool to room temperature, and then the reaction solution is added dropwise to 17.5% hydrochloric acid at 0 to 10 ° C. and stirred for 1 hour. Then, the precipitate is collected by filtration and the residue is dried at 60 ° C. for 24 hours to obtain a precursor of the dye represented by the general formula (4).
Next, trifluoromethylsulfonamide is dissolved in chloroform in the precursor of the asymmetric colorant of the general formula (4), and triethylamine is added dropwise to cause a reaction. Then, the obtained reaction solution is washed with water, and then the organic layer is separated. The xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) can be obtained by drying this organic layer with sodium sulfate, purifying it by column chromatography, and concentrating it under reduced pressure.
When L 1 is represented by —CO—, a fluorane compound is used instead of the sulfofluorane compound, and the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (4) can be obtained in the same manner thereafter.
 前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、低極性溶剤に対しても溶剤溶解性が高いので、アルコール性水酸基を有する溶剤を用いなくても、着色層用途に必要な濃度での溶剤溶解性を有する。前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、及びジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテルの少なくとも1つに対して、23℃における前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料の溶解度が2.0(g/100g溶剤)以上であることが好ましく、2.5(g/100g溶剤)以上であることがより好ましい。
 なお、前記一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料は、1種単独で用いても良いし、2種以上を組み合わせて用いても良い。
Since the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) has high solvent solubility even in a low-polarity solvent, the concentration required for the colored layer application can be obtained without using a solvent having an alcoholic hydroxyl group. Has solvent solubility. The xanthene-based dye represented by the general formula (4) is at 23 ° C. with respect to at least one of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, and diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether. The solubility of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) is preferably 2.0 (g / 100 g solvent) or more, and more preferably 2.5 (g / 100 g solvent) or more.
The xanthene dye represented by the general formula (4) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
(キサンテン系染料のレーキ色材)
 前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材と組み合わせて用いられるキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材としては、特に限定はされず、例えば、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材とは異なる公知のキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材を用いることができる。中でも、色材の耐熱性及び分散性に優れ、高輝度な着色層が得られる点から、金属原子を含むレーキ化剤でキサンテン系染料をレーキ化したキサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材を好ましく用いることができる。なお、金属レーキ色材は、レーキ化剤として金属が付加されたレーキ色材である。
(Rake color material of xanthene dye)
The rake coloring material of the xanthene dye used in combination with the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the general formula (1) or the general formula. A known xanthene-based dye rake color material different from the rake color material represented by the formula (2) can be used. Among them, a metal lake colorant of a xanthene dye obtained by laking a xanthene dye with a rake agent containing a metal atom is preferably used because the colorant has excellent heat resistance and dispersibility and a high-brightness colored layer can be obtained. be able to. The metal lake color material is a lake color material to which a metal is added as a lake agent.
 前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材とは異なるキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材としては、中でも、キサンテン骨格の9位にフェニル基を有するキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材が好ましい。具体的には、下記一般式(5)で表されるキサンテン系染料を、レーキ化剤によりレーキ化したレーキ色材が好ましく用いられ、特に、下記一般式(5)で表されるキサンテン系染料を、金属原子を含むレーキ化剤によりレーキ化した金属レーキ色材が好ましく用いられる。 As a lake color material of a xanthene dye different from the lake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), among them, the lake color of a xanthene dye having a phenyl group at the 9-position of the xanthene skeleton. The material is preferred. Specifically, a rake coloring material obtained by laking a xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (5) with a rake agent is preferably used, and in particular, a xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (5). A metal rake coloring material raked by a rake agent containing a metal atom is preferably used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
(一般式(5)中、R1’、R2’、R3’及びR4’は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表し、R1’とR3’、R2’とR4’がそれぞれ結合して環構造を形成してもよく、R1’とキサンテン環の5位の炭素原子、R3’とキサンテン環の7位の炭素原子、R2’とキサンテン環の4位の炭素原子、又は、R4’とキサンテン環の2位の炭素原子がそれぞれ結合して環構造を形成してもよい。上記アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基が有する水素原子が、酸性基又はその塩、若しくはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい。R5’は、酸性基又はその塩を表し、xは0~5の整数である。但し、一般式(5)は、酸性基又はその塩を少なくとも2つ有し、そのうち1つは分子内塩を形成する。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
(In the general formula (5), R 1' , R 2' , R 3'and R 4'independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, respectively, and R 1'and R 3' , R 2'and R 4'may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure, and R 1'and the 5-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, R 3'and the 7-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, respectively. R 2'and the 4-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, or R 4'and the 2-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure. The above aryl group or heteroaryl group may form a ring structure. The hydrogen atom to have may be substituted with an acidic group or a salt thereof, or a halogen atom. R 5'represents an acidic group or a salt thereof, and x is an integer of 0 to 5. However, the general formula ( 5) has at least two acidic groups or salts thereof, one of which forms an intramolecular salt.)
 R1’~R4’におけるアルキル基は、中でも、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖又は分岐状アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数が1~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、更に炭素数が1~5の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、アリール基、ハロゲン原子等が挙げられ、当該アリール基は、更に置換基としてハロゲン原子や、酸性基又はその塩を有していてもよい。
 R1’~R4’におけるアリール基は、中でも、炭素数6~20の置換基を有していてもよいアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基、ナフチル基等を有する基がより好ましい。
 また、R1’~R4’におけるヘテロアリール基は、中でも、炭素数5~20の置換基を有していてもよいヘテロアリール基が好ましく、ヘテロ原子として、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子を含むものが好ましい。
 アリール基又はヘテロアリール基が有してもよい置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、酸性基又はその塩、水酸基、アルコキシ基、ニトリル基、カルバモイル基、カルボン酸エステル基等が挙げられる。
As the alkyl group in R 1'to R 4' , a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferable, and a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable. It is more preferable that the alkyl group is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an aryl group and a halogen atom. The aryl group further has a halogen atom, an acidic group or a salt thereof as a substituent. You may be doing it.
As the aryl group in R 1'to R 4' , an aryl group which may have a substituent having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a group having a phenyl group, a naphthyl group and the like is more preferable.
Further, as the heteroaryl group in R 1'to R 4' , a heteroaryl group which may have a substituent having 5 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and the hetero atom includes a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom. Is preferable.
Examples of the substituent that the aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have include an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an acidic group or a salt thereof, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a nitrile group, a carbamoyl group, and a carboxylic acid. Examples include an ester group.
 R1’とR3’、R2’とR4’がそれぞれ結合して環構造を形成しているとは、R1’とR3’、R2’とR4’がそれぞれ窒素原子を介して環構造を形成していることをいう。環構造は特に限定されないが、例えば5~7員環の含窒素複素環が挙げられ、具体的には、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、モルホリン環等が挙げられる。
 また、R1’とキサンテン環の5位の炭素原子、R3’とキサンテン環の7位の炭素原子、R2’とキサンテン環の4位の炭素原子、又は、R4’とキサンテン環の2位の炭素原子が結合して環構造を形成しているとは、R1’~R4’と、キサンテン環の所定位の炭素原子との上記組み合わせがそれぞれ、窒素原子及びキサンテン骨格の一部を介して環構造を形成していることをいう。環構造は特に限定されないが、例えば5~7員環の含窒素複素環が挙げられる。
R 1'and R 3' , R 2'and R 4'are bonded to form a ring structure, respectively, that R 1'and R 3'and R 2'and R 4'have nitrogen atoms, respectively. It means that a ring structure is formed through the ring. The ring structure is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a nitrogen-containing heterocycle having a 5- to 7-membered ring, and specific examples thereof include a pyrrolidine ring, a piperidine ring, and a morpholine ring.
Further, R 1'and the carbon atom at the 5-position of the xanthene ring, R 3'and the carbon atom at the 7-position of the xanthene ring, R 2'and the carbon atom at the 4-position of the xanthene ring, or R 4'and the xanthene ring. The fact that the carbon atom at the 2-position is bonded to form a ring structure means that the above combination of R 1'to R 4'and the carbon atom at the predetermined position of the xanthene ring is one of a nitrogen atom and a xanthene skeleton, respectively. It means that a ring structure is formed through the portions. The ring structure is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a nitrogen-containing heterocycle having a 5- to 7-membered ring.
 酸性基又はその塩の具体例としては、カルボキシ基(-COOH)、カルボキシラト基(-COO-)、カルボン酸塩基(-COOM、ここでMは金属原子を表す。)、スルホナト基(-SO-)、スルホ基(-SOH)、スルホン酸塩基(-SOM、ここでMは金属原子を表す。)等が挙げられ、中でも、スルホナト基(-SO-)、スルホ基(-SOH)、又はスルホン酸塩基(-SOM)の少なくとも1種を有することが好ましい。なお金属原子Mとしては、ナトリウム原子、カリウム原子等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the acidic group or a salt thereof include a carboxy group (-COOH), a carboxylato group (-COO-), a carboxylic acid base (-COOM, where M represents a metal atom), and a sulfonate group (-SO). 3- ), sulfo group (-SO 3 H), sulfonic acid base (-SO 3 M, where M represents a metal atom), etc., among others, sulfonato group (-SO 3- ), sulfo group. It is preferable to have at least one of (-SO 3 H) or a sulfonic acid base (-SO 3 M). Examples of the metal atom M include a sodium atom and a potassium atom.
 上記一般式(5)で表されるキサンテン系染料の具体例としては、アシッドレッド50、アシッドレッド52、アシッドレッド289、アシッドバイオレット9、アシッドバイオレット30、アシッドブルー19等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the xanthene dye represented by the general formula (5) include acid red 50, acid red 52, acid red 289, acid violet 9, acid violet 30, and acid blue 19.
<レーキ化剤>
 キサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材のレーキ化に用いられるレーキ化剤は、金属原子を含むレーキ化剤であればよい。金属原子を含むレーキ化剤としては、2価以上の金属カチオンとなる金属原子を含むレーキ化剤が好ましく、具体的には、塩化バリウム、塩化カルシウム、炭酸カルシウム、塩化アルミニウム、硫酸アルミニウム、酢酸アルミニウム、酢酸鉛、硫酸マグネシウム、塩化ジルコニウム、硫酸ジルコニウム、炭酸ジルコニウム、ポリ塩化アルミニウム、ポリ硫酸アルミニウム等が挙げられ、中でも、3価以上の金属カチオンとなる金属原子を含むレーキ化剤がより好ましい。更に、アルミニウムを含むレーキ化剤であることが、レーキ色材の合成の容易さやレーキ色材の分散性に優れる点から好ましい。即ち、キサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材としては、キサンテン系染料のアルミニウムレーキ色材が好ましく、上記一般式(5)で表されるキサンテン系染料のアルミニウムレーキ色材が特に好ましい。
 3価のカチオンとなるアルミニウムを含むレーキ化剤を用いることにより、2価の金属カチオンとなる金属原子を含むレーキ化剤と比較して、更に、レーキ化剤として凝集力が強いと推定される。そのため、レーキ化されたキサンテン系染料の溶剤に対する溶解度は大きく低下し、より顔料に近い性質となる。そのため、色材の分散性や耐熱性が優れるとともに、色材製造時のレーキ色材の回収(濾別)が容易であるというメリットもある。
<Rake agent>
The rake agent used for rake formation of the metal rake coloring material of the xanthene dye may be any rake agent containing a metal atom. As the rake agent containing a metal atom, a rake agent containing a metal atom having a divalent or higher valent metal cation is preferable, and specifically, barium chloride, calcium chloride, calcium carbonate, aluminum chloride, aluminum sulfate, and aluminum acetate. , Lead acetate, magnesium sulfate, zirconium chloride, zirconium sulfate, zirconium carbonate, polyaluminum chloride, polyaluminum sulfate and the like, and among them, a rake agent containing a metal atom which becomes a trivalent or higher metal cation is more preferable. Further, a rake agent containing aluminum is preferable because it is easy to synthesize the rake color material and is excellent in the dispersibility of the rake color material. That is, as the metal lake color material of the xanthene dye, the aluminum lake color material of the xanthene dye is preferable, and the aluminum lake color material of the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (5) is particularly preferable.
By using a rake agent containing aluminum as a trivalent cation, it is presumed that the cohesive force is stronger as a rake agent as compared with the rake agent containing a metal atom as a divalent metal cation. .. Therefore, the solubility of the raked xanthene dye in the solvent is greatly reduced, and the properties are closer to those of the pigment. Therefore, the dispersibility and heat resistance of the coloring material are excellent, and there is also an advantage that the rake coloring material can be easily recovered (filtered) at the time of manufacturing the coloring material.
 アルミニウムを含むレーキ化剤としては、中でも、下記一般式(6)で表されるポリ塩化アルミニウムであることが、色材の耐熱性が優れる点、及び色材の昇華が抑制されやすい点から好ましい。 As the rake agent containing aluminum, among them, polyaluminum chloride represented by the following general formula (6) is preferable because the heat resistance of the coloring material is excellent and the sublimation of the coloring material is easily suppressed. ..
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
(一般式(6)中、nは、2~20の整数、mは、(n/2)~(3n-1)の整数である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
(In the general formula (6), n is an integer of 2 to 20, and m is an integer of (n / 2) to (3n-1).)
 上記一般式(6)で表されるポリ塩化アルミニウムにおいて、nはアルミニウム原子の数を表し、2~20個である。アルミニウム原子が2~20個と比較的小さいポリ塩化アルミニウムをレーキ化剤とすることにより、色材の分散粒径が大きくなりすぎず、色材の分散性を良好なものとすることができる。本発明においては、中でもnが2~10の整数であることが好ましい。 In the polyaluminum chloride represented by the above general formula (6), n represents the number of aluminum atoms, which is 2 to 20. By using polyaluminum chloride, which has a relatively small aluminum atom of 2 to 20, as a rake agent, the dispersed particle size of the coloring material does not become too large, and the dispersibility of the coloring material can be improved. In the present invention, n is preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 また、上記一般式(6)で表されるポリ塩化アルミニウムにおいて、mは、ヒドロキシ基(OH基)の数を表し、(n/2)~(3n-1)の整数である。なお、nが奇数の場合には、mの下限は、上記範囲内で最小の整数となる{(n+1)/2}である。 Further, in the polyaluminum chloride represented by the general formula (6), m represents the number of hydroxy groups (OH groups) and is an integer of (n / 2) to (3n-1). When n is an odd number, the lower limit of m is {(n + 1) / 2}, which is the smallest integer in the above range.
 ポリ塩化アルミニウム中のアルミニウムは3価のカチオン性を有し、ヒドロキシ基が1価のアニオン性を有するため、ポリ塩化アルミニウム全体としては、(3n-m)価のカチオン性を有する。本発明においては、凝集力が強く、色材の回収が容易であったり、色材の分散性に優れる点から、中でも塩基性が高い方が好ましく、mが2n~(3n-1)の整数であることが好ましい。
 中でも、上記一般式(6)で表されるポリ塩化アルミニウムにおいて、nは、2~10の整数、mは、2n~(3n-1)の整数であることが、色材の分散性や、塗膜のコントラストが向上する点から好ましい。
Since the aluminum in the polyaluminum chloride has a trivalent cationic property and the hydroxy group has a monovalent anionic property, the polyaluminum chloride as a whole has a (3 nm) valent cationic property. In the present invention, from the viewpoints of strong cohesive force, easy recovery of the coloring material, and excellent dispersibility of the coloring material, it is preferable that the basicity is high, and m is an integer of 2n to (3n-1). Is preferable.
Above all, in the polyaluminum chloride represented by the above general formula (6), n is an integer of 2 to 10 and m is an integer of 2n to (3n-1). This is preferable because the contrast of the coating film is improved.
 また、一般式(6)で表されるポリ塩化アルミニウムは、色材の耐熱性がより向上し、色材の昇華が抑制され易く、且つ、色材の分散性を良好にしやすい点から、(m/3n×100(%))で定義される塩基度が、15~99%であることが好ましく、60~97%であることがより好ましく、70~95%であることがさらに好ましい。 Further, the polyaluminum chloride represented by the general formula (6) has higher heat resistance of the coloring material, is likely to suppress sublimation of the coloring material, and is likely to improve the dispersibility of the coloring material. The basicity defined by m / 3n × 100 (%)) is preferably 15 to 99%, more preferably 60 to 97%, and even more preferably 70 to 95%.
(C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6)
 本発明において好ましく用いられるC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6は、ε型の結晶構造を有する銅フタロシアニン顔料であり、分散安定性に優れる点から好ましい。
 本発明において用いられるC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6は、塩基性処理又は酸性処理されていてもよく、分散性と保存安定性に優れる点から、組み合わせて用いる分散剤が酸性の場合は、塩基性処理されたものであることが好ましく、組み合わせて用いる分散剤が塩基性の場合は、酸性処理されたものであることが好ましい。中でも、本発明において用いられるC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6は、塩基性処理されたものであることが好ましく、塩基性処理されたC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6が、酸性分散剤と組み合わせて用いられることが好ましい。
(CI Pigment Blue 15: 6)
C.I., preferably used in the present invention. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is a copper phthalocyanine pigment having an ε-type crystal structure, and is preferable because it is excellent in dispersion stability.
C.I. used in the present invention. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 may be subjected to basic treatment or acid treatment, and from the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility and storage stability, when the dispersant used in combination is acidic, it shall be basic treatment. When the dispersant used in combination is basic, it is preferably acid-treated. Above all, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferably basic-treated, and the basic-treated C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferably used in combination with an acidic dispersant.
 本発明において塩基性処理には、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体や、塩基性部位を有する無色化合物の誘導体が好適に用いられる。また、本発明において、塩基性部位を有するとは、置換基として塩基性基を有する態様、置換基において酸性基と塩基性化合物とが塩形成している態様等が挙げられる。
 本発明で色材誘導体又は無色化合物の誘導体が有する塩基性部位としては、例えば、アミノ基、スルホン酸アンモニウム塩、又は、アミノ基を有するスルホンアミド基、アミノ基を有するアミド基、塩基性複素環基等が挙げられる。
In the present invention, a color material derivative having a basic moiety and a colorless compound derivative having a basic moiety are preferably used for the basic treatment. Further, in the present invention, the embodiment having a basic moiety includes an embodiment having a basic group as a substituent, an embodiment in which an acidic group and a basic compound are salt-formed in the substituent, and the like.
In the present invention, the basic moiety of the colorant derivative or the derivative of the colorless compound includes, for example, an amino group, an ammonium sulfonic acid salt, a sulfonamide group having an amino group, an amide group having an amino group, and a basic heterocycle. The group etc. can be mentioned.
 塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体に用いられる色材は、公知の色材を適宜選択して用いることができるが、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6と吸着し易い構造を有することが好ましく、同一又は類似の色素骨格や、相互作用し易い構造を有することが好ましい。また、塩基性処理に用いられるC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6の色味を損なわない色材が好ましい。
 塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体としては、中でも青色色材誘導体であることが好ましい。塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体に用いられる青色色材としては、フタロシアニン系色材、トリアリールメタン系色材、アントラキノン系色材、ナフトール系色材、ベンズイミダゾロン系色材等を用いることができるが、色味や耐熱性の点からフタロシアニン系色材を用いることが好ましい。中でも、分散性と輝度が向上する点から、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体に用いられる色材としては、塩基性処理に用いられるC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6と同じ骨格を有するフタロシアニン系色材を用いることが好ましい。また、中でも、分散性と輝度が向上する点から塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体に用いられる青色色材としては、銅フタロシアニンを用いることが好ましい。
As the color material used for the color material derivative having a basic moiety, a known color material can be appropriately selected and used. I. It is preferable to have a structure that easily adsorbs to Pigment Blue 15: 6, and it is preferable that it has the same or similar pigment skeleton or a structure that easily interacts with it. In addition, C.I. I. A coloring material that does not impair the color of Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferable.
As the color material derivative having a basic moiety, a blue color material derivative is preferable. As the blue color material used for the color material derivative having a basic moiety, a phthalocyanine color material, a triarylmethane color material, an anthraquinone color material, a naphthol color material, a benzimidazolone color material, or the like may be used. However, it is preferable to use a phthalocyanine-based coloring material from the viewpoint of color and heat resistance. Among them, C.I. I. It is preferable to use a phthalocyanine-based coloring material having the same skeleton as Pigment Blue 15: 6. Further, among them, copper phthalocyanine is preferably used as the blue color material used for the color material derivative having a basic portion from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility and brightness.
 塩基性部位を有する無色化合物の誘導体に用いられる無色化合物は、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6に、当該無色化合物の誘導体を用いて塩基性処理しても、塩基性処理前後でC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6の色が変化しない化合物を目安とすることができる。当該無色化合物としては、例えばナフタレン系、トリアジン系等の縮合環化合物や複数の芳香族環が結合している芳香族多環化合物を用いることができる。トリアジン系の芳香族多環化合物としては、例えば、トリアジン環に、フェニルアミノ基等の芳香族炭化水素基を有する置換基が3つ置換された構造が挙げられる。中でも、分散性と輝度が向上する点からトリアジン系の芳香族多環化合物を用いることが好ましい。 The colorless compound used for the derivative of the colorless compound having a basic moiety is C.I. I. Even if Pigment Blue 15: 6 was basicly treated with the derivative of the colorless compound, C.I. I. A compound that does not change the color of Pigment Blue 15: 6 can be used as a guide. As the colorless compound, for example, a condensed ring compound such as a naphthalene type or a triazine type or an aromatic polycyclic compound to which a plurality of aromatic rings are bonded can be used. Examples of the triazine-based aromatic polycyclic compound include a structure in which a triazine ring is substituted with three substituents having an aromatic hydrocarbon group such as a phenylamino group. Above all, it is preferable to use a triazine-based aromatic polycyclic compound from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility and brightness.
 塩基性化合物に由来する構造を有するC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6として、例えば、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体を含むC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6を調製する方法としては、例えば、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体と、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6とを乾式粉砕後、更に塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体を混合する方法が挙げられる。この場合乾式粉砕機としてはボールミル、振動ミル、アトライター等が使用でき、粉砕温度は20~130℃で自由に設定できる。
 また、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体を含むC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6を調製する方法としては、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体と、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6と、塩化ナトリウム、塩化カルシウム、硫酸アンモニウム等の水溶性の無機塩と、グリコール系有機溶剤等の水溶性の有機溶剤を混合し、ソルベントソルトミリング法でニーダータイプの研磨機により混練する方法等が挙げられる。
 色材分散前に予め、塩基性処理されたC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6を調製乃至準備し、色材を分散することにより、色材分散性を向上することができる。
C.I. with a structure derived from a basic compound. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, for example, C.I. I. As a method for preparing Pigment Blue 15: 6, for example, a coloring material derivative having a basic moiety and C.I. I. Examples thereof include a method in which Pigment Blue 15: 6 and Pigment Blue 15: 6 are dry-ground and then mixed with a coloring material derivative having a basic moiety. In this case, a ball mill, a vibration mill, an attritor, or the like can be used as the dry crusher, and the crushing temperature can be freely set at 20 to 130 ° C.
In addition, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 can be prepared by using a coloring material derivative having a basic moiety and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, water-soluble inorganic salts such as sodium chloride, calcium chloride, and ammonium sulfate, and water-soluble organic solvents such as glycol-based organic solvents are mixed and kneaded with a kneader-type polishing machine by the solvent salt milling method. How to do it, etc.
C.I. I. By preparing or preparing Pigment Blue 15: 6 and dispersing the coloring material, the dispersibility of the coloring material can be improved.
 塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体又は無色化合物の誘導体を含むC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6において、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体又は無色化合物の誘導体の含有量は、分散性及び保存安定性の点から、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6 100質量部に対して、0.5質量部以上であることが好ましく、3質量部以上であることがより好ましく、5質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、8質量部以上であることがより更に好ましい。一方、塩基性部位を有する色材誘導体又は無色化合物の誘導体の含有量は、輝度に優れる点から、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6 100質量部に対して、50質量部以下であることが好ましく、40質量部以下であることがより好ましく、30質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。 C. including a colorant derivative having a basic moiety or a derivative of a colorless compound. I. In Pigment Blue 15: 6, the content of the colorant derivative having a basic moiety or the derivative of the colorless compound is C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 With respect to 100 parts by mass, it is preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 3 parts by mass or more, further preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and 8 parts by mass or more. Is even more preferable. On the other hand, the content of the color material derivative having a basic moiety or the derivative of the colorless compound is excellent in luminance, and thus C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 It is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 30 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass.
 なお、塩基性処理又は酸性処理されたC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6であることは、例えば、質量分析、元素分析、表面分析、電位差滴定、及びこれらの組み合わせを用いて適宜分析することができる。
 また、塩基性処理されたC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6と組み合わせて用いる酸性分散剤としては、後述する色材分散液に用いることができる酸性分散剤と同様のものを挙げることができる。
In addition, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 can be appropriately analyzed using, for example, mass spectrometry, elemental analysis, surface analysis, potentiometric titration, and combinations thereof.
In addition, the basic-treated C.I. I. Examples of the acid dispersant used in combination with Pigment Blue 15: 6 include the same acid dispersants that can be used in the colorant dispersion liquid described later.
 本発明においては、着色層の輝度が向上しやすい点から、色材の総量100質量部に対し、染料及びレーキ色材の合計含有量が、5質量部以上100質量部以下であることが好ましく、10質量部以上100質量部以下であることがより好ましい。
 中でも、高輝度な着色層が得られる点、及び色材とヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体との相溶性が向上することで現像残渣抑制効果が向上する点から、色材の総量100質量部に対し、レーキ色材の含有量が、20質量部以上100質量部以下であることが好ましく、30質量部以上100質量部以下であることがより好ましい。
 さらに高輝度な着色層が得られる点から、色材の総量100質量部に対し、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材の合計含有量が、20質量部以上100質量部以下であることが好ましく、30質量部以上100質量部以下であることがより好ましい。前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材の合計含有量が前記下限値以上であると、色材とヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体との相溶性が向上することで現像残渣抑制効果が向上する点、及び耐熱性が向上する点からも好ましい。
 色材が、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材と、当該レーキ色材とは異なる色材とを組み合わせて含む場合は、所望の色味が得られるように調色され、特に限定はされないが、高輝度な着色層が得られる点、色材とヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体との相溶性が向上することで現像残渣抑制効果が向上する点、及び耐熱性が向上する点から、色材の総量100質量部に対する前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材の合計含有量は、20質量部以上98質量部以下であることが好ましく、30質量部以上95質量部以下であってもよい。
 色材が、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材と、キサンテン系染料、及び前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材とは異なるキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを含む場合は、色材の総量100質量部に対する当該キサンテン系染料及び当該キサンテン系染料のレーキ色材の合計含有量は、所望の色相を得る点から、2質量部以上であってもよく、5質量部以上であってもよく、一方、耐熱性の低下を抑制する点から、30質量部以下であることが好ましく、25質量部以下であってもよい。
 また、色材が、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材と、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6とを含む場合、色材の総量100質量部に対するC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6の含有量は、所望の色相を得る点から、20質量部以上であってもよく、30質量部以上であってもよく、一方、着色層の輝度の低下を抑制する点、及び、現像残渣の発生及び色材の耐熱性の低下を抑制する点から、80質量部以下であることが好ましく、70質量部以下であってもよい。
In the present invention, the total content of the dye and the rake coloring material is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material from the viewpoint that the brightness of the colored layer is easily improved. It is more preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less.
Above all, the total amount of the coloring material is obtained from the viewpoint that a high-brightness colored layer can be obtained and the effect of suppressing the development residue is improved by improving the compatibility between the coloring material and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. The content of the rake coloring material is preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass.
From the viewpoint of obtaining a brighter colored layer, the total content of the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material. It is preferably 100 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less. When the total content of the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is at least the above lower limit value, the compatibility between the coloring material and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer It is also preferable from the viewpoint that the effect of suppressing the development residue is improved and the heat resistance is improved.
When the coloring material contains a rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) in combination with a coloring material different from the rake coloring material, a desired color can be obtained. The color is adjusted to, but the effect of suppressing the development residue is improved by obtaining a high-brightness colored layer and improving the compatibility between the coloring material and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. The total content of the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2) is 20 parts by mass or more and 98 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material. It is preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and may be 30 parts by mass or more and 95 parts by mass or less.
The coloring material is a rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), a xanthene dye, and a rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2). When containing at least one selected from the group consisting of rake coloring materials of different xanthene dyes, the total content of the xanthene dye and the rake coloring material of the xanthene dye is 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the coloring material. From the viewpoint of obtaining a desired hue, it may be 2 parts by mass or more, 5 parts by mass or more, and on the other hand, from the viewpoint of suppressing deterioration of heat resistance, it is preferably 30 parts by mass or less. , 25 parts by mass or less.
Further, the coloring material is the rake coloring material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), and C.I. I. When Pigment Blue 15: 6 is included, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Blue 15: 6 may be 20 parts by mass or more or 30 parts by mass or more from the viewpoint of obtaining a desired hue, while suppressing a decrease in brightness of the colored layer. , And, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of development residue and the deterioration of the heat resistance of the coloring material, it is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, and may be 70 parts by mass or less.
 また、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対し、染料及びレーキ色材の含有量は、通常、0.5質量%以上35質量%以下であり、1質量%以上30質量%以下であることが好ましく、2質量%以上25質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 Further, the content of the dye and the rake coloring material is usually 0.5% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less, and 1% by mass or more and 30% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention. It is preferably 2% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less.
<他の顔料>
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、色調を調整するために、上述したC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6とは異なる他の顔料を更に用いてもよい。当該他の顔料としては、従来カラーフィルタの着色剤として用いられている種々の有機顔料及び無機顔料を用いることができ、特に限定はされないが、発色性及び耐熱性に優れる点から、有機顔料が好ましい。
<Other pigments>
The photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention has the above-mentioned C.I. I. Other pigments different from Pigment Blue 15: 6 may be further used. As the other pigment, various organic pigments and inorganic pigments conventionally used as colorants of color filters can be used, and the organic pigment is not particularly limited, but is excellent in color development and heat resistance. preferable.
 青色用途の場合、上記他の顔料としては、分散安定性に優れる点から、ε型又はβ型の結晶構造を有する銅フタロシアニン顔料等の青色顔料、並びにC.I.ピグメントバイオレット23等の紫色顔料が好ましく用いられる。ε型又はβ型の結晶構造を有する銅フタロシアニン顔料としては、中でも、C.I.ピグメントブルー15、15:1、15:2、15:3、15:4及び15:5よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましく用いられる。
 なお、上記他の顔料は、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6と同様に、分散安定性を向上させるために酸性処理又は塩基性処理がなされたものであってもよい。上記他の顔料も、組み合わせて用いる分散剤が酸性の場合は塩基性処理されたものであることが好ましく、組み合わせて用いる分散剤が塩基性の場合は酸性処理されたものであることが好ましい。
In the case of blue applications, the other pigments include blue pigments such as copper phthalocyanine pigments having an ε-type or β-type crystal structure, and C.I. I. A purple pigment such as Pigment Violet 23 is preferably used. Among the copper phthalocyanine pigments having an ε-type or β-type crystal structure, C.I. I. At least one selected from the group consisting of Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4 and 15: 5 is preferably used.
The other pigments mentioned above are C.I. I. Similar to Pigment Blue 15: 6, it may be acid-treated or basic-treated in order to improve the dispersion stability. When the dispersant used in combination is acidic, the other pigments are preferably treated with a basic treatment, and when the dispersant used in combination is basic, they are preferably treated with an acid.
 本発明において上記他の顔料は、本発明の効果が損なわれない範囲の量で用いられることが好ましい。具体的には、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対し、上記他の顔料の含有量を25質量%以下とするか、または、染料及びレーキ色材の総量100質量部に対し、上記他の顔料の含有量を80質量部以下とすることが好ましい。さらに、上記2つの上限量のうち少ない方を、より好ましい上限量とする。 In the present invention, the above-mentioned other pigments are preferably used in an amount within a range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. Specifically, the content of the other pigment is 25% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition, or the above is made with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the dye and the rake coloring material. The content of other pigments is preferably 80 parts by mass or less. Further, the smaller of the above two upper limit amounts is set as a more preferable upper limit amount.
[バインダー樹脂]
<ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体>
 本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物が含有するバインダー樹脂は、後述する一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を5~25質量%含む高分子構造を有し、重量平均分子量が11000以上であり、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gである共重合体(ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体)を含む。
 上記ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を高分子骨格の連鎖構造内に含む、アルカリ可溶性の共重合体である。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体が有する高分子構造は、主鎖のみを有する構造であってもよいし、主鎖と側鎖を有する構造であってもよい。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の主鎖は、典型的には、エチレン性不飽和結合を有するモノマーの付加重合によって生じる構成単位が連結した連鎖構造を有し、さらに、エチレン性不飽和結合以外の官能基を有するモノマーの付加重合又は縮重合によって生じる構成単位を含んでいてもよい。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の側鎖は、典型的には、主鎖上の官能基と側鎖を形成するためのモノマーの官能基との反応によって生じた連結基を介して主鎖に結合しており、炭素-炭素間の結合を介して主鎖から分岐していてもよい。
 主鎖上の官能基と側鎖を形成するためのモノマーの官能基が反応して側鎖が形成される例としては、例えば、主鎖上にカルボキシ基が存在する場合に、このカルボキシ基にグリシジル基を有するモノマーを反応させることによりエステル連結基が形成され、グリシジル基を有するモノマー由来の構成単位からなる側鎖が導入することができる。また他の例としては、主鎖上に水酸基が存在する場合に、この水酸基にイソシアネート基を有するモノマーを反応させることによりウレタン連結基が形成され、イソシアネート基を有するモノマー由来の構成単位からなる側鎖が導入することができる。
 側鎖は、モノマー1つ分の構成単位を有するペンダント構造でもよいし、2つ以上の構成単位が連結したポリマー構造を有していてもよい。また、側鎖がポリマー構造を有する場合、エチレン性不飽和結合を有するモノマー由来の構成単位のみからなるものであってもよいし、エチレン性不飽和結合以外の官能基を有するモノマーの付加重合又は縮重合によって生じる構成単位を含むものであってもよい。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の水酸基のほかにも、アルカリ可溶性を付与する酸性基、エチレン性二重結合含有基のような他の官能基、嵩高い基のような分子構造を調節する基などの原子団を必要に応じて有しており、それらは、主鎖又は側鎖のどちらに存在していてもよい。
[Binder resin]
<Polymer containing hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit>
The binder resin contained in the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) described later. A copolymer having a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more and an acid value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g (hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer) is contained.
The hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is an alkali-soluble copolymer containing a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate in the chain structure of the polymer skeleton.
The polymer structure of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer may have a structure having only a main chain or a structure having a main chain and a side chain. The main chain of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer typically has a chain structure in which the structural units generated by the addition polymerization of the monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond are linked, and further, the ethylenically unsaturated bond is obtained. It may contain a structural unit generated by addition polymerization or depolymerization of a monomer having a functional group other than the saturated bond.
The side chains of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers are typically via linking groups resulting from the reaction of functional groups on the backbone with the functional groups of the monomers to form the side chains. It is bonded to the main chain and may be branched from the main chain via a carbon-carbon bond.
As an example of the reaction of the functional group on the main chain with the functional group of the monomer for forming the side chain to form the side chain, for example, when a carboxy group is present on the main chain, the carboxy group may be used. An ester linking group is formed by reacting a monomer having a glycidyl group, and a side chain composed of a structural unit derived from the monomer having a glycidyl group can be introduced. As another example, when a hydroxyl group is present on the main chain, a urethane linking group is formed by reacting the hydroxyl group with a monomer having an isocyanate group, and the side consisting of a structural unit derived from the monomer having an isocyanate group is formed. Chains can be introduced.
The side chain may have a pendant structure having one structural unit of a monomer, or may have a polymer structure in which two or more structural units are connected. When the side chain has a polymer structure, it may consist only of a structural unit derived from a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, or addition polymerization of a monomer having a functional group other than the ethylenically unsaturated bond. It may contain a structural unit generated by the condensation polymerization.
In addition to the hydroxyl group derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer includes an acidic group that imparts alkali solubility and other functional groups such as an ethylenically double bond-containing group. It has, if necessary, atomic groups such as groups that regulate the molecular structure, such as bulky groups, which may be present in either the main chain or the side chains.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の好適な一例として、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位、酸性基を有する構成単位、嵩高い基を有する構成単位、及び、必要に応じ他の構成単位を含む主鎖に、エチレン性不飽和結合等の光重合性官能基を有する構成単位を含む側鎖が結合した共重合体を挙げることができる。
 このようなヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、主鎖上の酸性基によってアルカリ可溶性が付与され、側鎖の光重合性官能基によって架橋結合性が付与されている。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体が光重合性官能基を有する場合には、カラーフィルタ製造時における樹脂組成物の硬化工程において、バインダー樹脂同士、乃至、バインダー樹脂と光重合性化合物であるモノマー等が架橋結合を形成し得る。その結果、硬化膜の膜強度がより向上して現像耐性が向上し、また、硬化膜の熱収縮が抑制されて基板との密着性に優れるようになる。
Suitable examples of hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymers include hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate-derived structural units, structural units with acidic groups, bulky groups, and optionally other components. Examples thereof include a copolymer in which a side chain containing a structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated bond is bonded to a main chain containing a structural unit.
In such a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, alkali solubility is imparted by an acidic group on the main chain, and crosslinkability is imparted by a photopolymerizable functional group of the side chain. When the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer has a photopolymerizable functional group, the binder resins or the binder resin and the photopolymerizable compound are used in the curing step of the resin composition at the time of producing a color filter. Certain monomers and the like can form crosslinked bonds. As a result, the film strength of the cured film is further improved, the development resistance is improved, the thermal shrinkage of the cured film is suppressed, and the adhesion to the substrate is excellent.
 上記好適なヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体としては、例えば、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基を有するヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート、酸性基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー、嵩高い基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー、及び、必要に応じてその他のエチレン性不飽和モノマーを共重合することにより主鎖部分を合成した後、主鎖上の官能基と反応して結合を生じる官能基と光重合性官能基とを有する光重合性官能基含有モノマーを反応させることにより、光重合性官能基を有する側鎖を導入したヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を製造することができる。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の主鎖及び側鎖を構成する構成単位、及び、当該構成単位を形成するために用いられるモノマーについて、以下に説明する。
Examples of the suitable hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer include hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having an acidic group, and a bulky group. After synthesizing the main chain portion by copolymerizing the ethylenically unsaturated monomer and other ethylenically unsaturated monomers as necessary, the functional group reacts with the functional group on the main chain to form a bond. By reacting a photopolymerizable functional group-containing monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group, a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer having a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group introduced can be produced. ..
The structural units constituting the main chain and side chains of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer and the monomers used to form the structural units will be described below.
(一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位)
 下記一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位(以下、「ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位」と称する場合がある。)は、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基を有するヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレートのエチレン性二重結合が付加反応によって開裂し、2つの単結合を生じた化学構造を有する。
(Constituent unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A))
The structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the following general formula (A) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit”) is an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. It has a chemical structure in which the ethylenic double bond of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate to be contained is cleaved by an addition reaction to form two single bonds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(一般式(A)中、Rはメチル基又は水素原子を表し、Rは、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
(In the general formula ( A ), RA represents a methyl group or a hydrogen atom, and RB represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.)
 前記一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位としては、中でも、前記一般式(A)中のRがメチル基であるヒドロキシアルキルメタクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましい。
 前記一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の具体例としては、例えば、ヒドロキシメチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシ-1-メチルエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシイソブチル(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレートに由来する構成単位等を挙げることができる。中でも、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位及び2-ヒドロキシ-1-メチルエチル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が特に好ましい。
As the structural unit derived from the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A), the structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl methacrylate in which RA in the general formula ( A ) is a methyl group is preferable.
Specific examples of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit represented by the general formula (A) include hydroxymethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate. Examples thereof include structural units derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylates such as 2-hydroxy-1-methylethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-hydroxyisobutyl (meth) acrylate. Of these, a structural unit derived from 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a structural unit derived from 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and a structural unit derived from 2-hydroxy-1-methylethyl (meth) acrylate are preferable. Building blocks derived from ethyl (meth) acrylate are particularly preferred.
 本発明において、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体に含まれるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量は、共重合体を構成する構成単位の全量100質量%に対し、5質量%以上25質量%以下とする。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量を上記範囲内とすることによって、平坦性に優れ、現像残渣が抑制された着色層を得ることができる。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量が5質量%未満の場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときに、塗膜の流動化を十分に抑制することができないため、得られる着色層の平坦性が悪化する。一方、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量が25質量%を超える場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物の粘度上昇による塗布性の悪化又は感光性着色樹脂組成物の溶剤再溶解性の低下が生じることにより、得られる着色層において異物又はムラが発生しやすくなる。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体に含まれるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量は、中でも5質量%以上20質量%以下であることが好ましい。
In the present invention, the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 5% by mass or more and 25% by mass or more with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the constituent units constituting the copolymer. It shall be mass% or less. By setting the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit within the above range, a colored layer having excellent flatness and suppressed development residue can be obtained.
When the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit is less than 5% by mass, the fluidization of the coating film cannot be sufficiently suppressed when the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition is heated and dried. The flatness of the obtained colored layer is deteriorated. On the other hand, when the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit exceeds 25% by mass, the coatability is deteriorated due to the increase in the viscosity of the photosensitive colored resin composition or the solvent resolubility of the photosensitive colored resin composition is deteriorated. As a result, foreign matter or unevenness is likely to occur in the obtained colored layer.
The amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is preferably 5% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
(酸性基を有する構成単位)
 酸性基を有する構成単位において、酸性基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基等を挙げることができるが、中でも、光重合性官能基を有する側鎖を導入しやすい点から、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性基を有する構成単位としては、例えば、カルボキシ基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を好ましく用いることができる。カルボキシ基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位は、カルボキシ基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーのエチレン性不飽和結合が付加反応によって開裂し、2つの単結合を生じた化学構造を有している。
 なお、本発明において、エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位とは、エチレン性不飽和モノマーのラジカル重合可能な炭素-炭素二重結合が炭素-炭素単結合になった構成単位をいう。
 カルボキシ基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸モノアルキルエステル、フマル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、桂皮酸、アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。また、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチルや(メタ)アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル等の水酸基を有する単量体と無水マレイン酸、無水コハク酸、無水フタル酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物のような環状無水物との付加反応物、ω-カルボキシ-ポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレートなども利用できる。また、カルボキシ基の前駆体として無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸などの無水物含有モノマーを用いてもよい。中でも、共重合性やコスト、溶解性、ガラス転移温度などの点から(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましい。
(Constituent unit having an acidic group)
In the structural unit having an acidic group, examples of the acidic group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group and the like, but among them, a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group can be easily introduced. A carboxy group is preferred. As the structural unit having an acidic group, for example, a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group can be preferably used. The structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group has a chemical structure in which the ethylenically unsaturated bond of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group is cleaved by an addition reaction to form two single bonds. There is.
In the present invention, the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer means a structural unit in which a radically polymerizable carbon-carbon double bond of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer becomes a carbon-carbon single bond.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, katsura acid, and acrylic acid dimer. Can be mentioned. Further, a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate or 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate and maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid anhydride, etc. Additive reactants with cyclic anhydride, ω-carboxy-polycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylate and the like can also be used. Further, as a precursor of the carboxy group, an anhydride-containing monomer such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride may be used. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, glass transition temperature and the like.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中に含まれる酸性基を有する構成単位の量は、共重合体を構成する構成単位の全量100質量%に対し、8質量%以上30質量%以下であることが好ましい。酸性基を有する構成単位の量を上記範囲内とすることによって、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜に十分なアルカリ可溶性を付与し、かつ、溶剤溶解性の低下を抑制することができる。
 酸性基を有する構成単位の量が8質量%未満の場合には、酸価が低すぎて十分なアルカリ可溶性が得られない場合がある。一方、酸性基を有する構成単位の量が30質量%を超える場合には、感光性樹脂組成物の極性が高くなりすぎて、溶媒に溶解し難くなる場合がある。
 酸性基を有する構成単位の量は、10質量%以上28質量%以下であることがより好ましく、12質量%以上28質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The amount of the structural unit having an acidic group contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 8% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the constituent units constituting the copolymer. It is preferable to have. By setting the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group within the above range, sufficient alkali solubility can be imparted to the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition, and deterioration of solvent solubility can be suppressed.
When the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group is less than 8% by mass, the acid value may be too low to obtain sufficient alkali solubility. On the other hand, when the amount of the structural unit having an acidic group exceeds 30% by mass, the polarity of the photosensitive resin composition becomes too high, and it may be difficult to dissolve in the solvent.
The amount of the structural unit having an acidic group is more preferably 10% by mass or more and 28% by mass or less, and further preferably 12% by mass or more and 28% by mass or less.
(嵩高い基を有する構成単位)
 嵩高い基を有する構成単位としては、例えば、嵩高い基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位が挙げられる。嵩高い基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位は、嵩高い基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーのエチレン性不飽和結合が付加反応によって開裂し、2つの単結合を生じた化学構造を有している。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体が嵩高い基を有する場合には、バインダー樹脂の硬化時収縮が抑制され、基板との間の剥離が緩和し、基板に対する密着性が向上する。なお、嵩高い基は、1価の基として含まれていても良いし、2価以上の基として含まれていても良い。
 このような嵩高い基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素環、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素環、及びこれらの組み合わせ等の炭化水素環が挙げられる。当該炭化水素環は、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルキルシクロアルキル基、カルボニル基、カルボキシ基、オキシカルボニル基、アミド基、水酸基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子等の置換基を有していてもよい。
 炭化水素環の具体例としては、シクロプロパン、シクロブタン、シクロペンタン、シクロヘキサン、ノルボルナン、イソボルナン、トリシクロ[5.2.1.0(2,6)]デカン(ジシクロペンタン)、アダマンタン等の脂肪族炭化水素環;ベンゼン、ナフタレン、アントラセン、フェナントレン、フルオレン等の芳香族炭化水素環;ビフェニル、ターフェニル、ジフェニルメタン、トリフェニルメタン、スチルベン等の鎖状多環や、カルド構造(9,9-ジアリールフルオレン);これらの基の一部が置換基によって置換された基等が挙げられる。
 炭化水素環として、脂肪族炭化水素環を含む場合には、着色層の耐熱性や密着性が向上すると共に、得られた着色層の輝度が向上する点から好ましい。
 また、構成単位が上記カルド構造を含む場合には、着色層の硬化性が向上し、色材の退色を抑制し、耐溶剤性(NMP膨潤抑制)が向上する点から特に好ましい。
(Constituent unit having a bulky group)
Examples of the structural unit having a bulky group include a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a bulky group. The structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a bulky group has a chemical structure in which the ethylenically unsaturated bond of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a bulky group is cleaved by an addition reaction to form two single bonds. is doing.
When the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer has a bulky group, shrinkage of the binder resin during curing is suppressed, peeling from the substrate is alleviated, and adhesion to the substrate is improved. The bulky group may be contained as a monovalent group or may be contained as a divalent or higher valent group.
Examples of such bulky groups include an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, and a hydrocarbon ring such as a combination thereof. Can be mentioned. The hydrocarbon ring has a substituent such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkylcycloalkyl group, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an amide group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an amino group and a halogen atom. May be good.
Specific examples of the hydrocarbon ring include aliphatic compounds such as cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, cyclohexane, norbornan, isobornane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 (2,6)] decane (dicyclopentane), and adamantane. Hydrocarbon rings; aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene, and fluorene; chain polycycles such as biphenyl, terphenyl, diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, and stilben, and cardo structures (9,9-diarylfluorene). ); Examples include groups in which some of these groups are substituted with substituents.
When the hydrocarbon ring contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, it is preferable because the heat resistance and adhesion of the colored layer are improved and the brightness of the obtained colored layer is improved.
Further, when the structural unit includes the cardo structure, it is particularly preferable because the curability of the colored layer is improved, the fading of the coloring material is suppressed, and the solvent resistance (suppression of NMP swelling) is improved.
 炭化水素環を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えば、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレンなどが挙げられ、現像後の着色層の断面形状が加熱処理においても維持される効果が大きい点から、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、及びスチレンから選択される少なくとも1種を用いることが好ましい。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a hydrocarbon ring include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl. Examples thereof include (meth) acrylate and styrene, and cyclocarbonate (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, and adamantyl (adamantyl) because the cross-sectional shape of the colored layer after development has a great effect of being maintained even in heat treatment. It is preferable to use at least one selected from meta) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中に含まれる嵩高い基を有する構成単位の量は、共重合体を構成する構成単位の全量100質量%に対し、20質量%以上70質量%以下であることが好ましい。嵩高い基を有する構成単位の量をこの範囲とすることによって、基板に対する塗膜の密着性を優れたものとすることができる。
 嵩高い基を有する構成単位の量が20質量%未満の場合には、基板に対する塗膜の密着性が不十分となる場合がある。一方、嵩高い基を有する構成単位の量が70質量%を超える場合には、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位、酸性基又は光重合性官能基を十分に導入することができず、感光性着色樹脂組成物の現像性もしくは造膜形成性、又は得られる着色層の平坦性が不十分となってしまう場合がある。
 嵩高い基を有する構成単位の量は、20質量%以上60質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上55質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The amount of the structural unit having a bulky group contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 20% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the structural units constituting the copolymer. Is preferable. By setting the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group within this range, the adhesion of the coating film to the substrate can be improved.
When the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group is less than 20% by mass, the adhesion of the coating film to the substrate may be insufficient. On the other hand, when the amount of the structural unit having a bulky group exceeds 70% by mass, the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit, the acidic group or the photopolymerizable functional group cannot be sufficiently introduced, and the photosensitive coloring is performed. The developability or film-forming property of the resin composition, or the flatness of the obtained colored layer may be insufficient.
The amount of the structural unit having a bulky group is more preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or more and 55% by mass or less.
(主鎖を構成するその他の構成単位)
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の主鎖に、官能基、嵩高い基のいずれも有しない構成単位を含ませることによって、アルカリ可溶性の抑制、溶剤溶解性の向上、溶剤再溶解性の向上などの物性を調整することができる。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の主鎖を構成するその他の構成単位を誘導するエチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート等の官能基を有さず且つ低分子エステル残基を有する(メタ)アクリレートを用いることができる。
(Other building blocks that make up the main chain)
By including a structural unit having neither a functional group nor a bulky group in the main chain of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, alkali solubility is suppressed, solvent solubility is improved, and solvent resolubility is achieved. It is possible to adjust physical properties such as improvement of.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer for deriving other structural units constituting the main chain of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer include functional groups such as methyl (meth) acrylate and ethyl (meth) acrylate. (Meta) acrylates that do not have and have low molecular weight ester residues can be used.
(光重合性官能基を有する側鎖を構成する構成単位)
 光重合性官能基を有する側鎖は、光重合性官能基を有する構成単位1つのみからなるペンダント構造でもよいし、2つ以上の構成単位が連結したポリマー構造を有していてもよい。側鎖がモノマー1つ分の構成単位を有するペンダント構造である場合には、光重合性官能基含有モノマーが有する、主鎖上の官能基と反応して結合を生じる官能基が、主鎖と結合する連結基を生じた化学構造を有する。
 光重合性官能基と、主鎖上の官能基と反応して結合を生じる官能基とを有する光重合性官能基含有モノマーとしては、例えば、光重合性官能基としてエチレン性不飽和結合を有し、主鎖上の官能基と反応して結合を生じる官能基としてエポキシ基を有するグリシジル(メタ)アクリレートのような化合物、及び、光重合性官能基としてエチレン性不飽和結合を有し、主鎖上の官能基と反応して結合を生じる官能基としてイソシアネート基を有する化合物等が挙げられる。
 光重合性官能基とエポキシ基を有するモノマーを用いる場合には、主鎖上のカルボキシ基に当該モノマーを反応させることにより、光重合性官能基を有する側鎖を形成することができる。この場合、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体に光重合性官能基を導入すると同時に、主鎖上のカルボキシ基がエポキシ基との反応によって消費されて酸価が小さくなるため、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の光硬化性と現像性が連動して変化する。したがって、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の光硬化性と現像性のバランスを考慮して、カルボキシ基を有するモノマー又は当該モノマーから誘導される構成単位の量と、光重合性官能基とエポキシ基を有するモノマー又は当該モノマーから誘導される構成単位の量を調節する必要がある。
 また、光重合性官能基とイソシアネート基を有するモノマーを用いる場合には、主鎖上の水酸基に当該モノマーを反応させることにより、光重合性官能基を有する側鎖を形成することができる。
 これらの光重合性官能基含有モノマーのうち、光重合性官能基とエポキシ基を有するモノマーを用いることが好ましい。本発明においては、着色層の平坦性を向上させる観点からヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量が重要であるが、光重合性官能基とエポキシ基を有するモノマーは、カルボキシ基との反応性が高く、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中の水酸基をほとんど消費しないため、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位の量を調節しやすい。
(Constituent unit constituting a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group)
The side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group may have a pendant structure consisting of only one structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group, or may have a polymer structure in which two or more structural units are linked. When the side chain has a pendant structure having a structural unit equivalent to one monomer, the functional group of the photopolymerizable functional group-containing monomer that reacts with the functional group on the main chain to form a bond is the main chain. It has a chemical structure that yields a linking group to be attached.
As the photopolymerizable functional group-containing monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group and a functional group that reacts with a functional group on the main chain to form a bond, for example, the photopolymerizable functional group has an ethylenically unsaturated bond. It has a compound such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate having an epoxy group as a functional group that reacts with a functional group on the main chain to form a bond, and an ethylenically unsaturated bond as a photopolymerizable functional group. Examples of the functional group that reacts with the functional group on the chain to form a bond include a compound having an isocyanate group.
When a monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group and an epoxy group is used, a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group can be formed by reacting the monomer with a carboxy group on the main chain. In this case, a photopolymerizable functional group is introduced into the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and at the same time, the carboxy group on the main chain is consumed by the reaction with the epoxy group to reduce the acid value. The photocurability and developability of the (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer change in conjunction with each other. Therefore, in consideration of the balance between the photocurability and the developability of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the amount of the monomer having a carboxy group or the structural unit derived from the monomer and the photopolymerizable functional group And it is necessary to adjust the amount of the monomer having an epoxy group or the structural unit derived from the monomer.
When a monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group and an isocyanate group is used, a side chain having a photopolymerizable functional group can be formed by reacting the monomer with a hydroxyl group on the main chain.
Among these photopolymerizable functional group-containing monomers, it is preferable to use a monomer having a photopolymerizable functional group and an epoxy group. In the present invention, the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is important from the viewpoint of improving the flatness of the colored layer, but the photopolymerizable functional group and the epoxy Since the monomer having a group has high reactivity with the carboxy group and hardly consumes the hydroxyl group in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the amount of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit can be easily adjusted.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体が側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する場合、エチレン性不飽和結合当量は、硬化膜の膜強度が向上して現像耐性が向上し、基板との密着性に優れるといった効果を得る点から、100~2000の範囲であることが好ましく、特に、140~1500の範囲であることが好ましい。該エチレン性不飽和結合当量が、100以上であれば現像耐性や密着性に優れている。また、2000以下であれば、前記酸性基を有する構成単位や、嵩高い基を有する構成単位などの他の構成単位の割合を相対的に増やすことができるため、現像性や耐熱性に優れている。
 ここで、エチレン性不飽和結合当量とは、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体におけるエチレン性不飽和結合1モル当りの重量平均分子量のことであり、下記数式(1)で表される。
When the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer has an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain, the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent increases the film strength of the cured film, improves the development resistance, and is different from the substrate. From the viewpoint of obtaining an effect such as excellent adhesion, the range is preferably in the range of 100 to 2000, and particularly preferably in the range of 140 to 1500. When the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is 100 or more, the development resistance and adhesion are excellent. Further, if it is 2000 or less, the ratio of other structural units such as the structural unit having an acidic group and the structural unit having a bulky group can be relatively increased, so that the developability and heat resistance are excellent. There is.
Here, the ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is the weight average molecular weight per mol of the ethylenically unsaturated bond in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and is represented by the following mathematical formula (1). ..
数式(1)
  エチレン性不飽和結合当量(g/mol)=W(g)/M(mol)
(数式(1)中、Wは、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の質量(g)を表し、Mはヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中に含まれるエチレン性二重結合のモル数(mol)を表す。)
Formula (1)
Ethylene unsaturated bond equivalent (g / mol) = W (g) / M (mol)
(In the formula (1), W represents the mass (g) of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and M is the ethylenic double contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Represents the number of moles of bonds (mol).
 上記エチレン性不飽和結合当量は、例えば、JIS K 0070:1992に記載のよう素価の試験方法に準拠して、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体1gあたりに含まれるエチレン性二重結合の数を測定することにより算出してもよい。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond equivalent is, for example, an ethylenically double bond contained in 1 g of a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer according to a test method for iodine value as described in JIS K0070: 1992. It may be calculated by measuring the number of bonds.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体中に含まれる光重合性官能基を有する構成単位の量は、共重合体を構成する構成単位の全量100質量%に対し、2.5質量%以上35質量%以下であることが好ましい。光重合性官能基を有する構成単位の量を上記範囲内とすることによって、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の光硬化性を向上させることができる。
 光重合性官能基を有する構成単位の量が2.5質量%未満の場合には、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の光硬化性が十分に得られない場合がある。一方、光重合性官能基を有する構成単位の量が35質量%を超える場合には、主鎖の酸性基を消費しすぎて十分なアルカリ可溶性が得られない場合がある。
 光重合性官能基を有する構成単位の量は、4質量%以上32質量%以下であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上31質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The amount of the constituent unit having a photopolymerizable functional group contained in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 2.5% by mass or more with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of the constituent units constituting the copolymer. It is preferably 35% by mass or less. By setting the amount of the constituent unit having a photopolymerizable functional group within the above range, the photocurability of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer can be improved.
When the amount of the constituent unit having a photopolymerizable functional group is less than 2.5% by mass, the photocurability of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer may not be sufficiently obtained. On the other hand, when the amount of the structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group exceeds 35% by mass, the acidic group of the main chain may be consumed too much and sufficient alkali solubility may not be obtained.
The amount of the structural unit having a photopolymerizable functional group is more preferably 4% by mass or more and 32% by mass or less, and further preferably 5% by mass or more and 31% by mass or less.
 本発明において、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、11,000以上とする。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量を11,000以上とすることによって、感光性着色樹脂の塗膜を加熱乾燥するときに、軟化した塗膜の粘度をヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の分子量効果によって上昇させて、塗膜の流動化を抑制することができる。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量が11,000未満の場合には、加熱乾燥するときに塗膜の流動化を十分に抑制することができない。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量は特に限定されないが、25,000以下とすることが好ましい。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)が25,000を超える場合には、感光性樹脂組成物の粘度が高くなりすぎ、塗布に適した粘度から外れてしまう場合がある。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の重量平均分子量は、11,000以上20,000以下とすることがより好ましく、11,000以上19,000以下とすることが更に好ましい。
In the present invention, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 11,000 or more. By setting the weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer to 11,000 or more, the viscosity of the softened coating film is increased by hydroxyalkyl (meth) when the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin is heated and dried. ) It can be increased by the molecular weight effect of the acrylate unit-containing copolymer to suppress the fluidization of the coating film. When the weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is less than 11,000, the fluidization of the coating film cannot be sufficiently suppressed when it is heated and dried.
The weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 25,000 or less. When the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer exceeds 25,000, the viscosity of the photosensitive resin composition becomes too high, and the viscosity deviates from the viscosity suitable for coating. There is.
The weight average molecular weight of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is more preferably 11,000 or more and 20,000 or less, and further preferably 11,000 or more and 19,000 or less.
 なお、本発明において重量平均分子量(Mw)は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)により測定される値である。測定は、東ソー製のHLC-8220GPCを用い、溶出溶剤を0.01モル/リットルの臭化リチウムを添加したN-メチルピロリドンとし、校正曲線用ポリスチレンスタンダードをMw:8×10(F-80)、Mw:4×10(F-40)、Mw:2×10(F-20)、Mw:1×10(F-10)、Mw:4×10(F-4)、Mw:2×10(F-2)、Mw:5×10(A-5000)、Mw:2.5×10(A-2500)、Mw:1×10(A-1000)、Mw:5×10(A-500)(以上、東ソー製)とし、測定カラムをTSK-GEL ALPHA-M×2本(東ソー製)として行う。 In the present invention, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is a value measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). For the measurement, HLC-8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh was used, the elution solvent was N-methylpyrrolidone to which 0.01 mol / liter of lithium bromide was added, and the polystyrene standard for calibration curve was Mw: 8 × 105 (F-80). ), Mw: 4 × 10 5 (F-40), Mw: 2 × 10 5 (F-20), Mw: 1 × 10 5 (F-10), Mw: 4 × 10 4 (F-4), Mw: 2 × 10 4 (F-2), Mw: 5 × 10 3 (A-5000), Mw: 2.5 × 10 3 (A-2500), Mw: 1 × 10 3 (A-1000), Mw: 5 × 10 2 (A-500) (all manufactured by Tosoh), and the measurement column is TSK-GEL ALPHA-M × 2 (manufactured by Tosoh).
 本発明において、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価は、60mgKOH/g以上130mgKOH/g以下とする。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価を60mgKOH/g以上とすることによって、感光性着色樹脂の塗膜に十分なアルカリ可溶性を付与することができ、着色層の形状を平坦化する効果に優れる。一方、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価を130mgKOH/g以下とすることによって、塗膜を現像するときに基板上の現像残渣を少なくすることができる。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価は、65mgKOH/g以上125mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、65mgKOH/g以上110mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上100mgKOH/g以下であることがより更に好ましい。
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物が色材としてレーキ色材を含む場合は、現像残渣の発生を抑制する効果が高いため、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価は、100mgKOH/g以上であってもよく、110mgKOH/g以上であってもよく、120mgKOH/g以上であってもよい。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の酸価が高いほど、着色層は平坦化されやすい。
In the present invention, the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 60 mgKOH / g or more and 130 mgKOH / g or less. By setting the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer to 60 mgKOH / g or more, sufficient alkali solubility can be imparted to the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin, and the shape of the colored layer is flattened. Excellent effect. On the other hand, by setting the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer to 130 mgKOH / g or less, it is possible to reduce the development residue on the substrate when developing the coating film.
The acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is preferably 65 mgKOH / g or more and 125 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 65 mgKOH / g or more and 110 mgKOH / g or less, and 70 mgKOH / g or more and 100 mgKOH or less. It is more preferably less than / g.
When the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains a lake coloring material as a coloring material, the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is 100 mgKOH because it is highly effective in suppressing the generation of development residues. It may be / g or more, 110 mgKOH / g or more, or 120 mgKOH / g or more. The higher the acid value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, the easier it is for the colored layer to be flattened.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基価は、50mgKOH/g以上200mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましい。ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基価が50mgKOH/g未満の場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜の疎水性が高くなりすぎて、現像性が悪化する場合がある。一方、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基価が200mgKOH/gを超える場合には、感光性着色樹脂組成物の溶剤再溶解性が悪化し、塗布性が損なわれるおそれがある。
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の水酸基価は、70mgKOH/g以上190mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、80mgKOH/g以上180mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。
The hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more and 200 mgKOH / g or less. When the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is less than 50 mgKOH / g, the hydrophobicity of the coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition may become too high and the developability may deteriorate. .. On the other hand, when the hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer exceeds 200 mgKOH / g, the solvent resolubility of the photosensitive colored resin composition may deteriorate and the coatability may be impaired.
The hydroxyl value of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more and 190 mgKOH / g or less, and further preferably 80 mgKOH / g or more and 180 mgKOH / g or less.
 ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、通常、本発明のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物に、溶剤に溶解させたワニスの状態で添加される。特に限定はされないが、平坦性に優れた着色層が得られやすい点から、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体は、固形分濃度が60質量%となるように溶剤に溶解させたワニスの状態で、90℃に加熱した時の粘度が500mPa・s以上であることが好ましく、600mPa・s以上であることがより好ましく、700mPa・s以上であることがより更に好ましい。一方で、上記粘度は、10,000mPa・s以下であってもよく、9,000mPa・s以下であってもよい。上記粘度が上記上限値以下であると、感光性着色樹脂組成物が乾燥しやすくなるため、カラーフィルタの生産性を向上させることができる。
 なお、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を溶解するために用いる溶剤は、特に限定はされず、例えば、本発明のカラーフィルタ用感光性樹脂組成物に含まれる溶剤と同様のものを用いることができる。
The hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is usually added to the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter of the present invention in the form of a varnish dissolved in a solvent. Although not particularly limited, the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is a varnish dissolved in a solvent so that the solid content concentration is 60% by mass because a colored layer having excellent flatness can be easily obtained. In this state, the viscosity when heated to 90 ° C. is preferably 500 mPa · s or more, more preferably 600 mPa · s or more, and even more preferably 700 mPa · s or more. On the other hand, the viscosity may be 10,000 mPa · s or less, or 9,000 mPa · s or less. When the viscosity is not more than the upper limit value, the photosensitive colored resin composition is easily dried, so that the productivity of the color filter can be improved.
The solvent used to dissolve the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is not particularly limited, and for example, the same solvent as that contained in the photosensitive resin composition for a color filter of the present invention may be used. Can be used.
<その他のバインダー樹脂>
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体と組み合わせて、その他のバインダー樹脂を含有してもよい。その他のバインダー樹脂としては、上記ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の構造からヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を除いた構造を有するアクリル系樹脂、それ以外の構成単位や側鎖を含むアクリル系樹脂、スチレン-アクリル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂などのエチレン性不飽和結合含有単量体を重合させて得られる感光性又は非感光性の重合体を用いることができる。さらに、カラーフィルタの着色層を形成するためにバインダー樹脂として従来用いられている重合体、例えば、エポキシ系樹脂、ウレタン系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、ノボラック系樹脂などの感光性又は非感光性の樹脂を、その他のバインダー樹脂として用いてもよい。
<Other binder resins>
The photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention may contain other binder resins in combination with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Other binder resins include acrylic resins having a structure obtained by removing the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate units from the structure of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer, and acrylics containing other structural units and side chains. A photosensitive or non-photosensitive polymer obtained by polymerizing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing monomer such as a based resin, a styrene-acrylic resin, or a polyolefin-based resin can be used. Further, a polymer conventionally used as a binder resin for forming a colored layer of a color filter, for example, photosensitive or non-photosensitive such as an epoxy resin, a urethane resin, a polyester resin, a polyimide resin, and a novolak resin. The photosensitive resin may be used as another binder resin.
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において、バインダー樹脂の含有量は、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対し、通常4質量%以上25質量%以下であり、5質量%以上22質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以上20質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 また、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において、バインダー樹脂の総量100質量部に対するヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体の含有量は、通常50質量部以上95質量部以下であり、60質量部以上92質量部以下であることが好ましく、65質量部以上90質量部以下であることがより好ましい。
In the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention, the content of the binder resin is usually 4% by mass or more and 25% by mass or less, and 5% by mass or more and 22% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition. It is preferably 5% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
Further, in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the content of the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the binder resin is usually 50 parts by mass or more and 95 parts by mass or less, 60. It is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 92 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 65 parts by mass or more and 90 parts by mass or less.
[モノマー(光重合性化合物)]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物に用いられる光重合性化合物であるモノマーは、光開始剤によって重合可能なものであればよく、特に限定はされないが、重合可能な二重結合を2つ以上有する多官能モノマーを含有することが好ましい。多官能モノマーとしては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を2つ以上有する多官能モノマーが好ましく、特に、アクリロイル基又はメタクリロイル基を2つ以上有する多官能(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。
 多官能(メタ)アクリレートとしては、従来公知のものの中から適宜選択して用いればよい。具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-029832号公報に記載のもの等が挙げられる。
 また、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物に優れた光硬化性(高感度)が要求される場合には、多官能モノマーとしては、重合可能な二重結合を3つ(三官能)以上有するものであるものが好ましく、例えば、3価以上の多価アルコールのポリ(メタ)アクリレート類やそれらのジカルボン酸変性物を好ましく用いることができる。具体的には、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートのコハク酸変性物、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートのコハク酸変性物、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、トリ(2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル)ホスフェート等が好ましい。
 トリ(2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル)ホスフェートのようなリン原子含有多官能(メタ)アクリレートを用いると、レーキ色材の退色が抑制されやすく、ポストベーク後の輝度を向上させやすい点から好ましい。
 これらの多官能(メタ)アクリレートは、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
[Monomer (photopolymerizable compound)]
The monomer, which is a photopolymerizable compound used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, may be any as long as it can be polymerized by a photoinitiator, and is not particularly limited, but has two or more polymerizable double bonds. It is preferable to contain the polyfunctional monomer having. As the polyfunctional monomer, a polyfunctional monomer having two or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds is preferable, and a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having two or more acryloyl groups or methacryloyl groups is particularly preferable.
As the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate, a conventionally known one may be appropriately selected and used. Specific examples include those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-029832.
Further, when the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is required to have excellent photocurability (high sensitivity), the polyfunctional monomer has three or more polymerizable double bonds (trifunctional). Those are preferable, and for example, poly (meth) acrylates of trivalent or higher-valent polyvalent alcohols and dicarboxylic acid-modified products thereof can be preferably used. Specifically, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate succinic acid-modified product, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth). Acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, succinic acid-modified product of dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, tri (2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate and the like are preferable.
It is preferable to use a phosphorus atom-containing polyfunctional (meth) acrylate such as tri (2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate because the fading of the rake coloring material is easily suppressed and the brightness after post-baking is easily improved. ..
These polyfunctional (meth) acrylates may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物においては、感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜の粘度が適度になりやすく、得られる着色層の平坦性を向上する点から、モノマーの総量100質量部に対する多官能モノマーの含有量が、90質量部以上であることが好ましく、95質量部以上であることがより好ましく、100質量部であることが特に好ましい。 In the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention, the viscosity of the coating film of the photosensitive coloring resin composition tends to be appropriate, and the flatness of the obtained colored layer is improved. The content of the functional monomer is preferably 90 parts by mass or more, more preferably 95 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 100 parts by mass.
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において、モノマーの含有量は、特に制限はないが、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対し、5質量%以上60質量%以下であることが好ましく、10質量%以上50質量%以下であることがより好ましい。モノマーの含有量が上記下限値以上であると、光硬化反応が進行しやすいことにより、露光部分が現像時の溶出を抑制でき、また、モノマーの含有量が上記上限値以下であると、アルカリ現像性を向上することができる。 In the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention, the content of the monomer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring resin composition. It is more preferably 10% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less. When the content of the monomer is at least the above lower limit value, the photocuring reaction is likely to proceed, so that the exposed portion can suppress elution during development, and when the content of the monomer is at least the above upper limit value, it is alkaline. Developability can be improved.
 [光開始剤]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物に用いられる光開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、従来知られている各種開始剤の中から、1種又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
 光開始剤としては、例えば、ベンゾフェノン、N,N-ジメチルアミノベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ビスジエチルアミノベンゾフェノン(例えば、ハイキュアABP、川口薬品製)、4-メトキシ-4’-ジメチルアミノベンゾフェノン等の芳香族ケトン類;ベンゾインメチルエーテル等のベンゾインエーテル類;エチルベンゾイン等のベンゾイン類;2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-フェニルイミダゾール2量体等のビイミダゾール類;2-トリクロロメチル-5-(p-メトキシスチリル)-1,3,4-オキサジアゾール等のハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物;2-(4-ブトキシ-ナフト-1-イル)-4,6-ビス-トリクロロメチル-S-トリアジン等のハロメチル-S-トリアジン類;1,2-オクタジオン-1-[4-(フェニルチオ)-,2-(o-ベンゾイルオキシム)]、エタノン,1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(o-アセチルオキシム)、特開2000-80068号公報、特開2001-233842号公報、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2010-527338号公報、特開2013-041153号公報等に記載のオキシムエステル系光開始剤等のオキシムエステル類;2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(例えばイルガキュア907、BASF社製)、2-ベンジル-2-(ジメチルアミノ)-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)-1-ブタノン(例えばイルガキュア369、BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(イルガキュア379EG、BASF社製)等のα-アミノケトン類;ジエチルチオキサントン等のチオキサントン類を挙げることができる。
 中でも、本発明に用いられる光開始剤は、感度に優れる点から、オキシムエステル類及びα-アミノケトン類からなら選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、パターン形成の際の線幅調整と現像耐性の観点からはα-アミノケトン類が好ましい。3級アミン構造を有するα-アミノケトン類は、分子内に酸素クエンチャーである3級アミン構造を有するため、開始剤から発生したラジカルが酸素により失活し難く、感度を向上させることができることから好ましい。
 また、光開始剤として、オキシムエステル類に、α-アミノケトン類を組み合わせて用いることは、水染みを抑制し、また、感度向上の点からも好ましい。なお、水染みとは、アルカリ現像性を高くする成分を用いると、アルカリ現像後、純水でリンスした後に、水が染みたような跡が発生することをいう。このような水染みは、ポストベーク後に消えるので製品としては問題がないが、現像後にパターニング面の外観検査において、ムラ異常として検出されてしまい、正常品と異常品の区別がつかないという問題が生じる。そのため、外観検査において検査装置の検査感度を下げると、結果として最終的なカラーフィルタ製品の歩留まり低下を引き起こし、問題となる。
 また、光開始剤として、オキシムエステル類及びα-アミノケトン類からなら選ばれる少なくとも1種に、チオキサントン類を組み合わせることは、感度を調整し、水染みを抑制し、現像耐性が向上する点から好ましい。
[Light initiator]
The photoinitiator used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and one or a combination of two or more of various conventionally known initiators can be used.
Examples of the photoinitiator include benzophenone, N, N-dimethylaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-bisdiethylaminobenzophenone (for example, Hycure ABP, manufactured by Kawaguchi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.), 4-methoxy-4'-dimethylaminobenzophenone and the like. Group Ketones; Benzoin Ethers such as Benzoin Methyl Ether; Benzoins such as Ethylbenzoin; Biimidazoles such as 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-phenylimidazole dimer; 2-Trichloromethyl-5- Halomethyl oxadiazole compounds such as (p-methoxystyryl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole; 2- (4-butoxy-naphtho-1-yl) -4,6-bis-trichloromethyl-S- Halomethyl-S-triazines such as triazine; 1,2-octadion-1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (o-benzoyloxime)], etanone, 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-) Methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl]-, 1- (o-acetyloxime), JP-A-2000-80068, JP-A-2001-233842, JP-A-2010-527339, JP-A-2010 Oxime esters such as oxime ester-based photoinitiators described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 527338, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-041153; 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropane-1-one. (For example, Irgacure 907, manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl-2- (dimethylamino) -1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -1-butanone (for example, Irgacure 369, manufactured by BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) Α-Aminoketones such as -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (Irgacure 379EG, manufactured by BASF); thioxanthones such as diethylthioxanthone Can be mentioned.
Among them, the photoinitiator used in the present invention preferably contains at least one selected from oxime esters and α-aminoketones from the viewpoint of excellent sensitivity, and line width adjustment and development resistance during pattern formation are preferable. From the viewpoint of, α-aminoketones are preferable. Since α-aminoketones having a tertiary amine structure have a tertiary amine structure which is an oxygen quencher in the molecule, radicals generated from the initiator are not easily deactivated by oxygen, and the sensitivity can be improved. preferable.
Further, it is preferable to use a combination of α-aminoketones and oxime esters as the photoinitiator from the viewpoint of suppressing water stains and improving sensitivity. In addition, water stain means that when a component that enhances alkaline developability is used, traces of water stain are generated after alkaline development and rinsing with pure water. Such water stains disappear after post-baking, so there is no problem as a product, but there is a problem that it is detected as unevenness abnormality in the visual inspection of the patterning surface after development, and it is not possible to distinguish between normal products and abnormal products. Occurs. Therefore, if the inspection sensitivity of the inspection device is lowered in the visual inspection, the yield of the final color filter product is lowered as a result, which becomes a problem.
Further, it is preferable to combine thioxanthones with at least one selected from oxime esters and α-aminoketones as the photoinitiator from the viewpoint of adjusting the sensitivity, suppressing water stains, and improving the development resistance. ..
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物において用いられる光開始剤の合計含有量は、本発明の効果が損なわれない限り特に制限はないが、感光性着色樹脂組成物の固形分全量に対して、好ましくは0.1質量%以上12.0質量%以下、より好ましくは1.0質量%以上8.0質量%以下の範囲内である。この含有量が上記下限値以上であると十分に光硬化が進み露光部分が現像時に溶出することを抑制し、一方上記上限値以下であると、得られる着色層の黄変を抑制することで輝度が低下することを抑制できる。 The total content of the photoinitiator used in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired, but the total content of the solid content of the photosensitive colored resin composition is not particularly limited. It is preferably in the range of 0.1% by mass or more and 12.0% by mass or less, and more preferably 1.0% by mass or more and 8.0% by mass or less. When this content is at least the above lower limit value, photocuring is sufficiently promoted and the exposed portion is suppressed from elution during development, while when it is at least the above upper limit value, yellowing of the obtained colored layer is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in brightness.
 [酸化防止剤]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、更に酸化防止剤を含有することが、耐熱性が向上し、色材の退色が抑制され、輝度が向上する点から好ましい。本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、酸化防止剤を含むことにより、硬化膜に微小孔を形成する際に硬化性を損なうことなく微小孔内の過度なラジカル連鎖反応を制御できるため、所望の形状の微小孔をより容易に形成することができる。また、酸化防止剤は、オキシムエステル系光開始剤と組み合わせて用いられることが、上述した効果が得られやすい点から好ましい。
 本発明に用いられる酸化防止剤としては、特に限定されず、従来公知のものの中から適宜選択すればよい。酸化防止剤の具体例としては、例えば、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤、アミン系酸化防止剤、リン系酸化防止剤、硫黄系酸化防止剤、ヒドラジン系酸化防止剤等が挙げられ、耐熱性の点及び微小孔の形状を良好にする点から、ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤を用いることが好ましい。国際公開第2014/021023号に記載されているような潜在性酸化防止剤であっても良い。
[Antioxidant]
It is preferable that the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention further contains an antioxidant because the heat resistance is improved, the fading of the coloring material is suppressed, and the brightness is improved. Since the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention contains an antioxidant, it is possible to control an excessive radical chain reaction in the micropores without impairing the curability when forming the micropores in the cured film, which is desired. It is possible to more easily form micropores in the shape of. Further, it is preferable that the antioxidant is used in combination with the oxime ester-based photoinitiator from the viewpoint that the above-mentioned effects can be easily obtained.
The antioxidant used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected from conventionally known ones. Specific examples of the antioxidant include hindered phenol-based antioxidants, amine-based antioxidants, phosphorus-based antioxidants, sulfur-based antioxidants, hydrazine-based antioxidants, and the like, and have heat resistance. It is preferable to use a hindered phenolic antioxidant from the viewpoint of improving the shape of the dots and the micropores. It may be a latent antioxidant as described in WO 2014/021023.
 ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤としては、例えば、ペンタエリトリトールテトラキス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート](商品名:IRGANOX1010、BASF社製)、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)イソシアヌレート(商品名:イルガノックス3114、BASF製)、2,4,6-トリス(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチルベンジル)メシチレン(商品名:イルガノックス1330、BASF製)、2,2’-メチレンビス(6-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール)(商品名:スミライザーMDP-S、住友化学製)、6,6’-チオビス(2-tert-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール)(商品名:イルガノックス1081、BASF製)、3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジルホスホン酸ジエチル(商品名:イルガモド195、BASF製)等が挙げられる。
 中でも、耐熱性及び耐光性の点から、ペンタエリトリトールテトラキス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート](商品名:IRGANOX1010、BASF社製)が好ましい。
Examples of the hindered phenol-based antioxidant include pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: IRGANOX1010, manufactured by BASF), 1,3. , 5-Tris (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) isocyanurate (trade name: Irganox 3114, manufactured by BASF), 2,4,6-Tris (4-hydroxy-3,5-) Di-tert-butylbenzyl) mecitylene (trade name: Irganox 1330, manufactured by BASF), 2,2'-methylenebis (6-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol) (trade name: Sumilyzer MDP-S, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical) ), 6,6'-thiobis (2-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol) (trade name: Irganox 1081, manufactured by BASF), diethyl 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzylphosphonate (trade name: Irganox 1081, manufactured by BASF). Product name: Irgamod 195, manufactured by BASF) and the like.
Among them, pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] (trade name: IRGANOX1010, manufactured by BASF) is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance and light resistance.
 酸化防止剤の含有量としては、感光性着色樹脂組成物中の固形分全量に対して、酸化防止剤が0.1質量%以上10.0質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.5質量%以上5.0質量%以下であることがより好ましい。上記下限値以上であれば、耐熱性及び耐光性に優れている。一方、上記上限値以下であれば、感光性樹脂組成物を高感度にすることができる。 The content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 10.0% by mass or less, preferably 0.5% by mass, based on the total amount of solids in the photosensitive colored resin composition. More preferably, it is% or more and 5.0% by mass or less. If it is at least the above lower limit value, it is excellent in heat resistance and light resistance. On the other hand, if it is not more than the above upper limit value, the photosensitive resin composition can be made highly sensitive.
 酸化防止剤を前記オキシムエステル系光開始剤と組み合わせて用いる場合、酸化防止剤の含有量としては、前記オキシムエステル系光開始剤の合計量100質量部に対して、酸化防止剤が1質量部以上250質量部以下であることが好ましく、3質量部以上80質量部以下であることがより好ましく、5質量部以上65質量部以下であることがより更に好ましい。上記範囲内であれば、上記組み合わせの効果に優れている。 When the antioxidant is used in combination with the oxime ester-based photoinitiator, the content of the antioxidant is 1 part by mass of the antioxidant with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the oxime ester-based photoinitiator. It is preferably 250 parts by mass or less, more preferably 3 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 65 parts by mass or less. If it is within the above range, the effect of the above combination is excellent.
[任意添加成分]
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物には、必要に応じて各種添加剤を含むものであってもよい。添加剤としては、例えば、メルカプト化合物、重合停止剤、連鎖移動剤、レベリング剤、可塑剤、界面活性剤、消泡剤、シランカップリング剤、紫外線吸収剤、密着促進剤等が挙げられる。
 界面活性剤及び可塑剤の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-029832号公報に記載のものが挙げられる。
[Optional additive ingredients]
The photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention may contain various additives, if necessary. Examples of the additive include a mercapto compound, a polymerization inhibitor, a chain transfer agent, a leveling agent, a plasticizer, a surfactant, a defoaming agent, a silane coupling agent, an ultraviolet absorber, an adhesion accelerator and the like.
Specific examples of the surfactant and the plasticizer include those described in JP2013-029832A.
[溶剤]
 本発明に用いられる溶剤としては、感光性着色樹脂組成物の各成分とは反応せず、これらを溶解もしくは分散可能な有機溶剤であればよく、特に限定されない。溶剤は、1種単独で、又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
 溶剤の具体例としては、例えば、メチルアルコール、エチルアルコール、N-プロピルアルコール、i-プロピルアルコール、メトキシアルコール、エトキシアルコールなどのアルコール系溶剤;メトキシエトキシエタノール、エトキシエトキシエタノールなどのカルビトール系溶剤;酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、乳酸エチル、ヒドロキシプロピオン酸メチル、ヒドロキシプロピオン酸エチル、n-ブチルアセテート、イソブチルアセテート、酪酸イソブチル、酪酸n-ブチル、乳酸エチル、シクロヘキサノールアセテートなどのエステル系溶剤;アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノンなどのケトン系溶剤;メトキシエチルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、エトキシエチルアセテートなどのグリコールエーテルアセテート系溶剤;メトキシエトキシエチルアセテート、エトキシエトキシエチルアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート(BCA)、カルビトールアセテートなどのカルビトールアセテート系溶剤;プロピレングリコールジアセテート、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート等のジアセテート類;エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテルなどのグリコールエーテル系溶剤;N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドンなどの非プロトン性アミド溶剤;γ-ブチロラクトンなどのラクトン系溶剤;テトラヒドロフランなどの環状エーテル系溶剤;ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、ナフタレンなどの不飽和炭化水素系溶剤;N-ヘプタン、N-ヘキサン、N-オクタンなどの飽和炭化水素系溶剤;トルエン、キシレン等の芳香族炭化水素類などの有機溶剤が挙げられる。これらの溶剤の中ではグリコールエーテルアセテート系溶剤、カルビトールアセテート系溶剤、グリコールエーテル系溶剤、エステル系溶剤が他の成分の溶解性の点で好適に用いられる。
 中でも、本発明に用いる溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ブチルカルビトールアセテート(BCA)、カルビトールアセテート、3-メトキシ-3-メチル-1-ブチルアセテート、エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、乳酸エチル、及び、3-メトキシブチルアセテートよりなる群から選択される1種以上であることが、他の成分の溶解性や塗布適性の点から好ましい。
[solvent]
The solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic solvent that does not react with each component of the photosensitive coloring resin composition and can dissolve or disperse them. The solvent can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Specific examples of the solvent include alcohol-based solvents such as methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, N-propyl alcohol, i-propyl alcohol, methoxy alcohol and ethoxy alcohol; carbitol solvents such as methoxyethoxyethanol and ethoxyethoxyethanol; Ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl methoxypropionate, ethyl methoxypropionate, ethyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, methyl hydroxypropionate, ethyl hydroxypropionate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, isobutyl butyrate, n-butyl butyrate, Ester solvents such as ethyl lactate and cyclohexanol acetate; Ketone solvents such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone and 2-heptanone; methoxyethyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1 -Glycol ether acetate solvents such as butyl acetate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate and ethoxyethyl acetate; carbitol acetate solvents such as methoxyethoxyethyl acetate, ethoxyethoxyethyl acetate, butyl carbitol acetate (BCA) and carbitol acetate; Diacetates such as propylene glycol diacetate and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate; ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether , Glycol ether solvent such as dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether; aprotonic amide solvent such as N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone; lactone solvent such as γ-butyrolactone; Cyclic ether solvent; unsaturated hydrocarbon solvent such as benzene, toluene, xylene, naphthalene; saturated hydrocarbon solvent such as N-heptane, N-hexane, N-octane; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene Organic solvents such as. Among these solvents, glycol ether acetate-based solvents, carbitol acetate-based solvents, glycol ether-based solvents, and ester-based solvents are preferably used in terms of the solubility of other components.
Among them, the solvent used in the present invention includes propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, butyl carbitol acetate (BCA), carbitol acetate, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate, and ethyl ethoxypropionate. , Ethyl lactate, and 3-methoxybutyl acetate are preferably one or more selected from the group, from the viewpoint of solubility of other components and suitability for application.
 溶剤の含有量は、特に限定はされないが、感光性着色樹脂組成物の全量に対して、75質量%以上95質量%以下であることが好ましく、80質量%以上90質量%以下であることがより好ましい。感光性着色樹脂組成物における溶剤の含有量が上記下限値以上であることにより、他の成分の溶解性及び塗布適性を向上することができ、一方、上記上限値以下であることにより、カラーフィルタ形成時に使用する感光性着色樹脂組成物の使用量を少なくすることができる。 The content of the solvent is not particularly limited, but is preferably 75% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and preferably 80% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, based on the total amount of the photosensitive colored resin composition. More preferred. When the content of the solvent in the photosensitive colored resin composition is not less than the above lower limit value, the solubility and coating suitability of other components can be improved, while when it is not more than the above upper limit value, the color filter can be improved. The amount of the photosensitive colored resin composition used at the time of formation can be reduced.
II.カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の製造方法
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の製造方法は特に限定されず、例えば、上述した色材、バインダー樹脂、モノマー、光開始剤等の各成分を溶剤に混合し、溶解又は分散させることにより感光性着色樹脂組成物を製造してもよいが、分散剤を用いて色材を溶剤中に分散させた色材分散液、又は色材を溶剤中に溶解させた色材溶液を予め調製し、当該色材分散液又は色材溶液、及び、バインダー樹脂、モノマー、光開始剤等の色材以外の感光性着色樹脂組成物の成分を、公知の分散手段を用いて溶剤に混合し、溶解又は分散させることにより感光性着色樹脂組成物を製造することが好ましい。
 また、2種類以上の色材を用いる場合には、各色の色材ごとに色材分散液又は色材溶液を準備した後、各々の色材分散液又は色材溶液、及び、バインダー樹脂、光開始剤等の色材以外の感光性着色樹脂組成物の成分を溶剤に混合し、溶解又は分散させることにより感光性着色樹脂組成物を製造してもよい。
 色材分散液及び色材溶液は、着色樹脂組成物を調製するための予備調製物として用いられる。すなわち、色材分散液及び色材溶液は、着色樹脂組成物を調製する前段階において予備調製され、P/V比、すなわち(組成物中の色材成分質量)/(組成物中の色材成分以外の固形分質量)の比が高い。具体的には、色材分散液及び色材溶液のP/V比は通常1.0以上である。
II. Method for Producing Photosensitive Colored Resin Composition for Color Filter The method for producing the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, each component such as the above-mentioned coloring material, binder resin, monomer, and light initiator can be used. A photosensitive colored resin composition may be produced by mixing with a solvent and dissolving or dispersing it, but a coloring material dispersion liquid in which the coloring material is dispersed in the solvent using a dispersant, or a coloring material in the solvent. A color material solution dissolved in is prepared in advance, and the components of the color material dispersion or the color material solution and the components of the photosensitive coloring resin composition other than the color material such as the binder resin, the monomer, and the photoinitiator are known. It is preferable to produce a photosensitive colored resin composition by mixing it with a solvent using a dispersing means and dissolving or dispersing it.
When two or more kinds of coloring materials are used, after preparing a coloring material dispersion or a coloring material solution for each coloring material, each coloring material dispersion or a coloring material solution, a binder resin, and light are used. A photosensitive coloring resin composition may be produced by mixing components of a photosensitive coloring resin composition other than a coloring material such as an initiator with a solvent and dissolving or dispersing them.
The colorant dispersion and the colorant solution are used as preparatory preparations for preparing the colored resin composition. That is, the coloring material dispersion liquid and the coloring material solution are pre-prepared in the stage before preparing the coloring resin composition, and the P / V ratio, that is, (mass of the coloring material component in the composition) / (coloring material in the composition). The ratio of solid content (mass other than components) is high. Specifically, the P / V ratio of the color material dispersion liquid and the color material solution is usually 1.0 or more.
 色材分散液を用いて製造された本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、分散剤を含有する。レーキ色材又は顔料を含有する本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、レーキ色材又は顔料を分散した色材分散液を用いて製造されることが好ましいため、分散剤を含有することが好ましい。
 以下、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の製造に用いる色材分散液について詳細に説明する。
 本発明に用いる色材分散液は、溶剤と、分散剤と、当該分散剤により当該溶剤中に分散した上記色材とを含み、必要に応じて分散補助剤等のその他の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。
The photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention produced by using the colorant dispersion liquid contains a dispersant. Since the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention containing a rake coloring material or a pigment is preferably produced using a coloring material dispersion liquid in which a rake coloring material or a pigment is dispersed, it is preferable to contain a dispersant. ..
Hereinafter, the color material dispersion liquid used for producing the photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
The color material dispersion liquid used in the present invention contains a solvent, a dispersant, and the above-mentioned color material dispersed in the solvent by the dispersant, and further contains other components such as a dispersion aid, if necessary. You may.
[分散剤]
 分散剤としては、従来、分散剤として用いられているものの中から適宜選択して用いることができる。分散剤としては、例えば、カチオン系、アニオン系、ノニオン系、両性、シリコーン系、フッ素系等の界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤の中でも、均一に、微細に分散し得る点から、高分子界面活性剤(高分子分散剤)が好ましい。
 高分子分散剤としては、例えば、ポリアクリル酸エステル等の不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体類;ポリアクリル酸等の不飽和カルボン酸の(共)重合体の(部分)アミン塩、(部分)アンモニウム塩や(部分)アルキルアミン塩類;水酸基含有ポリアクリル酸エステル等の水酸基含有不飽和カルボン酸エステルの(共)重合体やそれらの変性物;ポリウレタン類;不飽和ポリアミド類;ポリシロキサン類;長鎖ポリアミノアミドリン酸塩類;ポリエチレンイミン誘導体(ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)と遊離カルボキシ基含有ポリエステルとの反応により得られるアミドやそれらの塩基);ポリアリルアミン誘導体(ポリアリルアミンと、遊離のカルボキシ基を有するポリエステル、ポリアミド又はエステルとアミドの共縮合物(ポリエステルアミド)の3種の化合物の中から選ばれる1種以上の化合物とを反応させて得られる反応生成物)等が挙げられる。
[Dispersant]
As the dispersant, those conventionally used as a dispersant can be appropriately selected and used. As the dispersant, for example, a cationic, anionic, nonionic, amphoteric, silicone-based, or fluorine-based surfactant can be used. Among the surfactants, a polymer surfactant (polymer dispersant) is preferable because it can be dispersed uniformly and finely.
Examples of the polymer dispersant include (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as polyacrylic acid esters; (partial) amine salts of (co) polymers of unsaturated carboxylic acids such as polyacrylic acid. (Partial) ammonium salts and (partial) alkylamine salts; (co) polymers of hydroxyl group-containing unsaturated carboxylic acid esters such as hydroxyl group-containing polyacrylic acid esters and their modifications; polyurethanes; unsaturated polyamides; polysiloxane Classes; long-chain polyaminoamide phosphates; polyethylene imine derivatives (amides obtained by the reaction of poly (lower alkylene imine) with free carboxy group-containing polyesters and their bases); polyallylamine derivatives (polyallylamine and free carboxy). Examples thereof include a reaction product obtained by reacting one or more compounds selected from three kinds of compounds of a polyester having a group, a polyamide, or a cocondensate of an ester and an amide (polyester amide)).
 分散剤は、色材の種類に応じて分散性が良好となるものを適宜選択して用いることができ、特に限定はされないが、上記一般式(1)又は(2)で表されるレーキ色材、或いは上記一般式(5)で表されるキサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材を分散させる場合、及び、これらのレーキ色材とキサンテン系染料等の染料又はC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6等の顔料とを共分散させる場合は、分散剤としては、酸性の高分子分散剤である酸性分散剤を用いることが好ましい。なお、本発明において、染料は、溶剤中に溶解させて用いてもよい。
 顔料を分散させる場合は、顔料の種類に応じて、酸性又は塩基性の高分子分散剤及びウレタン系分散剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を用いることが好ましく、酸性又は塩基性の高分子分散剤を用いることがより好ましい。塩基性処理された顔料を分散させる場合は、酸性の高分子分散剤である酸性分散剤を用いることが好ましく、酸性処理された顔料を分散させる場合は、塩基性の高分子分散剤である塩基性分散剤を用いることが好ましい。
 レーキ色材の分散に用いる酸性分散剤としては、例えば、後述する一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体、及び後述するカルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体から選ばれる少なくとも1種を好適に用いることができる。顔料の分散に用いる酸性分散剤としては、例えば、カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体を好適に用いることができる。
 塩基性分散剤としては、例えば、3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体、及び、3級アミンを有する繰り返し単位を含む重合体中のアミノ基のうちの少なくとも一部と有機酸化合物とが塩を形成した塩型重合体よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を好適に用いることができる。
 ウレタン系分散剤は、1分子内に1個以上のウレタン結合(-NH-COO-)を有する化合物である。ウレタン系分散剤としては、例えば、1分子中にイソシアネート基を2個以上有するポリイソシアネート類と、片末端又は両末端に水酸基を有するポリエステル類との反応生成物を好適に用いることができる。
As the dispersant, one having good dispersibility can be appropriately selected and used depending on the type of coloring material, and the dispersant is not particularly limited, but is a rake color represented by the above general formula (1) or (2). When the material or the metal lake color material of the xanthene dye represented by the above general formula (5) is dispersed, and these lake color materials and the dye such as the xanthene dye or C.I. I. When co-dispersing with a pigment such as Pigment Blue 15: 6, it is preferable to use an acidic dispersant, which is an acidic polymer dispersant, as the dispersant. In the present invention, the dye may be used by dissolving it in a solvent.
When dispersing the pigment, it is preferable to use at least one selected from the group consisting of an acidic or basic polymer dispersant and a urethane-based dispersant, depending on the type of the pigment, and it is preferable to use an acidic or basic polymer. It is more preferable to use a dispersant. When dispersing a basic-treated pigment, it is preferable to use an acidic dispersant which is an acidic polymer dispersant, and when dispersing an acid-treated pigment, a base which is a basic polymer dispersant is used. It is preferable to use a sex dispersant.
As the acidic dispersant used for the dispersion of the rake colorant, for example, at least one selected from a polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) described later and a carboxy group-containing block copolymer described later will be used. It can be suitably used. As the acidic dispersant used for dispersing the pigment, for example, a carboxy group-containing block copolymer can be preferably used.
Examples of the basic dispersant include a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and at least a part of amino groups in a polymer containing a repeating unit having a tertiary amine and an organic acid compound. At least one selected from the group consisting of salt-type polymers forming a salt can be preferably used.
The urethane-based dispersant is a compound having one or more urethane bonds (-NH-COO-) in one molecule. As the urethane-based dispersant, for example, a reaction product of polyisocyanates having two or more isocyanate groups in one molecule and polyesters having hydroxyl groups at one end or both ends can be preferably used.
<一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体>
 下記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体は、レーキ色材の分散剤として好ましく用いることができ、特に、上記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材の分散剤として好ましく用いることができる。酸性分散剤として、下記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体を用いると、レーキ色材の分散性と耐熱性を向上し、加熱後のレーキ色材の色度変化を抑制可能である。また、色材として、レーキ色材と顔料を併用する場合は、下記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体を分散剤として用いることにより、顔料の分散性及び保存安定性を向上し、基板密着性と塗膜均一性が向上した着色層を形成可能である。
 下記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体は、エチレン性不飽和モノマー重合体であるため、ポリエーテル系やポリエステル系重合体と比較して骨格の耐熱性が高く、且つ、当該重合体中に複数存在する酸性リン化合物基(-P(=O)(-R12)(OH))及びその塩(-P(=O)(-R12)(O))が、微粒子化された色材の表面に対する吸着力が強いものと推定される。また、色材表面が酸性リン化合物基及びその塩の少なくとも一種で被覆された状態になると、パーオキシラジカルなどの活性酸素によるレーキ色材の色素骨格への攻撃(水素引き抜きや置換反応など)が抑制され、レーキ色材の劣化(酸化劣化)が抑制されると推定される。
<Polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I)>
The polymer having the structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) can be preferably used as a dispersant for the rake coloring material, and in particular, the rake represented by the above general formula (1) or general formula (2). It can be preferably used as a dispersant for coloring materials. When a polymer having a structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) is used as the acidic dispersant, the dispersibility and heat resistance of the rake color material are improved, and the change in chromaticity of the rake color material after heating is suppressed. It is possible. When a lake coloring material and a pigment are used in combination as a coloring material, a polymer having a structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) is used as a dispersant to improve the dispersibility and storage stability of the pigment. It is possible to form a colored layer with improved substrate adhesion and improved coating film uniformity.
Since the polymer having the structural unit represented by the following general formula (I) is an ethylenically unsaturated monomer polymer, the heat resistance of the skeleton is higher than that of the polyether-based or polyester-based polymer, and the polymer has higher heat resistance. Multiple acidic phosphorus compound groups (-P (= O) (-R 12 ) (OH)) and salts thereof (-P (= O) (-R 12 ) (O - X + )) present in the polymer. However, it is presumed that the finely divided coloring material has a strong adsorption force on the surface. In addition, when the surface of the coloring material is coated with at least one of an acidic phosphorus compound group and a salt thereof, active oxygen such as peroxy radicals attacks the pigment skeleton of the rake coloring material (hydrogen extraction, substitution reaction, etc.). It is presumed that the deterioration of the rake color material (oxidative deterioration) is suppressed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(一般式(I)中、L11は、直接結合又は2価の連結基、R11は、水素原子又はメチル基、R12は、水酸基、炭化水素基、-[CH(R13)-CH(R14)-O]x1-R15、-[(CHy1-O]z1-R15、又は-O-R16で示される1価の基であり、R16は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R13)-CH(R14)-O]x1-R15、-[(CHy1-O]z1-R15、-C(R17)(R18)-C(R19)(R20)-OH、又は、-CH-C(R21)(R22)-CH-OHで示される1価の基である。
 R13及びR14は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であり、R15は、水素原子、炭化水素基、-CHO、-CHCHO、-CO-CH=CH、-CO-C(CH)=CH又は-CHCOOR23で示される1価の基であり、R23は水素原子又は炭素数が1個以上5個以下のアルキル基である。R17、R18、R19、R20、R21及びR22は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭化水素基、又は、エーテル結合及びエステル結合から選択される1種以上を有する炭化水素基であり、R17及びR19は、互いに結合して環構造を形成してもよい。上記環状構造を形成した場合、当該環状構造が更に置換基R24を有していてもよく、R24は、炭化水素基、又は、エーテル結合及びエステル結合から選択される1種以上を有する炭化水素基である。前記炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。Xは、水素原子又は有機カチオンを表す。x1は1以上18以下の整数、y1は1以上5以下の整数、z1は1以上18以下の整数を示す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(In the general formula (I), L 11 is a direct bond or a divalent linking group, R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 12 is a hydroxyl group or a hydrocarbon group, and-[CH (R 13 ) -CH. (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O] z1 -R 15 or -OR 16 is a monovalent group, and R 16 is a hydrocarbon group. ,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O] z1 -R 15 , -C (R 17 ) (R 18 ) -C ( It is a monovalent group represented by R 19 ) (R 20 ) -OH or -CH 2 -C (R 21 ) (R 22 ) -CH 2 -OH.
R 13 and R 14 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 15 is a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, -CHO, -CH 2 CHO, -CO-CH = CH 2 , -CO-C ( CH 3 ) = CH 2 or -CH 2 COOR 23 is a monovalent group, and R 23 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms. R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 and R 22 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, or a hydrocarbon group having one or more selected from an ether bond and an ester bond. Yes, R 17 and R 19 may be coupled to each other to form a ring structure. When the cyclic structure is formed, the cyclic structure may further have a substituent R 24 , which is a hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon having one or more selected from an ether bond and an ester bond. It is a hydrogen group. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. X represents a hydrogen atom or an organic cation. x1 is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, y1 is an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, and z1 is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less. )
 一般式(I)において、L11は、直接結合又は2価の連結基である。ここでL11が直接結合とは、リン原子が、連結基を介することなく主鎖骨格の炭素原子に直接結合していることを意味する。
 L11における2価の連結基としては、主鎖骨格の炭素原子と、リン原子とを連結可能であれば、特に制限はない。L11における2価の連結基としては、例えば、直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキレン基、水酸基を有する、直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルキレン基、アリーレン基、-CONH-基、-COO-基、-NHCOO-基、エーテル基(-O-基)、チオエーテル基(-S-基)、及びこれらの組み合わせ等が挙げられる。なお、本発明において、2価の連結基の結合の向きは任意である。すなわち、2価の連結基に-CONH-が含まれる場合、-COが主鎖の炭素原子側で-NHが側鎖のリン原子側であっても良いし、反対に、-NHが主鎖の炭素原子側で-COが側鎖のリン原子側であっても良い。
In the general formula (I), L 11 is a direct coupling or a divalent linking group. Here, when L 11 is directly bonded, it means that the phosphorus atom is directly bonded to the carbon atom of the main chain skeleton without interposing a linking group.
The divalent linking group in L 11 is not particularly limited as long as the carbon atom of the main chain skeleton and the phosphorus atom can be linked. Examples of the divalent linking group in L 11 include a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having a hydroxyl group, an arylene group, a —CONH— group, and a —COO— group. -NHCOO- group, ether group (-O- group), thioether group (-S- group), combinations thereof and the like can be mentioned. In the present invention, the direction of bonding of the divalent linking group is arbitrary. That is, when -CONH- is contained in the divalent linking group, -CO may be on the carbon atom side of the main chain and -NH may be on the phosphorus atom side of the side chain, and conversely, -NH may be on the main chain. -CO may be on the phosphorus atom side of the side chain on the carbon atom side of.
 中でも、分散性の点から、一般式(I)におけるL11は、-CONH-基、又は、-COO-基を含む2価の連結基であることが好ましい。
 例えば、L11が-COO-基を含む2価の連結基である場合、L11が、-COO-L11’-基(ここで、L11’は、水酸基を有していても良い炭素数が1個以上8個以下のアルキレン基、-[CH(RL11)-CH(RL12)-O]-、又は-[(CH-O]-(CH-O-、-[CH(RL13)]-O-、であり、RL11、RL12及びRL13は、それぞれ独立に水素原子、メチル基、又は水酸基である。xは1以上18以下の整数、yは1以上5以下の整数、zは1以上18以下の整数、wは1以上18以下の整数を示す。)であることが好ましい。
Above all, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, L 11 in the general formula (I) is preferably a divalent linking group containing a —CONH— group or a —COO— group.
For example, if L 11 is a divalent linking group containing a -COO- group, then L 11 is a -COO-L 11' -group (where L 11'may have a hydroxyl group. An alkylene group having 1 or more and 8 or less,-[CH ( RL11) -CH (RL12 ) -O] x- , or-[(CH 2 ) y -O] z- (CH 2 ) y- O-,-[CH ( RL13 )] w -O-, and RL11, RL12 and RL13 are independently hydrogen atoms, methyl groups or hydroxyl groups. X is 1 or more and 18 or less. It is preferable that y is an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, z is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, and w is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less.
 L11’における炭素数が1個以上8個以下のアルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、又は環状のいずれであってもよく、例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、各種ブチレン基、各種ペンチレン基、各種へキシレン基、各種オクチレン基などであり、一部の水素が水酸基に置換されていても良い。
 xは1以上18以下の整数、好ましくは1以上4以下の整数、より好ましくは1以上2以下の整数であり、yは1以上5以下の整数、好ましくは1以上4以下の整数、より好ましくは2又は3である。zは1以上18以下の整数、好ましくは1以上4以下の整数、より好ましくは1以上2以下の整数である。wは1以上18以下の整数、好ましくは1以上4以下の整数である。
The alkylene group having 1 or more and 8 or less carbon atoms in L 11'may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and may be, for example, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a trimethylene group, a propylene group, or various types. It is a butylene group, various pentylene groups, various hexylene groups, various octylene groups, etc., and a part of hydrogen may be substituted with a hydroxyl group.
x is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less, more preferably an integer of 1 or more and 2 or less, and y is an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less, more preferably. Is 2 or 3. z is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less, and more preferably an integer of 1 or more and 2 or less. w is an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, preferably an integer of 1 or more and 4 or less.
 一般式(I)におけるL11の好適な具体例としては、例えば、-COO-CHCH(OH)CH-O-、-COO-CHCH-O-CHCH(OH)CH-O-、-COO-CHC(CHCH)(CHOH)CH-O-等が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Suitable specific examples of L 11 in the general formula (I) include, for example, -COO-CH 2 CH (OH) CH 2 -O-, -COO-CH 2 CH 2 -O-CH 2 CH (OH) CH. 2 -O-, -COO-CH 2 C (CH 2 CH 3 ) (CH 2 OH) CH 2 -O- and the like can be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
 R12における炭化水素基としては、例えば、炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、炭素数が2個以上18個以下のアルケニル基、アラルキル基、及びアリール基などが挙げられる。
 前記炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれであってもよく、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、ボルニル基、イソボルニル基、ジシクロペンタニル基、アダマンチル基、低級アルキル基置換アダマンチル基などを挙げることができる。
 前記炭素数が2個以上18個以下のアルケニル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれであってもよい。このようなアルケニル基としては、例えばビニル基、アリル基、プロペニル基などを挙げることができる。アルケニル基の二重結合の位置には限定はないが、得られたポリマーの反応性の点からは、アルケニル基の末端に二重結合があることが好ましい。
 アリール基としては、フェニル基、ビフェニル基、ナフチル基、トリル基、キシリル基等が挙げられ、更に置換基を有していてもよい。アリール基の炭素数は、6個以上24個以下が好ましく、更に6個以上12個以下が好ましい。
 また、アラルキル基としては、ベンジル基、フェネチル基、ナフチルメチル基、ビフェニルメチル基等が挙げられ、更に置換基を有していてもよい。アラルキル基の炭素数は、7個以上20個以下が好ましく、更に7個以上14個以下が好ましい。
 前記アルキル基やアルケニル基は置換基を有していても良く、当該置換基としては、F、Cl、Brなどのハロゲン原子、ニトロ基等が挙げられる。
 また、前記アリール基やアラルキル基等の芳香環の置換基としては、炭素数が1個以上4個以下の直鎖状、分岐状のアルキル基の他、アルケニル基、ニトロ基、ハロゲン原子などを挙げることができる。
 なお、前記好ましい炭素数には、置換基の炭素数は含まれない。
 前記R12において、x1は前記xと、y1は前記yと、z1は前記zと同様である。
 R15~R22における炭化水素基としては、例えば、前記R12における炭化水素基と同様のものが挙げられる。
Examples of the hydrocarbon group in R 12 include an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, and an aryl group.
The alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may be, for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group or n-butyl. Examples thereof include a group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a bornyl group, an isobornyl group, a dicyclopentanyl group, an adamantyl group, a lower alkyl group substituted adamantyl group and the like.
The alkenyl group having 2 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic. Examples of such an alkenyl group include a vinyl group, an allyl group, a propenyl group and the like. The position of the double bond of the alkenyl group is not limited, but from the viewpoint of the reactivity of the obtained polymer, it is preferable that the double bond is at the end of the alkenyl group.
Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group and the like, and may further have a substituent. The aryl group preferably has 6 or more and 24 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 or more and 12 or less carbon atoms.
Examples of the aralkyl group include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a biphenylmethyl group and the like, and may further have a substituent. The number of carbon atoms of the aralkyl group is preferably 7 or more and 20 or less, and more preferably 7 or more and 14 or less.
The alkyl group or alkenyl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include halogen atoms such as F, Cl and Br, a nitro group and the like.
Further, as the substituent of the aromatic ring such as the aryl group or the aralkyl group, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more and 4 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, a nitro group, a halogen atom and the like can be used. Can be mentioned.
The preferable carbon number does not include the carbon number of the substituent.
In the R 12 , x1 is the same as the x, y1 is the same as the y, and z1 is the same as the z.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group in R 15 to R 22 include the same group as the hydrocarbon group in R 12 .
 R17、R18、R19、R20、R21及びR22における、エーテル結合及びエステル結合から選択される1種以上を有する炭化水素基とは、-R’-O-R”、-R’-(C=O)-O-R”、又は-R’-O-(C=O)-R”(R’及びR”は、炭化水素基、又は、炭化水素基をエーテル結合及びエステル結合の少なくとも1つで結合した基)で表される基である。1つの基の中に、エーテル結合及びエステル結合を2つ以上有していてもよい。炭化水素基が1価の場合としては、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アラルキル基、アリール基が挙げられ、炭化水素基が2価の場合としては、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アリーレン基、及びこれらの組み合わせの基が挙げられる。 The hydrocarbon groups having one or more selected from the ether bond and the ester bond in R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 and R 22 are -R'-OR ", -R. "-(C = O) -OR" or -R'-O- (C = O) -R "(R'and R" is a hydrocarbon group or an ether bond and ester of a hydrocarbon group. A group represented by a group bonded by at least one of the bonds). One group may have two or more ether bonds and ester bonds. Examples of the monovalent hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, and an aryl group. When the hydrocarbon group is divalent, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an arylene group, and a combination thereof are used. The basis of is mentioned.
 R17とR19が結合して環構造を形成する場合、環構造を形成する炭素数は、5個以上8個以下であることが好ましく、6であること、即ち6員環であることがより好ましく、シクロヘキサン環を形成することが好ましい。
 置換基R24における、炭化水素基、又は、エーテル結合及びエステル結合から選択される1種以上を有する炭化水素基は、前記R17、R18、R19、R20、R21及びR22におけるものと同様のものとすることができる。
When R 17 and R 19 are bonded to form a ring structure, the number of carbon atoms forming the ring structure is preferably 5 or more and 8 or less, and is 6, that is, a 6-membered ring. More preferably, it is preferable to form a cyclohexane ring.
The hydrocarbon group in the substituent R 24 or the hydrocarbon group having one or more selected from the ether bond and the ester bond is described in R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 and R 22 . It can be similar to the one.
 分散される粒子の分散性及び分散安定性に優れる点から、前記R12が、水酸基、炭化水素基、-[CH(R13)-CH(R14)-O]x1-R15、-[(CHy1-O]z1-R15、又は-O-R16で示される1価の基であることが好ましく、水酸基、メチル基、エチル基、ビニル基、置換基を有していても良いアリール基又はアラルキル基、ビニル基、アリル基、-[CH(R13)-CH(R14)-O]x1-R15、-[(CHy1-O]z1-R15、又は-O-R16で示される1価の基、R13及びR14がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であり、R15が-CO-CH=CH又は-CO-C(CH)=CHであるものがより好ましく、中でも、R12が、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基、ビニル基、メチル基及び水酸基がより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability of the dispersed particles, the R 12 is a hydroxyl group, a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[ (CH 2 ) y1 -O] It is preferably a monovalent group represented by z1 -R 15 or -OR 16 , and has a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a vinyl group and a substituent. Also good aryl group or aralkyl group, vinyl group, allyl group,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 ,-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O] z1 -R 15 , Or, the monovalent group represented by -OR 16 and R 13 and R 14 are independently hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, and R 15 is -CO-CH = CH 2 or -CO-C (CH 3 ). = CH 2 is more preferable, and among them, an aryl group, a vinyl group, a methyl group and a hydroxyl group, in which R 12 may have a substituent, are more preferable.
 また、耐アルカリ性が向上する点から、R12は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R13)-CH(R14)-O]x1-R15、又は、-[(CHy1-O]z1-R15で示される1価の基であることが好ましい。リン原子に炭素原子が直接結合した構造を有する場合には、加水分解され難いため耐アルカリ性に優れた樹脂層を形成可能と推定される。中でも、R12は、メチル基、エチル基、置換基を有していても良いアリール基又はアラルキル基、ビニル基、アリル基、-[CH(R13)-CH(R14)-O]x1-R15、又は、-[(CHy1-O]z1-R15で示される1価の基、R13及びR14がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であり、R15が-CO-CH=CH又は-CO-C(CH)=CHであるものが耐アルカリ性に優れ、且つ、分散される粒子の分散性及び分散安定性に優れる点から好ましい。中でも、R12は、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基が分散性の点からより好ましい。 Further, from the viewpoint of improving alkali resistance, R 12 has a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 -R 15 or-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O. ] It is preferably a monovalent group represented by z1 - R15 . When it has a structure in which a carbon atom is directly bonded to a phosphorus atom, it is presumed that a resin layer having excellent alkali resistance can be formed because it is difficult to be hydrolyzed. Among them, R 12 has a methyl group, an ethyl group, an aryl group which may have a substituent or an aralkyl group, a vinyl group, an allyl group, and-[CH (R 13 ) -CH (R 14 ) -O] x1 . -R 15 or-[(CH 2 ) y1 -O] The monovalent groups represented by z1 -R 15 , R 13 and R 14 are independently hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, and R 15 is -CO. Those having -CH = CH 2 or -CO-C (CH 3 ) = CH 2 are preferable from the viewpoint of excellent alkali resistance and excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability of the dispersed particles. Among them, R 12 is more preferably an aryl group which may have a substituent from the viewpoint of dispersibility.
 また、一般式(I)において、Xは、水素原子又は有機カチオンを表す。有機カチオンとは、カチオン部分に炭素原子を含むものをいう。有機カチオンとしては、例えば、イミダゾリウムカチオン、ピリジニウムカチオン、アミニジウムカチオン、ピペリジニウムカチオン、ピロリジニウムカチオン、テトラアルキルアンモニウムカチオン及びトリアルキルアンモニウムカチオン等のアンモニウムカチオン、トリアルキルスルホニウムカチオン等のスルホニウムカチオン、テトラアルキルホスホニウムカチオン等のホスホニウムカチオン等が挙げられる。中でも、プロトン化された含窒素有機カチオンであることが、分散性とアルカリ現像性の点から好ましい。
 中でも、有機カチオンがエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する場合には、硬化性を付与することができる点から好ましい。
Further, in the general formula (I), X represents a hydrogen atom or an organic cation. The organic cation means a cation containing a carbon atom. Examples of the organic cation include ammonium cations such as imidazolium cations, pyridinium cations, aminidium cations, piperidinium cations, pyrrolidinium cations, tetraalkylammonium cations and trialkylammonium cations, and sulfonium cations such as trialkylsulfonium cations. , A phosphonium cation such as a tetraalkylphosphonium cation, and the like. Above all, a protonated nitrogen-containing organic cation is preferable from the viewpoint of dispersibility and alkali developability.
Above all, when the organic cation has an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, it is preferable because it can impart curability.
 一般式(I)で表される構成単位は、重合体中に、1種類単独で含まれていても良く、2種以上含まれていても良い。 The structural unit represented by the general formula (I) may be contained alone in the polymer, or may be contained in two or more types.
 重合体において、一般式(I)で表される構成単位のうち、Xが水素原子の構成単位と、Xが有機カチオンの構成単位の両方の構成単位を含んでいてもよい。当該両方の構成単位を含む場合、良好な分散性、及び分散安定性が発揮されるのであればよく、特に制限はないが、Xが有機カチオンの構成単位数の割合は、一般式(I)で表される構成単位の合計の構成単位数に対して0モル%以上50モル%以下であることが好ましい。 In the polymer, among the structural units represented by the general formula (I), X may contain both a structural unit of a hydrogen atom and X may contain both a structural unit of an organic cation. When both of the constituent units are included, it is sufficient as long as good dispersibility and dispersion stability are exhibited, and there is no particular limitation, but the ratio of the number of constituent units in which X is an organic cation is the general formula (I). It is preferably 0 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less with respect to the total number of constituent units represented by.
 一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体の合成方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、特開2017-2191号公報を参照して、一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体を合成することができる。一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体は、エポキシ基及び環状エーテル基の少なくとも一方を側鎖に有する重合体と、酸性リン化合物との反応生成物であって、酸性リン化合物基の少なくとも一部が塩を形成していてもよい重合体であることが好ましい。 The method for synthesizing the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is not particularly limited, but for example, with reference to JP-A-2017-2191, the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) can be used. The polymer can be synthesized. The polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is a reaction product of a polymer having at least one of an epoxy group and a cyclic ether group in the side chain and an acidic phosphorus compound, and is an acidic phosphorus compound. It is preferably a polymer in which at least a part of the group may form a salt.
 本発明の実施形態において一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体は、分散性の点から更に溶剤親和性部位を有することが好ましい。このような重合体としては、中でも、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位と、下記一般式(II)で表される構成単位とを有するグラフト共重合体であるか、又は、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位と、下記一般式(III)で表される構成単位とを有するブロック共重合体であることが、分散性、及び保存安定性に優れ、長期保管後であっても高コントラストな塗膜を形成可能な点から好ましい。 In the embodiment of the present invention, the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) preferably has a solvent-affinity moiety further from the viewpoint of dispersibility. Such a polymer is, among others, a graft copolymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the following general formula (II), or the above-mentioned polymer. A block copolymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the following general formula (III) is excellent in dispersibility and storage stability, and after long-term storage. However, it is preferable because a high-contrast coating film can be formed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
(一般式(II)中、L21は、直接結合又は2価の連結基、R25は、水素原子又はメチル基、Polymerは、下記一般式(IV)で表される構成単位を有するポリマー鎖を表す。
 一般式(III)中、R26は、水素原子又はメチル基、R27は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R28)-CH(R29)-O]x2-R30、-[(CHy2-O]z2-R30、-[CO-(CHy2-O]z2-R30、-CO-O-R30’又は-O-CO-R30”で示される1価の基、R28及びR29は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基、R30は、水素原子、炭化水素基、-CHO、-CHCHO又は-CHCOOR31で示される1価の基であり、R30’は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R28)-CH(R29)-O]x2’-R30、-[(CHy2’-O]z2’-R30、-[CO-(CHy2’-O]z2’-R30で示される1価の基であり、R30”は炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、R31は水素原子又は炭素数が1個以上5個以下のアルキル基である。前記炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 x2及びx2’は1以上18以下の整数、y2及びy2’は1以上5以下の整数、z2及びz2’は1以上18以下の整数を示す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
(In the general formula (II), L 21 is a direct bond or a divalent linking group, R 25 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Polymer is a polymer chain having a structural unit represented by the following general formula (IV). Represents.
In the general formula (III), R 26 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 27 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2 -R 30 ,-[(CH). 2 ) y2 -O] z2 -R 30 ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2 -O] z2 -R 30 , -CO-OR 30'or -O-CO-R 30 " , R 28 and R 29 are independent hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, respectively, and R 30 is a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, a monovalent group represented by -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 31 . R 30'is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2' -R 30 ,-[(CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 . ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 is a monovalent group, R 30 " is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, and R 31 is hydrogen. It is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less atoms or carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
x2 and x2'indicate an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less, y2 and y2' indicate an integer of 1 or more and 5 or less, and z2 and z2'indicate an integer of 1 or more and 18 or less. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(一般式(IV)中、R32は水素原子又はメチル基であり、R33は炭化水素基、-[CH(R34)-CH(R35)-O]x3-R36、-[(CHy3-O]z3-R36、-[CO-(CHy3-O]z3-R36、-CO-O-R37又は-O-CO-R38で示される1価の基、R34及びR35は、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基、R36は、水素原子、炭化水素基、-CHO、-CHCHO又は-CHCOOR39で示される1価の基、R37は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R34)-CH(R35)-O]x4-R36、-[(CHy4-O]z4-R36、-[CO-(CHy4-O]z4-R36で示される1価の基、R38は炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、R39は水素原子又は炭素数が1個以上5個以下のアルキル基であり、前記炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 nは5以上200以下の整数を示す。x3及びx4は1以上18以下の整数、y3及びy4は1以上5以下の整数、z3及びz4は1以上18以下の整数を示す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
(In general formula (IV), R 32 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 33 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 34 ) -CH (R 35 ) -O] x3 -R 36 ,-[((IV). CH 2 ) y3 -O] z3 -R 36 ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y3 -O] z3 -R 36 , -CO-O-R 37 or -O-CO-R 38 The groups, R 34 and R 35 , are independent hydrogen atoms or methyl groups, respectively, and R 36 is a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, a monovalent group represented by -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 39 , respectively. R 37 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 34 ) -CH (R 35 ) -O] x4 -R 36 ,-[(CH 2 ) y4 -O] z4 -R 36 ,-[CO- (CH). 2 ) y4 -O] A monovalent group represented by z4 -R 36 , R 38 is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, and R 39 is a hydrogen atom or 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms. It is an alkyl group, and the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
n represents an integer of 5 or more and 200 or less. x3 and x4 are integers of 1 or more and 18 or less, y3 and y4 are integers of 1 or more and 5 or less, and z3 and z4 are integers of 1 or more and 18 or less. )
(グラフト共重合体)
 酸性分散剤として好ましいグラフト共重合体としては、例えば、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位と、前記一般式(II)で表される構成単位とを有するグラフト共重合体を挙げることができる。
 前記一般式(II)において、L21は、直接結合又は2価の連結基である。L21における2価の連結基としては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合由来の炭素原子とポリマー鎖を連結可能であれば、特に制限はない。L21における2価の連結基としては、例えば、前記L11における2価の連結基と同様のものが挙げられる。
(Graft copolymer)
Examples of the graft copolymer preferable as the acidic dispersant include a graft copolymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the general formula (II). Can be done.
In the general formula (II), L 21 is a direct coupling or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group in L 21 is not particularly limited as long as the carbon atom derived from the ethylenically unsaturated double bond and the polymer chain can be linked. Examples of the divalent linking group in L 21 include the same as the divalent linking group in L 11 .
 前記一般式(II)において、Polymerは、前記一般式(IV)で表される構成単位を有するポリマー鎖を表す。
 一般式(IV)中、R33における炭化水素基としては、炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、炭素数が2個以上18個以下のアルケニル基、アラルキル基、又はアリール基であることが好ましい。これらは、例えば、前記のR12と同様のものが挙げられる。
In the general formula (II), Polymer represents a polymer chain having a structural unit represented by the general formula (IV).
In the general formula (IV), the hydrocarbon group in R 33 is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, or an aryl group. Is preferable. These include, for example, the same as the above-mentioned R12 .
 R36は、水素原子、あるいは炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、-CHO、-CHCHO又は-CHCOOR39で示される1価の基が好ましく、R37は、炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、-[CH(R34)-CH(R35)-O]x4-R36、-[(CHy4-O]z4-R36、-[CO-(CHy4-O]z4-R36で示される1価の基が好ましい。R38は、炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基であり、R39は水素原子又は炭素数が1個以上5個以下のアルキル基を示す。
 前記R36及びR37のうちの炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基は、前記のR12と同様のものが挙げられる。
 前記R38及びR39のうちのアルキル基は、前記のR12と同様のものが挙げられる。
 前記R36、R37及びR39が、芳香環を有する基である場合、当該芳香環はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。当該置換基としては、例えば炭素数が1個以上5個以下の直鎖状、分岐状、環状のアルキル基の他、アルケニル基、ニトロ基、F、Cl、Br等のハロゲン原子などが挙げられる。
 なお、前記好ましい炭素数には、置換基の炭素数は含まれない。
 前記R33及びR37において、x3及びx4は前記xと、y3及びy4は前記yと、z3及びz4は前記zと同様である。
R 36 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a monovalent group represented by an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 39 . R 37 has an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, an aralkyl group, an aryl group,-[CH (R 34 ) -CH (R 35 ) -O] x4 -R 36 ,-[(CH 2 ). y4 -O] z4 -R 36 ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y4 -O] The monovalent group represented by z4 -R 36 is preferable. R 38 is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, and R 39 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms.
Examples of the alkyl group, aralkyl group, and aryl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms among R 36 and R 37 are the same as those of R 12 .
Examples of the alkyl group among the R 38 and R 39 are the same as those of the R 12 described above.
When the R 36 , R 37 and R 39 are groups having an aromatic ring, the aromatic ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include linear, branched and cyclic alkyl groups having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms, as well as halogen atoms such as alkenyl groups, nitro groups, F, Cl and Br. ..
The preferable carbon number does not include the carbon number of the substituent.
In R 33 and R 37 , x3 and x4 are the same as the x, y3 and y4 are the same as the y, and z3 and z4 are the same as the z.
 さらに、前記R33、R36、R37、R38及びR39は、前記グラフト共重合体の分散性能等を妨げない範囲で、更に、アルコキシ基、水酸基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基、水素結合形成基等の置換基によって置換されたものとしてもよい。また、これらの置換基を有するグラフト共重合体を合成した後に、当該置換基と反応する官能基と重合性基とを有する化合物を反応させて、重合性基を付加したものとしてもよい。例えば、カルボキシ基を有するグラフト共重合体にグリシジル(メタ)アクリレートを反応させたり、イソシアネート基を有するグラフト共重合体にヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートを反応させたりして、重合性基を付加することができる。 Further, the R 33 , R 36 , R 37 , R 38 and R 39 further include an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, an amino group and an epoxy group as long as they do not interfere with the dispersion performance of the graft copolymer. It may be substituted with a substituent such as an isocyanate group or a hydrogen bond forming group. Further, after synthesizing a graft copolymer having these substituents, a compound having a functional group and a polymerizable group that reacts with the substituent may be reacted to add a polymerizable group. For example, a polymerizable group may be added by reacting a graft copolymer having a carboxy group with glycidyl (meth) acrylate, or by reacting a graft copolymer having an isocyanate group with hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate. Can be done.
 一般式(IV)で表される構成単位を有するポリマー鎖は、前記した構成単位の中でもメチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、tert-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エトキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルシクロヘキサンなど由来の構成単位を有するものが好ましい。しかしながら、これらに限定されるものではない。 The polymer chain having a structural unit represented by the general formula (IV) includes methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl among the above-mentioned structural units. (Meta) acrylate, tert-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl ( Those having a structural unit derived from meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinylcyclohexane and the like are preferable. However, it is not limited to these.
 本発明の実施形態において、前記R33及びR37としては、中でも、有機溶剤との溶解性に優れたものを用いることが好ましく、色材分散液に使用する有機溶剤に合わせて適宜選択されれば良い。具体的には、例えば有機溶剤として、色材分散液の有機溶剤として一般的に使用されているエーテルアルコールアセテート系、エーテル系、エステル系などの有機溶剤を用いる場合には、メチル基、エチル基、イソブチル基、n-ブチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、2-エトキシエチル基、シクロヘキシル基、ベンジル基等が好ましい。
 ここで、前記R33及びR37をこのように設定する理由は、前記R33及びR37を含む構成単位が、前記有機溶剤に対して溶解性を有し、前記モノマーの酸性リン化合物基及びその塩の部位が色材等の粒子に対して高い吸着性を有するものであることにより、色材等の粒子の分散性、及び安定性を特に優れたものとすることができるからである。
In the embodiment of the present invention, the R 33 and R 37 are preferably those having excellent solubility in an organic solvent, and are appropriately selected according to the organic solvent used in the colorant dispersion. It's fine. Specifically, for example, when an organic solvent such as ether alcohol acetate-based, ether-based, or ester-based, which is generally used as an organic solvent for a colorant dispersion, is used as an organic solvent, a methyl group or an ethyl group is used. , Isobutyl group, n-butyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, 2-ethoxyethyl group, cyclohexyl group, benzyl group and the like are preferable.
Here, the reason for setting the R 33 and R 37 in this way is that the structural unit containing the R 33 and R 37 has solubility in the organic solvent, and the acidic phosphorus compound group of the monomer and the acidic phosphorus compound group of the monomer are used. This is because the salt portion has a high adsorptivity to particles such as a coloring material, so that the dispersibility and stability of the particles such as the coloring material can be made particularly excellent.
 Polymerにおけるポリマー鎖の重量平均分子量は、500以上15000以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、1000以上8000以下の範囲内であることがより好ましい。前記範囲であることにより、分散剤としての十分な立体反発効果を保持できるとともに、立体効果による色材等の粒子の分散に要する時間の増大を抑制することもできる。 The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain in Polymer is preferably in the range of 500 or more and 15,000 or less, and more preferably in the range of 1000 or more and 8000 or less. Within the above range, a sufficient steric repulsion effect as a dispersant can be maintained, and an increase in time required for dispersion of particles such as a coloring material due to the steric effect can be suppressed.
 また、Polymerにおけるポリマー鎖は、目安として、組み合わせて用いられる有機溶剤に対して、23℃における溶解度が50(g/100g溶剤)以上であることが好ましい。 Further, as a guide, the polymer chain in Polymer preferably has a solubility of 50 (g / 100 g solvent) or more at 23 ° C. with respect to the organic solvent used in combination.
 前記ポリマー鎖は、単独重合体でもよく、共重合体であってもよい。また、一般式(II)で表される構成単位に含まれるポリマー鎖は、グラフト共重合体において、1種単独でも良く、2種以上混合していても良い。 The polymer chain may be a homopolymer or a copolymer. Further, the polymer chain contained in the structural unit represented by the general formula (II) may be used alone or in combination of two or more in the graft copolymer.
 前記グラフト共重合体の全構成単位に対して、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位は、その合計が3質量%以上80質量%以下の割合で含まれていることが好ましく、10質量%以上70質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以上60質量%以下がさらに好ましい。グラフト共重合体中の一般式(I)で表される構成単位の合計含有量が前記範囲内にあれば、グラフト共重合体中の粒子との親和性部位の割合が適切となり、かつ有機溶剤に対する溶解性の低下を抑制できるので、色材等の粒子に対する吸着性が良好となり、優れた分散性、及び分散安定性が得られる。また、前記グラフト共重合体の酸性リン化合物基が色材周辺に安定的に局在化することができるため、耐熱性やコントラストに優れたカラーフィルタが得られる。
 一方、前記グラフト共重合体の全構成単位に対して、前記一般式(II)で表される構成単位は、20質量%以上97質量%以下の割合で含まれていることが好ましく、25質量%以上95質量%以下がより好ましく、40質量%以上90質量%以下がさらに好ましい。
 なお、本発明において、共重合体における各構成単位の含有割合は、共重合体を合成する際の仕込み量から算出される。
It is preferable that the total of the structural units represented by the general formula (I) is contained in a proportion of 3% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the graft copolymer. It is more preferably 20% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less. When the total content of the structural units represented by the general formula (I) in the graft copolymer is within the above range, the ratio of the affinity sites with the particles in the graft copolymer is appropriate, and the organic solvent is used. Since the decrease in solubility of the colorant can be suppressed, the adsorptivity to particles such as a coloring material is improved, and excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability can be obtained. Further, since the acidic phosphorus compound group of the graft copolymer can be stably localized around the coloring material, a color filter having excellent heat resistance and contrast can be obtained.
On the other hand, the structural unit represented by the general formula (II) is preferably contained in a proportion of 20% by mass or more and 97% by mass or less, preferably 25% by mass, with respect to all the structural units of the graft copolymer. % Or more and 95% by mass or less are more preferable, and 40% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less are further preferable.
In the present invention, the content ratio of each structural unit in the copolymer is calculated from the amount charged when synthesizing the copolymer.
 また、前記グラフト共重合体の重量平均分子量は、1000以上500000以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、3000以上400000以下の範囲内であることがより好ましく、5000以上300000以下の範囲内であることがさらに好ましい。前記範囲であることにより、色材等の粒子を均一に分散させることができる。 The weight average molecular weight of the graft copolymer is preferably in the range of 1,000 or more and 500,000 or less, more preferably in the range of 3,000 or more and 400,000 or less, and in the range of 5,000 or more and 300,000 or less. Is even more preferable. Within the above range, particles such as coloring materials can be uniformly dispersed.
 本発明の実施形態に用いられる前記グラフト共重合体は、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位及び前記一般式(II)で表される構成単位以外に、更に他の構成単位を有していても良い。例えば、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を誘導するエチレン性不飽和モノマー等と共重合可能な、エチレン性不飽和モノマーを適宜選択して共重合し、他の構成単位を導入することができる。 The graft copolymer used in the embodiment of the present invention has a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a structural unit represented by the general formula (II), as well as other structural units. You may be doing it. For example, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer copolymerizable with an ethylenically unsaturated monomer or the like that induces a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is appropriately selected and copolymerized, and another structural unit is introduced. be able to.
(ブロック共重合体)
 酸性分散剤として好ましいブロック共重合体としては、例えば、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部と、前記一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部とを有するブロック共重合体を挙げることができる。
 当該ブロック共重合体において、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部中、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位は、合計で、3個以上含まれることが好ましい。中でも、分散性を良好なものとし、耐熱性を向上する点から、3個以上200個以下含むことが好ましく、3個以上50個以下含むことがより好ましく、更に3個以上30個以下含むことがより好ましい。
 前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位は、色材親和性部位として機能すれば良く、1種からなるものであっても良いし、2種以上の構成単位を含んでいてもよい。2種以上の構成単位を含む場合には、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部内は2種以上の構成単位がランダムに配列していてもよい。
(Block copolymer)
As the block copolymer preferable as the acidic dispersant, for example, a block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) may be used. Examples thereof include block copolymers having.
In the block copolymer, it is preferable that the block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) contains three or more structural units represented by the general formula (I) in total. .. Among them, from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility and improving heat resistance, it is preferable to include 3 or more and 200 or less, more preferably 3 or more and 50 or less, and further include 3 or more and 30 or less. Is more preferable.
The structural unit represented by the general formula (I) may function as a color material affinity site, may be composed of one type, or may include two or more types of structural units. When two or more types of structural units are included, two or more types of structural units may be randomly arranged in the block portion including the structural units represented by the general formula (I).
 前記ブロック共重合体中、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位の合計の含有割合は、前記ブロック共重合体の全構成単位に対して、5質量%以上80質量%以下であることが好ましく、10質量%以上70質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上60質量%以下であることがさらに好ましい。
 前記範囲内にあれば、ブロック共重合体中の粒子との親和性部位の割合が適切となり、かつ有機溶剤に対する溶解性の低下を抑制できるので、色材等の粒子に対する吸着性が良好となり、優れた分散性、及び分散安定性が得られる。また、前記ブロック共重合体の酸性リン化合物基が色材周辺に安定的に局在化することができるため、耐熱性やコントラストに優れたカラーフィルタが得られる。
In the block copolymer, the total content ratio of the structural units represented by the general formula (I) is 5% by mass or more and 80% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the block copolymer. It is more preferable that it is 10% by mass or more and 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 20% by mass or more and 60% by mass or less.
If it is within the above range, the ratio of the affinity site with the particles in the block copolymer becomes appropriate, and the decrease in the solubility in the organic solvent can be suppressed, so that the adsorptivity to the particles such as the coloring material becomes good. Excellent dispersibility and dispersion stability can be obtained. Further, since the acidic phosphorus compound group of the block copolymer can be stably localized around the coloring material, a color filter having excellent heat resistance and contrast can be obtained.
 前記ブロック共重合体は、前記一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部を有することにより、溶剤親和性を良好にし、色材の分散性及び分散安定性が良好で、且つ耐熱性も良好で、更にN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)に対する耐性(耐NMP性)に優れたものとなる。 By having the block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (III), the block copolymer has good solvent affinity, good dispersibility and dispersion stability of the coloring material, and heat resistance. The properties are also good, and the resistance to N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP) (NMP resistance) is also excellent.
 一般式(III)において、R27は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R28)-CH(R29)-O]x2-R30、-[(CHy2-O]z2-R30、-[CO-(CHy2-O]z2-R30、-CO-O-R30’又は-O-CO-R30”で示される1価の基である。
 R27における炭化水素基としては、前記R12で示したものと同様のものとすることができる。
In the general formula (III), R 27 is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH (R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2 -R 30 ,-[(CH 2 ) y2 -O] z2 -R 30 . ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2 -O] z2 -R 30 , -CO-O-R 30'or -O-CO-R 30 " , which is a monovalent group.
The hydrocarbon group in R 27 can be the same as that shown in R 12 .
 また、前記R30は、水素原子、炭化水素基、-CHO、-CHCHO又は-CHCOOR31で示される1価の基であり、R30’は、炭化水素基、-[CH(R28)-CH(R29)-O]x2’-R30、-[(CHy2’-O]z2’-R30、-[CO-(CHy2’-O]z2’-R30で示される1価の基であり、R30”は炭素数が1個以上18個以下のアルキル基、R31は水素原子又は炭素数が1個以上5個以下のアルキル基であり、前記炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 前記R30における炭化水素基は、前記R12で示したものと同様のものとすることができる。
 前記R27及びR30’において、x2及びx2’は前記xと同様であり、y2及びy2’は前記yと同様であり、z2及びz2’は前記zと同様である。
 また、前記一般式(III)で表される構成単位中のR27は、互いに同一であってもよいし、異なるものであってもよい。
Further, R 30 is a monovalent group represented by a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group, -CHO, -CH 2 CHO or -CH 2 COOR 31 , and R 30'is a hydrocarbon group,-[CH ( R 28 ) -CH (R 29 ) -O] x2' -R 30 ,-[(CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 ,-[CO- (CH 2 ) y2' -O] z2' -R 30 is a monovalent group, R 30 " is an alkyl group having 1 or more and 18 or less carbon atoms, and R 31 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 or more and 5 or less carbon atoms. , The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
The hydrocarbon group in R 30 can be the same as that shown in R 12 .
In the R 27 and R 30' , x2 and x2'are the same as the x, y2 and y2'are the same as the y, and z2 and z2'are the same as the z.
Further, the R 27s in the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) may be the same as each other or may be different from each other.
 前記R27及びR30’としては、中でも、有機溶剤との溶解性に優れたものを用いることが好ましく、例えば、前記R33及びR37と同様のものが挙げられる。
 また、前記一般式(IV)におけるR27、R30、R30’、R30”及びR31は、前記ブロック共重合体の分散性能等を妨げない範囲で、アルコキシ基、水酸基、カルボキシ基、アミノ基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基、水素結合形成基等の置換基によって置換されたものとしてもよく、また、前記ブロック共重合体の合成後に、前記置換基を有する化合物と反応させて、前記置換基を付加させてもよい。また、これらの置換基を有するブロック共重合体を合成した後に、当該置換基と反応する官能基と重合性基とを有する化合物を反応させて、重合性基を付加したものとしてもよい。例えば、グリシジル基を有するブロック共重合体に(メタ)アクリル酸を反応させたり、イソシアネート基を有するブロック共重合体にヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートを反応させたりして、重合性基を付加することができる。
As the R 27 and R 30' , it is preferable to use those having excellent solubility in an organic solvent, and examples thereof include the same as those of R 33 and R 37 .
Further, R 27 , R 30 , R 30' , R 30 " and R 31 in the general formula (IV) have an alkoxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, and the like, as long as they do not interfere with the dispersion performance of the block copolymer. It may be substituted with a substituent such as an amino group, an epoxy group, an isocyanate group or a hydrogen bond forming group, or after the synthesis of the block copolymer, it may be reacted with a compound having the substituent to carry out the substitution. A group may be added. Further, after synthesizing a block copolymer having these substituents, a compound having a functional group and a polymerizable group that reacts with the substituent is reacted to form a polymerizable group. It may be added. For example, a block copolymer having a glycidyl group may be reacted with (meth) acrylic acid, or a block copolymer having an isocyanate group may be reacted with hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate. A polymerizable group can be added.
 一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部を構成する構成単位の数は特に限定されないが、溶剤親和性部位と色材親和性部位が効果的に作用し、色材分散液の分散性を向上する点から、10以上200以下であることが好ましく、20以上100以下であることがより好ましく、更に30以上80以下であることがより好ましい。 The number of the constituent units constituting the block portion including the constituent unit represented by the general formula (III) is not particularly limited, but the solvent-affinity portion and the color material-affinity portion act effectively, and the color material dispersion liquid From the viewpoint of improving dispersibility, it is preferably 10 or more and 200 or less, more preferably 20 or more and 100 or less, and further preferably 30 or more and 80 or less.
 前記ブロック共重合体中、一般式(III)で表される構成単位の含有割合は、前記ブロック共重合体の全構成単位に対して、30質量%以上95質量%以下であることが好ましく、40質量%以上90質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 The content ratio of the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) in the block copolymer is preferably 30% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the block copolymer. It is more preferably 40% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less.
 一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部は、溶剤親和性部位として機能するように選択されれば良く、一般式(III)で表される構成単位は1種からなるものであっても良いし、2種以上の構成単位を含んでいてもよい。本発明の実施形態においては、一般式(III)で表される構成単位が2種以上の構成単位を含む場合に、前記一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部内は2種以上の構成単位がランダムに配列していてもよい。 The block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) may be selected so as to function as a solvent-affinity site, and the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) is composed of one kind. It may be present, or it may contain two or more kinds of structural units. In the embodiment of the present invention, when the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) includes two or more types of structural units, there are two types in the block portion including the structural units represented by the general formula (III). The above structural units may be randomly arranged.
 分散剤として用いられるブロック共重合体において、一般式(I)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部の構成単位のユニット数mと、一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部の構成単位のユニット数nの比率m/nとしては、0.01以上1以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.1以上0.7以下の範囲内であることが、色材の分散性、分散安定性の点からより好ましい。 In a block copolymer used as a dispersant, the number of units m of the structural unit of the block unit including the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and the block unit containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (III). The ratio m / n of the number of units n of the constituent units is preferably in the range of 0.01 or more and 1 or less, and is preferably in the range of 0.1 or more and 0.7 or less for the dispersion of the coloring material. It is more preferable from the viewpoint of property and dispersion stability.
 前記ブロック共重合体の結合順としては、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部及び一般式(III)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部を有し、色材を安定に分散することができるものであればよく、特に限定されないが、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を含むブロック部が前記ブロック共重合体の一端のみに結合したものであることが、色材との相互作用に優れ、分散剤同士の凝集を効果的に抑えることができる点から好ましい。 The block copolymer has a block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) and a block portion including the structural unit represented by the general formula (III) as the binding order of the block copolymer, and the coloring material is used. Anything that can be stably dispersed is not particularly limited, but the block portion containing the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is bonded only to one end of the block copolymer. However, it is preferable because it has excellent interaction with the coloring material and can effectively suppress the aggregation of the dispersants.
 前記ブロック共重合体の重量平均分子量は、特に限定されないが、分散性を良好なものとし、耐熱性に優れる点から、2500以上500000以下であることが好ましく、3000以上400000以下であることがより好ましく、更に6000以上300000以下であることがより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the block copolymer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2500 or more and 500,000 or less, and more preferably 3000 or more and 400,000 or less, from the viewpoint of good dispersibility and excellent heat resistance. It is preferable, and more preferably 6000 or more and 300,000 or less.
 前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体の酸価は、前記色材の分散性及び保存安定性の点から、20mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、30mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましく、40mgKOH/g以上であることがさらに好ましい。一方で、現像性に優れる点から、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体の酸価は150mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下であることがさらに好ましい。
 なお、本発明において酸価は、試料1g中に含まれる酸成分を中和するのに要する水酸化カリウムのmg数をいい、JIS K 0070:1992に従って測定することができる。
The acid value of the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more, from the viewpoint of the dispersibility and storage stability of the coloring material. It is more preferably present, and more preferably 40 mgKOH / g or more. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of excellent developability, the acid value of the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I) is preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less. , 100 mgKOH / g or less is more preferable.
In the present invention, the acid value refers to the number of mg of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acid component contained in 1 g of the sample, and can be measured according to JIS K 0070: 1992.
<その他の酸性分散剤>
 本発明の色材分散液においては、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体とは異なる、その他の酸性分散剤が、更に含まれていても良い。
 その他の酸性分散剤としては、酸性基を有する分散剤が挙げられる。ここで酸性基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、若しくはリン酸基等が挙げられるが、その他の酸性分散剤の分散剤に含まれる酸性基としては、中でもカルボキシ基であることが、分散性に優れる点から好ましい。
<Other acid dispersants>
The color material dispersion liquid of the present invention may further contain other acidic dispersants different from the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I).
Examples of other acidic dispersants include dispersants having an acidic group. Here, examples of the acidic group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and the like, and the acidic group contained in the dispersant of other acidic dispersants is dispersed, among which, the carboxy group. It is preferable because it has excellent properties.
 その他の酸性分散剤の酸価は、分散性に優れる点から、30mgKOH/g以上250mgKOH/g以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、中でも、40mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上であることがさらに好ましい。一方で、現像残渣抑制の点から、その他の酸性分散剤の酸価は200mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、190mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、180mgKOH/g以下であることがさらに好ましい。 The acid value of the other acidic dispersants is preferably in the range of 30 mgKOH / g or more and 250 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 40 mgKOH / g or more, and 50 mgKOH / g or more, from the viewpoint of excellent dispersibility. Is more preferable, and 70 mgKOH / g or more is further preferable. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of suppressing the development residue, the acid value of the other acidic dispersants is preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 190 mgKOH / g or less, and even more preferably 180 mgKOH / g or less. ..
 本発明において、その他の酸性分散剤としては、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体と組み合わせて用いることにより、現像残渣の抑制性が向上する点から、カルボキシ基を有する高分子分散剤であることが好ましく、中でも、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体と組み合わせて用いることにより、現像残渣の抑制性が向上し、且つ、塗膜の均一性がより良好になる点から、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を含むAブロックと、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル由来の構成単位を含むBブロックとを含むブロック共重合体とを含むことが好ましい。
 以下、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を含むAブロックと、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル由来の構成単位を含むBブロックとを含むブロック共重合体を、単に、「カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体」という場合がある。当該カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体は、例えば、キサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材及び顔料の分散剤として、好適に用いられる。
In the present invention, the other acidic dispersant has a carboxy group from the viewpoint of improving the suppressibility of the development residue when used in combination with the polymer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (I). It is preferably a polymer dispersant, and above all, when it is used in combination with a polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I), the suppressibility of development residue is improved and the coating film is uniform. From the viewpoint of better properties, a block copolymer containing an A block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer and a B block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. It is preferable to include.
Hereinafter, a block copolymer containing an A block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer and a B block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is simply referred to as "carboxy group-containing." Sometimes referred to as "block copolymer". The carboxy group-containing block copolymer is suitably used, for example, as a dispersant for metal lake coloring materials and pigments of xanthene dyes.
(カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体)
{Aブロック}
 カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体において、Aブロックは、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を含むポリマーブロックである。
 Aブロックに用いられるカルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、例えば、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体に用いられるカルボキシ基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマーと同様のものを挙げることができる。
 Aブロックにおいて2種以上の構成単位が含まれる場合、Aブロック内における各構成単位は、ランダム共重合、ブロック共重合等の何れの態様で含まれていてもよく、均一性の観点からランダム共重合の態様で含有されていることが好ましい。
 Aブロックは、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位が、Aブロックの全構成単位に対して40質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位のみから構成されているポリマーブロックであることがより更に好ましい。
(Ccarboxy group-containing block copolymer)
{A block}
In the carboxy group-containing block copolymer, the A block is a polymer block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
Examples of the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer used in the A block include the same as the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a carboxy group used in the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. ..
When two or more kinds of structural units are contained in the A block, each structural unit in the A block may be contained in any mode such as random copolymerization and block copolymerization, and is randomly co-polymerized from the viewpoint of uniformity. It is preferably contained in the form of polymerization.
In the A block, the structural unit derived from the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and more preferably the carboxy group, based on all the structural units of the A block. It is even more preferable that the polymer block is composed of only the structural units derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer contained.
 Aブロックは、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位のみから構成されていてもよいし、BブロックよりもAブロックの酸性度が強くなる範囲において、カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーとは異なるエチレン性不飽和モノマーに由来する構成単位が含まれていてもよい。Aブロックにカルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーとは異なるエチレン性不飽和モノマーに由来する構成単位を含む場合は、Aブロックの全構成単位に対して、60質量%以下にすることが好ましく、30質量%以下にすることがより好ましい。前記カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマーとは異なるエチレン性不飽和モノマーとしては、後述するBブロックに用いられる構成単位が挙げられる。 The A block may be composed of only a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer, or may be a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer in a range in which the acidity of the A block is stronger than that of the B block. May contain building blocks derived from different ethylenically unsaturated monomers. When the A block contains a structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer different from the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer, it is preferably 60% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the A block. It is more preferable to make it by mass% or less. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer different from the carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer include structural units used in the B block described later.
 Aブロックの含有量は、分散性及び分散安定性の点から、ブロック共重合体の全構成単位に対して5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、一方で、95質量%以下であることが好ましく、40質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability, the content of A block is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more, based on all the constituent units of the block copolymer. It is preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 40% by mass or less.
{Bブロック}
 カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体において、Bブロックは、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル由来の構成単位を含むポリマーブロックである。
 Bブロックに用いられる(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルモノマーとしては、前記一般式(IV)で表される構成単位を有するポリマー鎖に用いられる(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルモノマーと同様であって良く、1種又は2種以上混合して使用される。
 Bブロックには、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル由来の構成単位の他に、他のエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を含んでいても良い。他のエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位としては、前記一般式(III)で表される構成単位のうち、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル由来の構成単位とは異なる構成単位が挙げられる。
{B block}
In the carboxy group-containing block copolymer, the B block is a polymer block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
The (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester monomer used in the B block may be the same as the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester monomer used in the polymer chain having the structural unit represented by the general formula (IV). It is used by one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
The B block may contain a structural unit derived from another ethylenically unsaturated monomer in addition to the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. Examples of the structural unit derived from the other ethylenically unsaturated monomer include a structural unit represented by the general formula (III), which is different from the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
 Bブロックにおいて2種以上の構成単位が含まれる場合、Bブロック内における各構成単位は、ランダム共重合、ブロック共重合等の何れの態様で含まれていてもよく、均一性の観点からランダム共重合の態様で含有されていることが好ましい。 When two or more kinds of structural units are included in the B block, each structural unit in the B block may be contained in any mode such as random copolymerization, block copolymerization, etc., and is a random copolymer from the viewpoint of uniformity. It is preferably contained in the form of polymerization.
 Bブロックは、酸性基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位が、Bブロックの全構成単位に対して10質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以下であることがより好ましく、2質量%以下であることがさらに好ましい。本発明において、Bブロックは、酸性基を有するエチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を含まないポリマーブロックであることがより更に好ましい。 In the B block, the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having an acidic group is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total structural unit of the B block. It is more preferably mass% or less. In the present invention, the B block is more preferably a polymer block containing no structural unit derived from an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having an acidic group.
 前記カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体は、ABブロック共重合体であっても良いし、BABブロック共重合体であっても良い。ブロック共重合体がBABブロック共重合体である場合の2つのBブロックの互いの含有比率は、分散性の点から、質量比で50:50~70:30の範囲内で調整することが好ましい。 The carboxy group-containing block copolymer may be an AB block copolymer or a BAB block copolymer. When the block copolymer is a BAB block copolymer, the content ratio of the two B blocks to each other is preferably adjusted in the range of 50:50 to 70:30 in terms of mass ratio from the viewpoint of dispersibility. ..
 前記カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体の酸価は、分散性の点から、30mgKOH/g以上250mgKOH/g以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、ブロック共重合体の酸価がこの範囲になるように、Aブロックにカルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位が含まれることが好ましい。酸価は50mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。酸価は200mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。 The acid value of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is preferably in the range of 30 mgKOH / g or more and 250 mgKOH / g or less from the viewpoint of dispersibility, so that the acid value of the block copolymer is in this range. , A block preferably contains a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer. The acid value is preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more. The acid value is preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less.
 前記カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体の重量平均分子量は、分散性の点から、5,000以上100,000以下であることが好ましい。前記カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体の重量平均分子量は、8,000以上であることがより好ましく、10,000以上であることがさらに好ましく、一方で80,000以下であることがより好ましく、70,000以下であることがさらに好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is preferably 5,000 or more and 100,000 or less from the viewpoint of dispersibility. The weight average molecular weight of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is more preferably 8,000 or more, further preferably 10,000 or more, and more preferably 80,000 or less, 70. It is more preferably 000 or less.
 前記カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体の分子量分布は、2未満であることが好ましく、1.5未満であることがより好ましく、1.3未満であることがさらに好ましい。なお、本発明において、分子量分布とは「重量平均分子量(Mw))/(数平均分子量(Mn)」によって求められるものである。分子量分布が大きいほど、設計したポリマーの分子量に比べて、分子量の小さいものや、分子量の大きいものが含まれることになり、色材の分散性を悪くする傾向があることから、分子量分布が小さい方が好ましい。 The molecular weight distribution of the carboxy group-containing block copolymer is preferably less than 2, more preferably less than 1.5, and even more preferably less than 1.3. In the present invention, the molecular weight distribution is determined by "weight average molecular weight (Mw)) / (number average molecular weight (Mn)". The larger the molecular weight distribution, the larger the molecular weight as compared with the molecular weight of the designed polymer. It is preferable that the molecular weight distribution is small because those having a small molecular weight and those having a large molecular weight are included and tend to deteriorate the dispersibility of the coloring material.
 前記カルボキシ基含有ブロック共重合体の製造方法としては、従来公知のブロック共重合体の製造方法を適宜選択して用いることができる。均一な組成のポリマーが製造しやすい点から、リビング重合法を用いることが好ましく、リビング重合法としては、有機酸触媒とシリル系開始剤を用いる方法(GTP法)、遷移金属触媒を用いる方法(ATRP法)、硫黄系の可逆的連鎖移動剤を用いる方法(RAFT法)、有機テルル化合物を用いる方法(TERP法)等の方法が挙げられる。 As the method for producing the carboxy group-containing block copolymer, a conventionally known method for producing a block copolymer can be appropriately selected and used. Since it is easy to produce a polymer having a uniform composition, it is preferable to use a living polymerization method, and as the living polymerization method, a method using an organic acid catalyst and a silyl-based initiator (GTP method) and a method using a transition metal catalyst ( ATRP method), a method using a sulfur-based reversible chain transfer agent (RAFT method), a method using an organic tellurium compound (TERP method), and the like can be mentioned.
 色材分散液において分散剤の含有量は、適宜調整すればよいが、分散性及び保存安定性の点から、色材100質量部に対して、5質量部以上80質量部以下とすることが好ましく、20質量部以上70質量部以下とすることがより好ましい。 The content of the dispersant in the color material dispersion may be appropriately adjusted, but from the viewpoint of dispersibility and storage stability, the content may be 5 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the color material. It is more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 70 parts by mass or less.
[その他の成分]
 色材分散液には、本発明の効果が損なわれない限り、更に必要に応じて、分散補助樹脂、その他の成分を配合してもよい。
 分散補助樹脂としては、例えば、アルカリ可溶性樹脂が挙げられる。アルカリ可溶性樹脂の立体障害によって色材粒子同士が接触しにくくなるため色材の分散が安定化したり、その分散安定化効果によって分散剤の量を減らせたりする効果が得られる場合がある。
 また、その他の成分としては、例えば、濡れ性向上のための界面活性剤、密着性向上のためのシランカップリング剤、消泡剤、ハジキ防止剤、凝集防止剤、紫外線吸収剤などが挙げられる。
[Other ingredients]
The colorant dispersion may further contain a dispersion auxiliary resin and other components, if necessary, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
Examples of the dispersion auxiliary resin include an alkali-soluble resin. Since the steric hindrance of the alkali-soluble resin makes it difficult for the coloring material particles to come into contact with each other, the dispersion of the coloring material may be stabilized, or the amount of the dispersant may be reduced due to the dispersion stabilizing effect.
In addition, examples of other components include a surfactant for improving wettability, a silane coupling agent for improving adhesion, a defoaming agent, an anti-repellent agent, an anti-aggregation agent, an ultraviolet absorber, and the like. ..
[溶剤]
 色材分散液が含有する溶剤としては、上述した本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物が含有する溶剤と同様のものを用いることができる。
 溶剤の量は、色材分散液全量に対して、通常、55質量%以上95質量%以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、中でも65質量%以上90質量%以下の範囲内であることが好ましく、70質量%以上88質量%以下の範囲内であることがより好ましい。溶剤が少なすぎると、粘度が上昇し、分散性が低下しやすい。また、溶剤が多すぎると、色材濃度が低下し、目標とする色度座標に達成することが困難な場合がある。
[solvent]
As the solvent contained in the color material dispersion liquid, the same solvent as that contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive coloring resin composition of the present invention can be used.
The amount of the solvent is usually preferably in the range of 55% by mass or more and 95% by mass or less, and particularly preferably in the range of 65% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the colorant dispersion liquid. , 70% by mass or more and 88% by mass or less is more preferable. If the amount of solvent is too small, the viscosity increases and the dispersibility tends to decrease. Further, if the amount of the solvent is too large, the concentration of the coloring material decreases, and it may be difficult to achieve the target chromaticity coordinates.
[色材分散液の製造方法]
 色材分散液の製造方法は、分散剤により色材が溶剤中に分散された色材分散液が得られる方法であれば特に限定されない。例えば、色材を準備する工程と、分散剤を準備する工程と、溶剤中、前記分散剤の存在下で、前記色材を分散する工程とを有する製造方法を適用することができる。溶剤中、分散剤の存在下で、2種以上の色材を共分散しても良いし、1種以上の色材を分散乃至共分散した後、2種以上の色材分散液を混合しても良い。
 色材の分散は、従来公知の分散機を用いて行うことができる。分散機の具体例としては、2本ロール、3本ロール等のロールミル、ボールミル、振動ボールミル等のボールミル、ペイントコンディショナー、連続ディスク型ビーズミル、連続アニュラー型ビーズミル等のビーズミルが挙げられる。ビーズミルの好ましい分散条件として、使用するビーズ径は0.03mm以上3.0mm以下が好ましく、より好ましくは0.05mm以上2.0mm以下である。
[Manufacturing method of color material dispersion]
The method for producing the color material dispersion liquid is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for obtaining a color material dispersion liquid in which the color material is dispersed in a solvent by a dispersant. For example, a manufacturing method having a step of preparing a coloring material, a step of preparing a dispersant, and a step of dispersing the coloring material in a solvent in the presence of the dispersant can be applied. Two or more kinds of coloring materials may be co-dispersed in a solvent in the presence of a dispersant, or one or more kinds of coloring materials may be dispersed or co-dispersed, and then two or more kinds of coloring material dispersions are mixed. May be.
The colorant can be dispersed using a conventionally known disperser. Specific examples of the disperser include a roll mill such as a two-roll and three-roll mill, a ball mill such as a ball mill and a vibrating ball mill, a paint conditioner, a continuous disc type bead mill, and a bead mill such as a continuous annular type bead mill. As a preferable dispersion condition of the bead mill, the bead diameter used is preferably 0.03 mm or more and 3.0 mm or less, and more preferably 0.05 mm or more and 2.0 mm or less.
III.感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、光硬化性成分として光重合性化合物であるモノマーを含有するため、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物を光重合反応させることにより、本発明の硬化物を得ることができる。例えば、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の塗膜を形成し、該塗膜を乾燥させたのち、露光、及び必要に応じて現像することにより、本発明の硬化物を得ることができる。塗膜の形成、露光、及び現像の方法としては、例えば、後述する本発明に係るカラーフィルタが備える着色層の形成において用いられる方法と同様の方法とすることができる。
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物は、好ましい実施形態において、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体等のバインダー樹脂も重合性官能基を有している。このような好ましい実施形態における本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を含むバインダー樹脂及びモノマーの光重合反応によって生成したマトリックス中に、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む色材が溶解又は分散してなる硬化物である。
 本発明に係る硬化物は、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を含むバインダー樹脂を含有するマトリックス中に染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む色材が溶解又は分散してなるため、高輝度であり、しかも、平坦性に優れ、現像した場合には現像残渣の発生が抑制されるものであり、カラーフィルタの着色層として好適に用いられる。
III. Cured product of photosensitive colored resin composition Since the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention contains a monomer which is a photopolymerizable compound as a photocurable component, the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention is subjected to a photopolymerization reaction. By doing so, the cured product of the present invention can be obtained. For example, the cured product of the present invention can be obtained by forming a coating film of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, drying the coating film, exposing the coating film, and developing the coating film as necessary. As a method for forming, exposing, and developing a coating film, for example, the same method as that used for forming a colored layer included in the color filter according to the present invention described later can be used.
In a preferred embodiment, the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention also has a polymerizable functional group in a binder resin such as a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. The cured product of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention in such a preferred embodiment is a dye in a matrix produced by a photopolymerization reaction of a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer and a monomer. And a cured product in which a coloring material containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a rake coloring material is dissolved or dispersed.
In the cured product according to the present invention, a coloring material containing at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and rake coloring materials is dissolved or dissolved in a matrix containing a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Since it is dispersed, it has high brightness, excellent flatness, and suppresses the generation of development residue when developed, and is suitably used as a colored layer of a color filter.
IV.カラーフィルタ
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタは、透明基板と、当該透明基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備え、当該着色層の少なくとも1つが本発明に係る感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物であるカラーフィルタである。
 本発明に係るカラーフィルタは、前記着色層の少なくとも一つが、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を含むバインダー樹脂を含有するマトリックス中に染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む色材が溶解又は分散してなる硬化物によって形成されているため、高輝度であり、しかも、平坦性に優れ、現像残渣の発生が抑制された着色層を備えている。
IV. Color filter The color filter according to the present invention includes at least a transparent substrate and a colored layer provided on the transparent substrate, and at least one of the colored layers is a cured product of the photosensitive colored resin composition according to the present invention. A color filter.
In the color filter according to the present invention, at least one of the colored layers is selected from the group consisting of a dye and a lake colorant in a matrix containing a binder resin containing a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer. Since it is formed of a cured product in which a coloring material containing seeds is dissolved or dispersed, it has a colored layer having high brightness, excellent flatness, and suppressed generation of development residue.
 図1は、本発明のカラーフィルタの一例を示す概略断面図である。図1に示した、本発明のカラーフィルタ10は、透明基板1と、遮光部2と、着色層3として赤色着色層3R、緑色着色層3G及び青色着色層3Bとを有している。
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおいて、着色層は、通常、後述する透明基板上の遮光部の開口部に形成され、3色以上の着色パターンから構成される。図3の例では、赤色着色層3R、緑色着色層3G、青色着色層3Bが形成され、所定の順序で配列している。各色の着色層は、赤色着色層3R、緑色着色層3G、青色着色層3Bの順に形成されたものである。
 当該着色層の配列方式は、特に限定されず、例えば、ストライプ型、モザイク型、トライアングル型、4画素配置型等の一般的な配列とすることができる。また、着色層の幅、面積等は任意に設定することができる。
 当該着色層の厚みは、塗布方法、着色樹脂組成物の固形分濃度や粘度等を調整することにより、適宜制御されるが、通常、1μm以上5μm以下の範囲であることが好ましい。
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the color filter of the present invention. The color filter 10 of the present invention shown in FIG. 1 has a transparent substrate 1, a light-shielding portion 2, and a red colored layer 3R, a green colored layer 3G, and a blue colored layer 3B as the colored layer 3.
In the color filter of the present invention, the colored layer is usually formed in the opening of the light-shielding portion on the transparent substrate described later, and is composed of three or more colored patterns. In the example of FIG. 3, the red colored layer 3R, the green colored layer 3G, and the blue colored layer 3B are formed and arranged in a predetermined order. The colored layer of each color is formed in the order of the red colored layer 3R, the green colored layer 3G, and the blue colored layer 3B.
The arrangement method of the colored layer is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a general arrangement such as a stripe type, a mosaic type, a triangle type, and a 4-pixel arrangement type. Further, the width, area and the like of the colored layer can be arbitrarily set.
The thickness of the colored layer is appropriately controlled by adjusting the coating method, the solid content concentration, the viscosity, and the like of the colored resin composition, but it is usually preferably in the range of 1 μm or more and 5 μm or less.
 個々の色の着色層は、次のような手順により形成することができる。先ず、感光性着色樹脂組成物を、スプレーコート法、ディップコート法、バーコート法、ロールコート法、スピンコート法などの塗布手段を用いて、予め遮光部を形成しておいた透明基板上に塗布して、ウェット塗膜を形成させる。
 次いで、ホットプレートやオーブンなどを用いて、該ウェット塗膜を乾燥させたのち、これに、所定のパターンのマスクを介して露光し、バインダー樹脂及びモノマー等を光重合反応させて、感光性の塗膜とする。露光に使用される光源としては、例えば低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプなどの紫外線、電子線等が挙げられる。露光量は、使用する光源や塗膜の厚みなどによって適宜調整される。
 また、露光後に重合反応を促進させるために、加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱条件は、使用する着色樹脂組成物中の各成分の配合割合や、塗膜の厚み等によって適宜選択される。
Colored layers of individual colors can be formed by the following procedure. First, the photosensitive colored resin composition is applied onto a transparent substrate on which a light-shielding portion is previously formed by using a coating means such as a spray coating method, a dip coating method, a bar coating method, a roll coating method, and a spin coating method. Apply to form a wet coating.
Next, the wet coating film is dried using a hot plate, an oven, or the like, and then exposed to the wet coating film through a mask having a predetermined pattern, and the binder resin, the monomer, or the like is subjected to a photopolymerization reaction to make the wet coating film photosensitive. Use as a coating. Examples of the light source used for exposure include ultraviolet rays such as low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps, electron beams, and the like. The exposure amount is appropriately adjusted depending on the light source used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
In addition, heat treatment may be performed in order to accelerate the polymerization reaction after exposure. The heating conditions are appropriately selected depending on the mixing ratio of each component in the colored resin composition to be used, the thickness of the coating film, and the like.
 次に、現像液を用いて現像処理し、未露光部分を溶解、除去することにより、所望のパターンで塗膜が形成される。現像液としては、通常、水や水溶性溶剤にアルカリを溶解させた溶液が用いられる。このアルカリ溶液には、界面活性剤などを適量添加してもよい。また、現像方法は一般的な方法を採用することができる。
 現像処理後は、通常、現像液の洗浄、着色樹脂組成物の硬化塗膜の乾燥が行われ、着色層が形成される。なお、現像処理後に、塗膜を十分に硬化させるために加熱処理を行ってもよい。加熱条件としては特に限定はなく、塗膜の用途に応じて適宜選択される。
Next, a coating film is formed in a desired pattern by developing with a developing solution to dissolve and remove the unexposed portion. As the developing solution, a solution obtained by dissolving an alkali in water or a water-soluble solvent is usually used. An appropriate amount of a surfactant or the like may be added to this alkaline solution. Further, a general method can be adopted as the developing method.
After the development treatment, the developer is usually washed and the cured coating film of the colored resin composition is dried to form a colored layer. After the development treatment, a heat treatment may be performed in order to sufficiently cure the coating film. The heating conditions are not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the intended use of the coating film.
[遮光部]
 本発明のカラーフィルタにおける遮光部は、基板上にパターン状に形成されるものであって、一般的なカラーフィルタに遮光部として用いられるものと同様とすることができる。
 当該遮光部のパターン形状としては、特に限定されず、例えば、ストライプ状、マトリクス状等の形状が挙げられる。遮光部は、スパッタリング法、真空蒸着法等によるクロム等の金属薄膜であっても良い。或いは、遮光部は、樹脂バインダー中にカーボン微粒子、金属酸化物、無機顔料、有機顔料等の遮光性粒子を含有させた樹脂層であってもよい。遮光性粒子を含有させた樹脂層の場合には、感光性レジストを用いて現像によりパターニングする方法、遮光性粒子を含有するインクジェットインクを用いてパターニングする方法、感光性レジストを熱転写する方法等がある。
 遮光部の膜厚としては、金属薄膜の場合は0.2μm以上0.4μm以下程度で設定され、黒色顔料をバインダー樹脂中に分散又は溶解させたものである場合は0.5μm以上2μm以下程度で設定される。
[Shading part]
The light-shielding portion in the color filter of the present invention is formed in a pattern on the substrate, and can be the same as that used as the light-shielding portion in a general color filter.
The pattern shape of the light-shielding portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a stripe shape and a matrix shape. The light-shielding portion may be a metal thin film such as chromium obtained by a sputtering method, a vacuum vapor deposition method, or the like. Alternatively, the light-shielding portion may be a resin layer in which light-shielding particles such as carbon fine particles, metal oxides, inorganic pigments, and organic pigments are contained in the resin binder. In the case of a resin layer containing light-shielding particles, a method of patterning by development using a photosensitive resist, a method of patterning using an inkjet ink containing light-shielding particles, a method of thermally transferring a photosensitive resist, etc. be.
The film thickness of the light-shielding portion is set to about 0.2 μm or more and 0.4 μm or less in the case of a metal thin film, and about 0.5 μm or more and 2 μm or less in the case of a black pigment dispersed or dissolved in a binder resin. Set in.
[透明基板]
 透明基板としては、可視光に対して透明な基材であればよく、特に限定されず、一般的なカラーフィルタに用いられる透明基板を使用することができる。具体的には、石英ガラス、無アルカリガラス、合成石英板等の可撓性のない透明なリジッド材、あるいは、透明樹脂フィルム、光学用樹脂板、フレキシブルガラス等の可撓性やフレキシブル性を有する透明なフレキシブル材が挙げられる。このようなカラーフィルタに用いられる透明基板は、通常、表面に極性基を有する。
 本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物の基板密着性が向上する点から、透明基板としては、石英ガラス、無アルカリガラス、合成石英板等の二酸化ケイ素を含む基板であることが好ましい。
 当該透明基板の厚みは、特に限定されるものではないが、カラーフィルタの用途に応じて、例えば50μm以上1mm以下程度のものを使用することができる。
 なお、本発明のカラーフィルタは、上記透明基板、遮光部及び着色層以外にも、例えば、オーバーコート層や透明電極層、さらには液晶材料を配向させるための配向膜や、柱状スペーサ等が形成されたものであってもよい。本発明のカラーフィルタは、前記例示された構成に限定されるものではなく、一般的にカラーフィルタに用いられている公知の構成を適宜選択して用いることができる。
[Transparent board]
The transparent substrate may be a substrate that is transparent to visible light, and is not particularly limited, and a transparent substrate used for a general color filter can be used. Specifically, it has flexibility and flexibility such as inflexible transparent rigid material such as quartz glass, non-alkali glass, and synthetic quartz plate, or transparent resin film, optical resin plate, flexible glass, and the like. A transparent flexible material can be mentioned. The transparent substrate used for such a color filter usually has a polar group on the surface.
From the viewpoint of improving the substrate adhesion of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the transparent substrate is preferably a substrate containing silicon dioxide such as quartz glass, non-alkali glass, and synthetic quartz plate.
The thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, but for example, one having a thickness of 50 μm or more and 1 mm or less can be used depending on the use of the color filter.
In addition to the transparent substrate, light-shielding portion, and colored layer, the color filter of the present invention forms, for example, an overcoat layer, a transparent electrode layer, an alignment film for orienting a liquid crystal material, a columnar spacer, and the like. It may be the one that has been done. The color filter of the present invention is not limited to the above-exemplified configuration, and a known configuration generally used for a color filter can be appropriately selected and used.
V.表示装置
 本発明に係る表示装置は、前記本発明に係るカラーフィルタを有することを特徴とする。本発明において表示装置の構成は特に限定されず、従来公知の表示装置の中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、液晶表示装置や、有機発光表示装置などが挙げられる。
V. Display device The display device according to the present invention is characterized by having the color filter according to the present invention. In the present invention, the configuration of the display device is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from conventionally known display devices, and examples thereof include a liquid crystal display device and an organic light emitting display device.
 [液晶表示装置]
 本発明の液晶表示装置は、前述した本発明に係るカラーフィルタと、対向基板と、前記カラーフィルタと前記対向基板との間に形成された液晶層とを有することを特徴とする。
 図2は、本発明の表示装置に属する液晶表示装置の一例を示す概略図である。図2に例示するように本発明の液晶表示装置40は、カラーフィルタ10と、TFTアレイ基板等を有する対向基板20と、上記カラーフィルタ10と上記対向基板20との間に形成された液晶層30とを有している。
 なお、本発明の液晶表示装置は、この図2に示される構成に限定されるものではなく、一般的にカラーフィルタが用いられた液晶表示装置として公知の構成とすることができる。
[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device of the present invention is characterized by having the above-mentioned color filter according to the present invention, a facing substrate, and a liquid crystal layer formed between the color filter and the facing substrate.
FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device belonging to the display device of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 40 of the present invention has a liquid crystal layer formed between a color filter 10, a facing substrate 20 having a TFT array substrate and the like, and the color filter 10 and the facing substrate 20. It has 30 and.
The liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 2, and can be generally known as a liquid crystal display device using a color filter.
 本発明の液晶表示装置の駆動方式としては、特に限定はなく一般的に液晶表示装置に用いられている駆動方式を採用することができる。このような駆動方式としては、例えば、TN方式、IPS方式、OCB方式、及びMVA方式等を挙げることができる。本発明においてはこれらのいずれの方式であっても好適に用いることができる。
 また、対向基板としては、本発明の液晶表示装置の駆動方式等に応じて適宜選択して用いることができる。
 液晶層の形成方法としては、一般に液晶セルの作製方法として用いられる方法を使用することができ、例えば、真空注入方式や液晶滴下方式等が挙げられる。
The drive method of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a drive method generally used for the liquid crystal display device can be adopted. Examples of such a drive system include a TN system, an IPS system, an OCB system, an MVA system, and the like. In the present invention, any of these methods can be suitably used.
Further, as the facing substrate, it can be appropriately selected and used according to the drive method and the like of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention.
As a method for forming the liquid crystal layer, a method generally used as a method for producing a liquid crystal cell can be used, and examples thereof include a vacuum injection method and a liquid crystal dropping method.
 [有機発光表示装置]
 本発明に係る有機発光表示装置は、前述した本発明に係るカラーフィルタと、有機発光体とを有することを特徴とする。
 図3は、本発明の表示装置に属する有機発光表示装置の一例を示す概略図である。図3に例示するように本発明の有機発光表示装置100は、カラーフィルタ10と、有機発光体80とを有している。カラーフィルタ10と、有機発光体80との間に、有機保護層50や無機酸化膜60を有していても良い。
[Organic light emission display device]
The organic light emitting display device according to the present invention is characterized by having the above-mentioned color filter according to the present invention and an organic light emitting body.
FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing an example of an organic light emitting display device belonging to the display device of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the organic light emitting display device 100 of the present invention has a color filter 10 and an organic light emitting body 80. An organic protective layer 50 or an inorganic oxide film 60 may be provided between the color filter 10 and the organic light emitter 80.
 有機発光体80の積層方法としては、例えば、カラーフィルタ上面へ透明陽極71、正孔注入層72、正孔輸送層73、発光層74、電子注入層75、および陰極76を逐次形成していく方法や、別基板上へ形成した有機発光体80を無機酸化膜60上に貼り合わせる方法などが挙げられる。有機発光体80における、透明陽極71、正孔注入層72、正孔輸送層73、発光層74、電子注入層75、および陰極76、その他の構成は、公知のものを適宜用いることができる。このようにして作製された有機発光表示装置100は、例えば、パッシブ駆動方式の有機ELディスプレイにもアクティブ駆動方式の有機ELディスプレイにも適用可能である。
 なお、本発明の有機発光表示装置は、この図3に示される構成に限定されるものではなく、一般的にカラーフィルタが用いられた有機発光表示装置として公知の構成とすることができる。
As a method of laminating the organic light emitting body 80, for example, a transparent anode 71, a hole injection layer 72, a hole transport layer 73, a light emitting layer 74, an electron injection layer 75, and a cathode 76 are sequentially formed on the upper surface of a color filter. Examples thereof include a method and a method in which an organic light emitter 80 formed on another substrate is bonded onto an inorganic oxide film 60. As the transparent anode 71, the hole injection layer 72, the hole transport layer 73, the light emitting layer 74, the electron injection layer 75, the cathode 76, and other configurations of the organic light emitter 80, known ones can be appropriately used. The organic light emitting display device 100 produced in this way can be applied to, for example, both a passive drive type organic EL display and an active drive type organic EL display.
The organic light emitting display device of the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 3, and can be generally known as an organic light emitting display device using a color filter.
 以下、本発明について実施例を示して具体的に説明する。これらの記載により本発明を制限するものではない。
 重量平均分子量(Mw)は、上述の本発明の測定方法に従って、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)により標準ポリスチレン換算値として求めた。
 酸価及び水酸基価は、JIS K 0070:1992に準ずる方法により求めた。
 各製造例で製造されたバインダー樹脂の粘度は、得られたバインダー樹脂溶液(固形分40質量%)を、圧力20~30hPa、温度80℃の条件で減圧乾燥し、固形分濃度が60質量%になるまで濃縮させた後、90℃の湯浴で循環加熱して、B型粘度計を用いて求めた。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples. These descriptions do not limit the present invention.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) was determined as a standard polystyrene-equivalent value by GPC (gel permeation chromatography) according to the above-mentioned measuring method of the present invention.
The acid value and the hydroxyl value were determined by a method according to JIS K 0070: 1992.
The viscosity of the binder resin produced in each production example is such that the obtained binder resin solution (solid content 40% by mass) is dried under reduced pressure under the conditions of a pressure of 20 to 30 hPa and a temperature of 80 ° C., and the solid content concentration is 60% by mass. After concentrating until it became, the mixture was circulated and heated in a hot water bath at 90 ° C., and determined using a B-type viscometer.
(合成例1:レーキ色材1の合成)
(1)中間体1の合成
 特開2018-3013号公報に記載の中間体A-2、中間体B-1、及び化合物1-3の製造方法を参照して、下記化学式(a)で示される中間体1を得た(収率87%)。
 得られた化合物は、下記の分析結果より目的の化合物であることを確認した。
・MS(ESI) (m/z):677(+)、2価
・元素分析値:CHN実測値 (81.81%、7.31%、5.85%);理論値(81.77%、7.36%、5.90%)
(Synthesis example 1: Synthesis of rake coloring material 1)
(1) Synthesis of Intermediate 1 Refer to the methods for producing Intermediate A-2, Intermediate B-1 and Compound 1-3 described in JP-A-2018-3013, which are represented by the following chemical formula (a). Intermediate 1 was obtained (yield 87%).
It was confirmed from the following analysis results that the obtained compound was the target compound.
-MS (ESI) (m / z): 677 (+), divalent / elemental analysis value: CHN measured value (81.81%, 7.31%, 5.85%); theoretical value (81.77%) , 7.36%, 5.90%)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(2)レーキ色材1の合成
 関東化学製12タングストリン酸・n水和物2.59g(0.76mmol)をメタノール40mL、水40mLの混合液に加熱溶解させ、前記中間体1 1.6g(1.19mmol)を加え、1時間攪拌した。沈殿物を濾取し、水で洗浄した。得られた沈殿物を減圧乾燥して下記化学式(b)で示されるレーキ色材1を(収率95%)得た。
 得られた化合物は、下記の分析結果より目的の化合物であることを確認した。
・31P NMR(d-dmso、ppm)δ-15.15
・MS(MALDI) (m/z):1355(M)、2879(MH
・元素分析値:CHN実測値 (35.55%、3.24%、2.61%);理論値(35.61%、3.20%、2.57%)
・蛍光X線分析:MoW実測比 (0%、100%);理論値(0%、100%)
(2) Synthesis of rake colorant 1 2.59 g (0.76 mmol) of 12 tongue steric acid / n hydrate manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. was dissolved by heating in a mixed solution of 40 mL of methanol and 40 mL of water, and the intermediate 1 1.6 g. (1.19 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with water. The obtained precipitate was dried under reduced pressure to obtain a rake coloring material 1 represented by the following chemical formula (b) (yield 95%).
It was confirmed from the following analysis results that the obtained compound was the target compound.
31P NMR (d-dmso, ppm) δ-15.15
-MS (MALDI) (m / z): 1355 (M + ), 2879 ( MH2- )
-Elemental analysis value: CHN measured value (35.55%, 3.24%, 2.61%); theoretical value (35.61%, 3.20%, 2.57%)
-Fluorescent X-ray analysis: MoW actual measurement ratio (0%, 100%); theoretical value (0%, 100%)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
(合成例2:キサンテン系染料1の合成)
 500mlの4つ口フラスコに、下記化学式(c)で表されるスルホフルオラン化合物40.2質量部、メタノール312質量部、2,6-キシリジン6.8質量部及びN-メチル-o-トルイジン6.0質量部を仕込み、30時間還流させた。この反応液を60℃でろ過して不溶解分を除いた後、反応液が約70mlになるまで減圧下で溶媒を除き、6%塩酸200質量部に注いだ。次いで、水600質量部を加えて室温で30分間攪拌した後、ウェットケーキをろ取した。このウェットケーキを100質量部の水に懸濁させて60℃で2時間攪拌した後、再びろ取して60℃の湯で水洗後、乾燥させることにより、下記化学式で表されるキサンテン系染料1を27.4質量部得た。
(Synthesis Example 2: Synthesis of Xanthene Dye 1)
In a 500 ml four-necked flask, 40.2 parts by mass of the sulfofluorane compound represented by the following chemical formula (c), 312 parts by mass of methanol, 6.8 parts by mass of 2,6-xylidine and N-methyl-o-toluidine. 6.0 parts by mass was charged and refluxed for 30 hours. After filtering this reaction solution at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble matter, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure until the reaction solution became about 70 ml, and the mixture was poured into 200 parts by mass of 6% hydrochloric acid. Then, 600 parts by mass of water was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, and then the wet cake was collected by filtration. This wet cake is suspended in 100 parts by mass of water, stirred at 60 ° C. for 2 hours, collected again, washed with hot water at 60 ° C., and dried to obtain a xanthene dye represented by the following chemical formula. 1 was obtained in an amount of 27.4 parts by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
(合成例3:キサンテン系染料2の合成)
 500mlの4つ口フラスコに、上記化学式(c)で表されるスルホフルオラン化合物18.0質量部、メタノール312質量部、2,6-キシリジン5.4質量部及びo-トルイジン4.8質量部を仕込み、30時間還流させた。この反応液を60℃でろ過して不溶解分を除いた後、反応液が約70mlになるまで減圧下で溶媒を除き、6%塩酸200質量部に注いだ。次いで、水600質量部を加えて室温で30分間攪拌した後、ウェットケーキをろ取した。このウェットケーキを100質量部の水に懸濁させて60℃で2時間攪拌した後、再びろ取して60℃の湯で水洗後、乾燥させることにより、下記化学式で表される中間体I-1を21.9質量部得た。
(Synthesis Example 3: Synthesis of Xanthene Dye 2)
In a 500 ml four-necked flask, 18.0 parts by mass of the sulfofluorane compound represented by the above chemical formula (c), 312 parts by mass of methanol, 5.4 parts by mass of 2,6-xylidine and 4.8 parts by mass of o-toluidine. The parts were charged and refluxed for 30 hours. After filtering this reaction solution at 60 ° C. to remove insoluble matter, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure until the reaction solution became about 70 ml, and the mixture was poured into 200 parts by mass of 6% hydrochloric acid. Then, 600 parts by mass of water was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, and then the wet cake was collected by filtration. This wet cake is suspended in 100 parts by mass of water, stirred at 60 ° C. for 2 hours, collected again, washed with hot water at 60 ° C., and dried to obtain an intermediate I represented by the following chemical formula. -1 was obtained in an amount of 21.9 parts by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 次に、上記中間体I-1 20質量部、1-メチル-2-ピロリジノン135.3質量部、炭酸カリウム7.8質量部およびヨウ化メチル16.2質量部の混合物を80℃で2時間、撹拌をした。反応終了後、反応溶液を室温まで放冷した後、反応溶液を0~10℃の17.5%塩酸541.2質量部に滴下して1時間、撹拌をした。その後、析出物をろ取して、残渣を60℃で24時間、乾燥することにより、結晶20.4質量部を得た。
 得られた結晶20質量部及びオキシ塩化リン106質量部をフラスコへ入れ、60℃で2時間撹拌した。得られた反応溶液を室温まで放冷し、氷水1500質量部へ反応液を滴下し、30分撹拌した。得られた結晶を濾別し、水200質量部で洗浄し、乾燥を10時間行った。この結晶7質量部、トリフルオロメチルスルホンアミド1.8質量部をクロロホルム40質量部に溶解させ、トリエチルアミン1.55質量部を滴下して、室温で1時間撹拌した。その後得られた反応溶液に水100質量部を入れて水洗し、次いで有機層を分取した。有機層を硫酸ナトリウムにて乾燥させて精製し、減圧濃縮して下記化学式で表されるキサンテン系染料2を6.8質量部得た(収率80%)。
Next, a mixture of 20 parts by mass of the intermediate I-1, 135.3 parts by mass of 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, 7.8 parts by mass of potassium carbonate and 16.2 parts by mass of methyl iodide was added at 80 ° C. for 2 hours. , Stirred. After completion of the reaction, the reaction solution was allowed to cool to room temperature, and then the reaction solution was added dropwise to 541.2 parts by mass of 17.5% hydrochloric acid at 0 to 10 ° C. and stirred for 1 hour. Then, the precipitate was collected by filtration and the residue was dried at 60 ° C. for 24 hours to obtain 20.4 parts by mass of crystals.
20 parts by mass of the obtained crystals and 106 parts by mass of phosphorus oxychloride were placed in a flask and stirred at 60 ° C. for 2 hours. The obtained reaction solution was allowed to cool to room temperature, the reaction solution was added dropwise to 1500 parts by mass of ice water, and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes. The obtained crystals were separated by filtration, washed with 200 parts by mass of water, and dried for 10 hours. 7 parts by mass of the crystal and 1.8 parts by mass of trifluoromethylsulfonamide were dissolved in 40 parts by mass of chloroform, 1.55 parts by mass of triethylamine was added dropwise, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Then, 100 parts by mass of water was added to the obtained reaction solution and washed with water, and then the organic layer was separated. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, purified, and concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain 6.8 parts by mass of the xanthene dye 2 represented by the following chemical formula (yield 80%).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
(合成例4:キサンテン系金属レーキ色材3の合成)
 Acid Red 289 5.0質量部を水500mlに加え、80℃で溶解させ、染料溶液を調製した。ポリ塩化アルミニウム(「商品名:タキバイン#1500」多木化学社製、Al(OH)Cl、塩基度83.5質量%、アルミナ分として23.5質量%)3.85質量部を水200mlに入れ、80℃で攪拌し、ポリ塩化アルミニウム水溶液を調製した。調製したポリ塩化アルミニウム水溶液を、80℃で15分かけて前記染料溶液に滴下し、さらに80℃で1時間攪拌した。生成した沈殿物を濾取し、水で洗浄した。得られたケーキを乾燥して、キサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材であるキサンテン系金属レーキ色材3を6.30質量部(収率96.2%)得た。
(Synthesis Example 4: Synthesis of Xanthene Metal Lake Coloring Material 3)
Acid Red 289 5.0 parts by mass was added to 500 ml of water and dissolved at 80 ° C. to prepare a dye solution. Polyaluminum chloride (“Takibine # 1500” manufactured by Taki Chemical Co., Ltd., Al 2 (OH) 5 Cl, basicity 83.5% by mass, alumina content 23.5% by mass) 3.85 parts by mass of water The mixture was placed in 200 ml and stirred at 80 ° C. to prepare a polyaluminum chloride aqueous solution. The prepared aqueous solution of polyaluminum chloride was added dropwise to the dye solution at 80 ° C. over 15 minutes, and the mixture was further stirred at 80 ° C. for 1 hour. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with water. The obtained cake was dried to obtain 6.30 parts by mass (yield 96.2%) of a xanthene-based metal lake coloring material 3 which is a metal lake coloring material of a xanthene dye.
(合成例5:塩基性処理PB15:6の合成)
 反応容器中、クロロスルホン酸300質量部および銅フタロシアニン30質量部を加え、完全に溶解した後、塩化チオニル24質量部を加え、徐々に昇温して101℃で3時間反応させた。その反応液を氷水9000質量部中に注入し、撹拌後、濾過、水洗した。得られたプレスケーキを水300質量部でスラリーとした後、1,1-ジエチル-1,5-ジアザペンタン13質量部を加え、65℃で4時間撹拌した後、濾過、水洗、乾燥し、表面処理に用いられる塩基性部位を有する青色色材誘導体1を得た。得られた塩基性部位を有する青色色材誘導体1について、下記化学式(d)の構造であることを確認した。
・TOF-MS:768.35
(Synthesis Example 5: Synthesis of basic treatment PB15: 6)
In the reaction vessel, 300 parts by mass of chlorosulfonic acid and 30 parts by mass of copper phthalocyanine were added, and after complete dissolution, 24 parts by mass of thionyl chloride was added, the temperature was gradually raised, and the reaction was carried out at 101 ° C. for 3 hours. The reaction solution was poured into 9000 parts by mass of ice water, stirred, filtered, and washed with water. The obtained press cake was made into a slurry with 300 parts by mass of water, 13 parts by mass of 1,1-diethyl-1,5-diazapentane was added, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours, filtered, washed with water, dried and surfaced. A blue color material derivative 1 having a basic moiety used for the treatment was obtained. It was confirmed that the obtained blue color material derivative 1 having a basic moiety had the structure of the following chemical formula (d).
-TOF-MS: 768.35
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 市販のC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6(ε型銅フタロシアニン顔料、DIC製 FASTOGEN BLUE A510)100質量部と、前記塩基性部位を有する青色色材誘導体1の5質量部とをアトライターで60℃にて1.5時間乾式粉砕した。この粉砕生成物に、更に前記塩基性部位を有する青色色材誘導体1の5質量部を混合することにより、塩基性処理されたC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6である、塩基性処理PB15:6を得た。 Commercially available C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 (ε-type copper phthalocyanine pigment, DIC FASTOGEN BLUE A510) 100 parts by mass and 5 parts by mass of the blue color material derivative 1 having the basic moiety are 1.5 by mass at 60 ° C. with an attritor. Time-dried crushed. C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6, basic treatment PB 15: 6 was obtained.
(合成例6:酸性分散剤A1(前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体)の合成)
 (1)マクロモノマーMM-1の合成
 冷却管、添加用ロート、窒素用インレット、機械的攪拌機、デジタル温度計を備えた反応器に、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(略称PGMEA)80.0質量部を仕込み、窒素気流下攪拌しながら、温度90℃に加温した。メタクリル酸メチル50.0質量部、メタクリル酸-n-ブチル30.0質量部、メタクリル酸ベンジル20.0質量部、2-メルカプトエタノール4.0質量部、PGMEA30質量部、α,α’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(略称AIBN)1.0質量部の混合溶液を1.5時間かけて滴下し、さらに3時間反応した。次に、窒素気流を止めて、この反応溶液を80℃に冷却し、カレンズMOI(昭和電工製)8.74質量部、ジラウリン酸ジブチルすず0.125質量部、p-メトキシフェノール0.125質量部、及びPGMEA10質量部、を加えて3時間攪拌することで、マクロモノマーMM-1の49.5質量%溶液を得た。得られたマクロモノマーMM-1は、GPC測定の結果、重量平均分子量(Mw)4010、数平均分子量(Mn)1910、分子量分布(Mw/Mn)2.10であった。
(Synthesis Example 6: Synthesis of Acid Dispersant A1 (Polymer having a Structural Unit Represented by the General Formula (I)))
(1) Synthesis of macromonomer MM-1 80.0 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (abbreviated as PGMEA) was added to a reactor equipped with a cooling tube, an addition funnel, an inlet for nitrogen, a mechanical stirrer, and a digital thermometer. The mixture was charged and heated to a temperature of 90 ° C. while stirring under a nitrogen stream. Methyl methacrylate 50.0 parts by mass, methacrylic acid-n-butyl 30.0 parts by mass, benzyl methacrylate 20.0 parts by mass, 2-mercaptoethanol 4.0 parts by mass, PGMEA 30 parts by mass, α, α'-azo A mixed solution of 1.0 part by mass of bisisobutyronitrile (abbreviated as AIBN) was added dropwise over 1.5 hours, and the reaction was further carried out for 3 hours. Next, the nitrogen stream was stopped and the reaction solution was cooled to 80 ° C., and the reaction solution was cooled to 8.74 parts by mass of Karenz MOI (Showa Denko), 0.125 parts by mass of dibutyltin dilaurate, and 0.125 parts by mass of p-methoxyphenol. A 49.5% by mass solution of macromonomer MM-1 was obtained by adding 10 parts by mass and 10 parts by mass of PGMEA and stirring for 3 hours. As a result of GPC measurement, the obtained macromonomer MM-1 had a weight average molecular weight (Mw) 4010, a number average molecular weight (Mn) 1910, and a molecular weight distribution (Mw / Mn) 2.10.
(2)グラフト共重合体A1の合成
 冷却管、添加用ロート、窒素用インレット、機械的攪拌機、デジタル温度計を備えた反応器に、PGMEA85.0質量部を仕込み、窒素気流下攪拌しながら、温度90℃に加温した。前記マクロモノマーMM-1溶液67.34質量部(固形分33.33質量部)、メタクリル酸グリシジル(略称GMA)16.67質量部、n-ドデシルメルカプタン1.24質量部、PGMEA25.0質量部、AIBN0.5質量部の混合溶液を1.5時間かけて滴下し、3時間加熱攪拌したのち、AIBN0.10質量部、PGMEA10.0質量部の混合液を10分かけて滴下し、さらに同温で1時間熟成することで、グラフト共重合体A1の25.0質量%溶液を得た。得られたグラフト共重合体A1は、GPC測定の結果、重量平均分子量(Mw)10570、数平均分子量(Mn)4370、分子量分布(Mw/Mn)2.42であった。
(2) Synthesis of graft copolymer A1 A reactor equipped with a cooling tube, a funnel for addition, an inlet for nitrogen, a mechanical stirrer, and a digital thermometer was charged with 85.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, and the mixture was stirred under a nitrogen stream. It was heated to a temperature of 90 ° C. 67.34 parts by mass (solid content 33.33 parts by mass), 16.67 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate (abbreviated as GMA), 1.24 parts by mass of n-dodecyl mercaptan, 25.0 parts by mass of PGMEA. , A mixed solution of 0.5 part by mass of AIBN was added dropwise over 1.5 hours, heated and stirred for 3 hours, and then a mixed solution of 0.10 part by mass of AIBN and 10.0 parts by mass of PGMEA was added dropwise over 10 minutes. By aging at warm temperature for 1 hour, a 25.0% by mass solution of the graft copolymer A1 was obtained. As a result of GPC measurement, the obtained graft copolymer A1 had a weight average molecular weight (Mw) 10570, a number average molecular weight (Mn) 4370, and a molecular weight distribution (Mw / Mn) 2.42.
(3)前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体(酸性分散剤A1)の製造
 冷却管、添加用ロート、窒素用インレット、機械的攪拌機、デジタル温度計を備えた反応器に、PGMEA27.80質量部、フェニルホスホン酸(製品名「PPA」日産化学製)9.27質量部を仕込み、窒素気流下攪拌しながら、温度90℃に加温した。前記グラフト共重合体A1の100.0質量部を30分かけて滴下し、2時間加熱攪拌することで、前記一般式(I)で表される構成単位を有する重合体(酸性分散剤A1)溶液(固形分25.0質量%)を得た。得られた酸性分散剤A1のGMAとPPAのエステル化反応の進行は、酸価測定とH-NMR測定によって確認した(エポキシ由来のピークが消失していることを確認した)。得られた酸性分散剤A1の酸価は98mgKOH/gであった。
(3) Production of a polymer (acid dispersant A1) having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) A reactor equipped with a cooling tube, a funnel for addition, an inlet for nitrogen, a mechanical stirrer, and a digital thermometer. 2.80 parts by mass of PGMEA and 9.27 parts by mass of phenylphosphonic acid (product name "PPA" manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were charged and heated to a temperature of 90 ° C. while stirring under a nitrogen stream. A polymer having a structural unit represented by the general formula (I) (acidic dispersant A1) is obtained by dropping 100.0 parts by mass of the graft copolymer A1 over 30 minutes and heating and stirring for 2 hours. A solution (solid content 25.0% by mass) was obtained. The progress of the esterification reaction between GMA and PPA of the obtained acidic dispersant A1 was confirmed by acid value measurement and 1 H-NMR measurement (it was confirmed that the epoxy-derived peak had disappeared). The acid value of the obtained acid dispersant A1 was 98 mgKOH / g.
(合成例7:酸性分散剤B1(カルボキシ基含有エチレン性不飽和モノマー由来の構成単位を含むAブロックと(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル由来の構成単位を含むBブロックとを含むブロック共重合体)の合成)
 国際公開第2016/132863号に記載の実施例1を参照し、メタクリル酸メチル(MMA)20質量部、メタクリル酸n-ブチル(BMA)40質量部のブロックと、メタクリル酸(MAA)20質量部、BMA20質量部のブロックと、MMA20質量部、BMA40質量部のブロックとを有する、トリブロック共重合体を合成した。得られたブロック共重合体は、重量平均分子量(Mw)が11000、分子量分布(Mw/Mn)が1.50、酸価が130mgKOH/gであった。
(Synthesis Example 7: Block copolymer containing an acidic dispersant B1 (A block containing a structural unit derived from a carboxy group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer) and a B block containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester). Synthesis)
With reference to Example 1 described in WO 2016/132863, a block of 20 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate (MMA), 40 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate (BMA), and 20 parts by mass of methacrylic acid (MAA). , A triblock copolymer having 20 parts by mass of BMA and 20 parts by mass of MMA and 40 parts by mass of BMA was synthesized. The obtained block copolymer had a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 11000, a molecular weight distribution (Mw / Mn) of 1.50, and an acid value of 130 mgKOH / g.
(合成例8:アルカリ可溶性樹脂Aの合成)
 重合槽に、PGMEAを150質量部仕込み、窒素雰囲気下で100℃に昇温した後、メタクリル酸(MAA)22質量部、メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル(CHMA)64質量部、及び光開始剤としてパーブチルO(日油株式会社製)6質量部、連鎖移動剤(n-ドデシルメルカプタン)2質量部を1.5時間かけて連続的に滴下した。その後、100℃を保持して反応を続け、主鎖形成用混合物の滴下終了から2時間後に重合禁止剤として、p-メトキシフェノール0.1質量部を添加して重合を停止した。
 次に、空気を吹き込みながら、エポキシ基含有化合物としてメタクリル酸グリシジル(GMA)14質量部を添加して、110℃に昇温した後、トリエチルアミン0.8質量部を添加して110℃で15時間付加反応させ、アルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液(重量平均分子量(Mw)9,000、酸価90mgKOH/g、固形分40質量%)を得た。
(Synthesis Example 8: Synthesis of Alkali Soluble Resin A)
150 parts by mass of PGMEA was charged in the polymerization tank, the temperature was raised to 100 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere, and then 22 parts by mass of methacrylic acid (MAA), 64 parts by mass of cyclohexyl methacrylate (CHMA), and perbutyl O (perbutyl O) as a photoinitiator. 6 parts by mass of Nichiyu Co., Ltd. and 2 parts by mass of the chain transfer agent (n-dodecyl mercaptan) were continuously added dropwise over 1.5 hours. Then, the reaction was continued at 100 ° C., and 0.1 part by mass of p-methoxyphenol was added as a polymerization inhibitor 2 hours after the completion of dropping of the main chain forming mixture to terminate the polymerization.
Next, while blowing air, 14 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate (GMA) as an epoxy group-containing compound was added, the temperature was raised to 110 ° C., 0.8 part by mass of triethylamine was added, and the temperature was 110 ° C. for 15 hours. The addition reaction was carried out to obtain an alkali-soluble resin A solution (weight average molecular weight (Mw) 9,000, acid value 90 mgKOH / g, solid content 40% by mass).
(合成例9:レーキ色材4の合成)
(1)K(PMoW1762)の調製
 NaWO・2HO(和光純薬工業株式会社製)44.0g、NaMoO・2HO(関東化学株式会社製)1.90gを精製水230gに溶解した。この溶液に85%リン酸64.9gを滴下ロート用いて攪拌しながら添加した。得られた溶液を8時間加熱還流した。反応液を室温に冷却し、臭素水を1滴加え、攪拌しながら塩化カリウム45gを添加した。更に1時間攪拌し後、沈殿物を濾別した。得られた固体を90℃で乾燥させることにより、29.4gのK(PMoW1762)を得た。
(2)レーキ色材4の合成
 C.I.ベーシックブルー7(BB7)(東京化成株式会社製)5.30gを精製水350mlに投入し、40℃で攪拌して溶解し、BB7溶液を調製した。これとは別に、上記(1)で調製したK(PMoW1762)10.0gを精製水40mlに溶解した。BB7溶液に、K(PMoW1762)溶液を投入し、そのまま40℃で1時間攪拌した。次いで、内温を80℃に上げ、更に1時間攪拌しレーキ化を行った。冷却後濾過し、300mlの精製水で3回洗浄した。得られた固体を90℃で乾燥させることにより、黒青色固体で平均一次粒径が40nmの、トリアリールメタン系染料とポリ酸アニオンとのレーキ色材であるレーキ色材4を10.4g得た。
(Synthesis Example 9: Synthesis of Rake Color Material 4)
(1) Preparation of K 6 (P 2 MoW 17 O 62 ) NaWO 4.2H 2 O (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 44.0 g, Na 2 MoO 4.2H 2 O (manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) 1 .90 g was dissolved in 230 g of purified water. 64.9 g of 85% phosphoric acid was added to this solution with stirring using a dropping funnel. The resulting solution was heated to reflux for 8 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, 1 drop of bromine water was added, and 45 g of potassium chloride was added with stirring. After further stirring for 1 hour, the precipitate was filtered off. The obtained solid was dried at 90 ° C. to obtain 29.4 g of K6 ( P2 MoW 17 O 62 ).
(2) Synthesis of rake coloring material 4 C. I. 5.30 g of Basic Blue 7 (BB7) (manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Co., Ltd.) was added to 350 ml of purified water, and the mixture was stirred and dissolved at 40 ° C. to prepare a BB7 solution. Separately, 10.0 g of K6 ( P2 MoW 17 O 62 ) prepared in ( 1 ) above was dissolved in 40 ml of purified water. The K6 (P2 MoW 17 O 62 ) solution was added to the BB7 solution, and the mixture was stirred as it was at 40 ° C. for 1 hour. Then, the internal temperature was raised to 80 ° C., and the mixture was further stirred for 1 hour for rake formation. After cooling, it was filtered and washed 3 times with 300 ml of purified water. By drying the obtained solid at 90 ° C., 10.4 g of a lake color material 4 which is a black-blue solid and has an average primary particle size of 40 nm and is a lake color material of a triarylmethane dye and a polyacid anion is obtained. rice field.
(製造例1:バインダー樹脂1の製造)
 重合槽に、PGMEAを150質量部仕込み、窒素雰囲気下で100℃に昇温した後、メタクリル酸(MAA)26.9質量部、メタクリル酸ベンジル(BzMA)38.9質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート(HEMA)5質量部、及び光開始剤としてパーブチルO(日油株式会社製)1.4質量部、連鎖移動剤(n-ドデシルメルカプタン)2.5質量部を1.5時間かけて連続的に滴下した。その後、100℃を保持して反応を続け、主鎖形成用混合物の滴下終了から2時間後に重合禁止剤として、p-メトキシフェノール0.1質量部を添加して重合を停止した。
 次に、空気を吹き込みながら、エポキシ基含有化合物としてメタクリル酸グリシジル(GMA)29.2質量部を添加して、110℃に昇温した後、トリエチルアミン0.8質量部を添加して110℃で15時間付加反応させ、バインダー樹脂1溶液(重量平均分子量(Mw)14,900、酸価67mgKOH/g、水酸基価129mgKOH/g、固形分40質量%)を得た。
(Manufacturing Example 1: Production of Binder Resin 1)
150 parts by mass of PGMEA was charged in the polymerization tank, the temperature was raised to 100 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere, and then 26.9 parts by mass of methacrylic acid (MAA), 38.9 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate (BzMA), and 2-hydroxyethyl. 5 parts by mass of methacrylate (HEMA), 1.4 parts by mass of perbutyl O (manufactured by Nichiyu Co., Ltd.) as a photoinitiator, and 2.5 parts by mass of chain transfer agent (n-dodecyl mercaptan) continuously over 1.5 hours. Dropped. Then, the reaction was continued at 100 ° C., and 0.1 part by mass of p-methoxyphenol was added as a polymerization inhibitor 2 hours after the completion of dropping of the main chain forming mixture to terminate the polymerization.
Next, while blowing air, 29.2 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate (GMA) as an epoxy group-containing compound was added, the temperature was raised to 110 ° C., and then 0.8 parts by mass of triethylamine was added at 110 ° C. The addition reaction was carried out for 15 hours to obtain one solution of the binder resin (weight average molecular weight (Mw) 14,900, acid value 67 mgKOH / g, hydroxyl value 129 mgKOH / g, solid content 40% by mass).
(製造例2~9、比較製造例1~9:バインダー樹脂2~9、比較バインダー樹脂C1~C9の製造)
 製造例1において、モノマー、光開始剤及び連鎖移動剤の添加量を表1に従って変更した以外は、製造例1と同様にして、製造例2~9のバインダー樹脂2~9溶液、及び比較製造例1~9の比較バインダー樹脂C1~C9溶液(各バインダー樹脂溶液は固形分40質量%)を得た。
(Production Examples 2 to 9, Comparative Production Examples 1 to 9: Binder Resins 2 to 9, Production of Comparative Binder Resins C1 to C9)
In Production Example 1, the binder resin 2-9 solutions of Production Examples 2 to 9 and comparative production were carried out in the same manner as in Production Example 1 except that the addition amounts of the monomer, the photoinitiator and the chain transfer agent were changed according to Table 1. Comparative binder resin C1 to C9 solutions of Examples 1 to 9 (each binder resin solution had a solid content of 40% by mass) were obtained.
(比較製造例10:比較バインダー樹脂C10の製造)
 重合槽にPGMEA150質量部を仕込み、窒素雰囲気下で110℃に昇温した後、t-ブチルシクロヘキシルメタクリレート(t-BuCHMA)81.5質量部、メタクリル酸(MAA)15.0質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート(HEMA)3.5質量部、及び光開始剤としてAIBN3.0質量部を、それぞれ1.5時間かけて連続的に滴下した。その後、110℃を保持して2時間攪拌し、比較バインダー樹脂C10溶液(固形分40質量%)を得た。
(Comparative Production Example 10: Production of Comparative Binder Resin C10)
After charging 150 parts by mass of PGMEA in the polymerization tank and raising the temperature to 110 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere, 81.5 parts by mass of t-butylcyclohexylmethacrylate (t-BuCHMA), 15.0 parts by mass of methacrylic acid (MAA), 2- 3.5 parts by mass of hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA) and 3.0 parts by mass of AIBN as a photoinitiator were continuously added dropwise over 1.5 hours. Then, the mixture was kept at 110 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours to obtain a comparative binder resin C10 solution (solid content 40% by mass).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
(調製例1:レーキ色材1分散液の調製)
 合成例1のレーキ色材1 10質量部と、合成例6の酸性分散剤A1溶液20質量部(有効固形分 5.0質量部)と、合成例8のアルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液7.5質量部(有効固形分3.0質量部)と、PGMEA62.5質量部とを混合し、ペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工製)にて予備分散として2mmジルコニアビーズで1時間、さらに本分散として0.1mmジルコニアビーズで4時間分散し、レーキ色材1分散液を得た。
(Preparation Example 1: Preparation of rake coloring material 1 dispersion)
10 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 of Synthesis Example 1, 20 parts by mass of the acidic dispersant A1 solution of Synthesis Example 6 (effective solid content 5.0 parts by mass), and 7.5 parts by mass of the alkali-soluble resin A solution of Synthesis Example 8. A portion (3.0 parts by mass of effective solid content) and 62.5 parts by mass of PGMEA are mixed, and 2 mm zirconia beads are used as a pre-dispersion in a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Iron Works) for 1 hour, and 0.1 mm zirconia as a main dispersion. The mixture was dispersed with beads for 4 hours to obtain a rake coloring material 1 dispersion.
(調製例2:キサンテン系金属レーキ色材3分散液の調製)
 合成例4のキサンテン系金属レーキ色材3 10質量部と、合成例7の酸性分散剤B1溶液16.7質量部(有効固形分5.0質量部)と、合成例8のアルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液7.5質量部(有効固形分 3.0質量部)と、PGMEA65.8質量部とを混合し、ペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工製)にて予備分散として2mmジルコニアビーズで1時間、さらに本分散として0.1mmジルコニアビーズで4時間分散し、キサンテン系金属レーキ色材3分散液を得た。
(Preparation Example 2: Preparation of xanthene-based metal rake coloring material 3 dispersion)
10 parts by mass of the xanthene-based metal lake coloring material 3 of Synthesis Example 4, 16.7 parts by mass of the acidic dispersant B1 solution of Synthesis Example 7 (effective solid content 5.0 parts by mass), and the alkali-soluble resin A of Synthesis Example 8. 7.5 parts by mass of the solution (3.0 parts by mass of effective solid content) and 65.8 parts by mass of PGMEA are mixed, and a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Iron Works) is used as a pre-dispersion with 2 mm zirconia beads for 1 hour. The mixture was dispersed with 0.1 mm zirconia beads for 4 hours to obtain a xanthene-based metal lake coloring material 3 dispersion.
(調製例3:キサンテン系染料1溶液の調製)
 合成例2のキサンテン系染料1 5.0質量部を、ジアセトンアルコール45質量部に溶解してキサンテン系染料1溶液を得た。
(Preparation Example 3: Preparation of 1 solution of xanthene dye)
1 5.0 parts by mass of the xanthene dye of Synthesis Example 2 was dissolved in 45 parts by mass of diacetone alcohol to obtain 1 solution of the xanthene dye.
(調製例4:キサンテン系染料2溶液の調製)
 合成例3のキサンテン系染料2 5.0質量部を、ジアセトンアルコール45質量部に溶解してキサンテン系染料2溶液を得た。
(Preparation Example 4: Preparation of xanthene dye 2 solution)
5.0 parts by mass of the xanthene dye 2 of Synthesis Example 3 was dissolved in 45 parts by mass of diacetone alcohol to obtain a xanthene dye 2 solution.
(調製例5:PB15:6分散液の調製)
 合成例5の塩基性処理PB15:6 10質量部と、合成例7の酸性分散剤B1溶液16.7質量部(有効固形分5.0質量部)と、合成例8のアルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液7.5質量部(有効固形分3.0質量部)と、PGMEA65.8質量部とを混合し、ペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄工製)にて予備分散として2mmジルコニアビーズで1時間、さらに本分散として0.1mmジルコニアビーズで6時間分散し、PB15:6分散液を得た。
(Preparation Example 5: Preparation of PB15: 6 dispersion)
Basic treatment PB15: 6 10 parts by mass of Synthesis Example 5, 16.7 parts by mass (effective solid content 5.0 parts by mass) of acid dispersant B1 solution of Synthesis Example 7, and alkali-soluble resin A solution of Synthesis Example 8. Mix 7.5 parts by mass (effective solid content 3.0 parts by mass) and 65.8 parts by mass of PGMEA, and use a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Iron Works) as a pre-dispersion for 1 hour with 2 mm zirconia beads, and then as a main dispersion. The mixture was dispersed with 0.1 mm zirconia beads for 6 hours to obtain a PB15: 6 dispersion.
(調製例6:PV23分散液の調製)
 30mlマヨネーズ瓶に市販のC.I.ピグメントバイオレット23(PV23)10重量部、合成例7の酸性分散剤B1溶液16.7質量部(有効固形分5.0質量部)、合成例8のアルカリ可溶性樹脂A溶液7.5質量部(有効固形分3.0質量部)と、PGMEA65.8重量部、径2mmのジルコニアビーズ30重量部を入れ、ペイントシェーカー(浅田鉄鋼製)にて1時間予備解砕した後、混合液を別の30mlマヨネーズ瓶に移し変え、径0.1mmのジルコニアビーズ30重量部を加えてペイントシェーカーにて5時間振とうし、PV23分散液を得た。
(Preparation Example 6: Preparation of PV23 dispersion)
Commercially available C.I. in a 30 ml mayonnaise bottle. I. 10 parts by weight of Pigment Violet 23 (PV23), 16.7 parts by mass of the acidic dispersant B1 solution of Synthesis Example 7 (5.0 parts by mass of effective solid content), 7.5 parts by mass of the alkali-soluble resin A solution of Synthesis Example 8 ( Effective solid content (3.0 parts by mass), PGMEA 65.8 parts by weight, and 30 parts by weight of zirconia beads having a diameter of 2 mm were added, and the mixture was pre-crushed with a paint shaker (manufactured by Asada Steel) for 1 hour, and then the mixed solution was separated. The mixture was transferred to a 30 ml mayonnaise bottle, 30 parts by weight of zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.1 mm was added, and the mixture was shaken with a paint shaker for 5 hours to obtain a PV23 dispersion.
(調製例7:レーキ色材4分散液の調製)
 調製例1において、色材として、合成例1のレーキ色材1 10質量部に代えて、合成例6のレーキ色材4 10質量部を用いた以外は調製例1と同様にして、レーキ色材4の分散液を調製した。
(Preparation Example 7: Preparation of Rake Color Material 4 Dispersion Liquid)
In Preparation Example 1, the rake color is the same as in Preparation Example 1 except that 10 parts by mass of the rake color material 4 of Synthesis Example 6 is used instead of 10 parts by mass of the rake color material 1 of Synthesis Example 1. A dispersion liquid of the material 4 was prepared.
(調製例I:感光性バインダー成分1の調製)
 製造例1のバインダー樹脂1溶液(固形分40質量%)26.5質量部に対して、光重合性化合物としてジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(DPHA)(アロニックスM402(東亜合成製))24.7質量部、光開始剤としてイルガキュア907(BASF製、α-アミノケトン系光開始剤)3.53質量部、カヤキュアーDETX-S(日本化薬製、チオキサントン系光開始剤、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン)0.39質量部、酸化防止剤としてIRGANOX1010(BASF製)0.78質量部、PGMEA44.1質量部を加えて、感光性バインダー成分1を得た。
(Preparation Example I: Preparation of Photosensitive Binder Component 1)
Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (DPHA) (Aronix M402 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic)) 24.7 mass as a photopolymerizable compound with respect to 26.5 parts by mass of the binder resin 1 solution (solid content 40% by mass) of Production Example 1. Irgacure 907 (BASF, α-aminoketone-based photoinitiator) 3.53 parts by mass, KayaCure DETX-S (Nippon Kayaku, thioxanthone-based photoinitiator, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone) 0 A photosensitive binder component 1 was obtained by adding .39 parts by mass, 0.78 parts by mass of IRGANOX1010 (manufactured by BASF) and 44.1 parts by mass of PGMEA as an antioxidant.
(調製例II~IX、比較調製例I~X:感光性バインダー成分2~9、比較感光性バインダー成分1~10の調製)
 調製例Iの感光性バインダー成分1の調製において、製造例1のバインダー樹脂1溶液に代えて、調製例II~IXでは製造例2~9のバインダー樹脂2~9溶液を、比較調製例I~Xでは比較製造例C1~C10の比較バインダー樹脂C1~C10溶液を用いた以外は、調製例Iと同様にして、調製例II~IXでは感光性バインダー成分2~9を得て、比較調製例I~Xでは比較感光性バインダー成分C1~C10を得た。
(Preparation Examples II to IX, Comparative Preparation Examples I to X: Preparation of Photosensitive Binder Components 2 to 9 and Comparative Photosensitive Binder Components 1 to 10)
In the preparation of the photosensitive binder component 1 of Preparation Example I, instead of the binder resin 1 solution of Production Example 1, in Preparation Examples II to IX, the binder resin 2 to 9 solutions of Production Examples 2 to 9 were used, and Comparative Preparation Examples I to In Preparation Examples II to IX, photosensitive binder components 2 to 9 were obtained in the same manner as in Preparation Example I except that the comparative binder resins C1 to C10 solutions of Comparative Production Examples C1 to C10 were used in X, and Comparative Preparation Examples were obtained. In I to X, comparative photosensitive binder components C1 to C10 were obtained.
(実施例1)
 調製例1のレーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部、調製例Iの感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部、界面活性剤メガファックR08MH(DIC製)0.03質量部、PGMEA44.7質量部を混合し、実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Example 1)
23.2 parts by mass of 1 dispersion of rake colorant of Preparation Example 1, 32.1 parts by mass of photosensitive binder component 1 of Preparation Example I, 0.03 parts by mass of surfactant Megafuck R08MH (manufactured by DIC), 44.7 parts by mass of PGMEA The parts by mass were mixed to obtain the photosensitive colored resin composition of Example 1.
(実施例2~9、比較例1~10)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、感光性バインダー成分1に代えて、実施例2~9では感光性バインダー成分2~9を、比較例1~10では比較感光性バインダー成分C1~C10を用いた以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例2~9及び比較例1~10の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Examples 2 to 9, Comparative Examples 1 to 10)
In the preparation of the photosensitive colored resin composition of Example 1, instead of the photosensitive binder component 1, the photosensitive binder components 2 to 9 are used in Examples 2 to 9, and the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 is used in Comparative Examples 1 to 10. The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 2 to 9 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that C10 was used.
(比較例11~12)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、塩基性処理PB15:6とPV23との質量比(塩基性処理PB15:6 :PV23)が86.4:13.6となるように、PB15:6分散液25.5質量部、及びPV23分散液4.0質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、比較例11では感光性バインダー成分2 29.2質量部を、比較例12では比較感光性バインダー成分C5 29.2質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から41.3質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、比較例11~12の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Comparative Examples 11 to 12)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the basic treatment PB15: 6 to PV23 (basic treatment PB15: 6: PV23) was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion. ) Is 86.4: 13.6 by mass of 25.5 parts by mass of PB15: 6 dispersion and 4.0 parts by mass of PV23 dispersion, and further to 32.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component. Instead, in Comparative Example 11, 29.2 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component was used, and in Comparative Example 12, 29.2 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C5 was used, and the amount of PGMEA added was 44.7 parts by mass to 41. The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Comparative Examples 11 to 12 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition was changed to 3 parts by mass.
(実施例10、比較例13~15)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、レーキ色材1とキサンテン系金属レーキ色材3との質量比(レーキ色材1:キサンテン系金属レーキ色材3)が93.0:7.0となるように、レーキ色材1分散液17.6質量部、及びキサンテン系金属レーキ色材3分散液1.32質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、実施例10では感光性バインダー成分2 34.0質量部を、比較例13では比較感光性バインダー成分C1 34.0質量部を、比較例14では比較感光性バインダー成分C4 34.0質量部を、比較例15では比較感光性バインダー成分C6 34.0質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から47.1質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例10及び比較例13~15の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Example 10, Comparative Examples 13 to 15)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the rake coloring material 1 and the xanthene-based metal rake coloring material 3 (lake coloring material 1) was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion. : 17.6 parts by mass of the lake color material 1 dispersion and 1.32 parts by mass of the xanthene metal lake color material 3 dispersion so that the xanthene-based metal lake color material 3) is 93.0: 7.0. Further, instead of the photosensitive binder component 1 32.1 parts by mass, the photosensitive binder component 2 34.0 parts by mass was used in Example 10, and the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 34.0 parts by mass was used in Comparative Example 13. In Comparative Example 14, 34.0 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C4 was used, and in Comparative Example 15, 34.0 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used, and the amount of PGMEA added was 47.1 to 47.1 parts by mass. The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Example 10 and Comparative Examples 13 to 15 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the parts were changed to parts by mass.
(実施例11、比較例16~18)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、レーキ色材1とキサンテン系染料1との質量比(レーキ色材1:キサンテン系染料1)が94.2:5.8となるように、レーキ色材1分散液17.3質量部、及びキサンテン系染料1溶液1.06質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、実施例11では感光性バインダー成分2 34.4質量部を、比較例16では比較感光性バインダー成分C1 34.4質量部を、比較例17では比較感光性バインダー成分C4 34.4質量部を、比較例18では比較感光性バインダー成分C6 34.4質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から47.2質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例11及び比較例16~18の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Example 11, Comparative Examples 16 to 18)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the lake coloring material 1 to the xanthene dye 1 (lake coloring material 1: xanthene based) instead of 23.2 parts by mass of the lake coloring material 1 dispersion. In order to make the dye 1) 94.2: 5.8, 17.3 parts by mass of the lake coloring material 1 dispersion and 1.06 parts by mass of the xanthene dye 1 solution were used, and further, the photosensitive binder component 1 32 .1 Instead of 1 part by mass, in Example 11, the photosensitive binder component 2 34.4 parts by mass, in Comparative Example 16, the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 34.4 parts by mass, and in Comparative Example 17, the comparative photosensitive binder component. Examples were used except that 34.4 parts by mass of C4 was used and 34.4 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used in Comparative Example 18 and the amount of PGMEA added was changed from 44.7 parts by mass to 47.2 parts by mass. In the same manner as in No. 1, photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 11 and Comparative Examples 16 to 18 were obtained.
(実施例12、比較例19~21)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、レーキ色材1とキサンテン系染料2との質量比(レーキ色材1:キサンテン系染料2)が94.2:5.8となるように、レーキ色材1分散液17.3質量部、及びキサンテン系染料2溶液1.06質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、実施例12では感光性バインダー成分2 34.4質量部を、比較例19では比較感光性バインダー成分C1 34.4質量部を、比較例20では比較感光性バインダー成分C4 34.4質量部を、比較例21では比較感光性バインダー成分C6 34.4質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から47.2質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例12及び比較例19~21の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Example 12, Comparative Examples 19 to 21)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the lake coloring material 1 and the xanthene dye 2 (lake coloring material 1: xanthene based) instead of 23.2 parts by mass of the lake coloring material 1 dispersion. To make the dye 2) 94.2: 5.8, use 17.3 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion and 1.06 parts by mass of the xanthene dye 2 solution, and further, the photosensitive binder component 1 32. .1 Instead of 1 part by mass, in Example 12, the photosensitive binder component 2 34.4 parts by mass, in Comparative Example 19, the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 34.4 parts by mass, and in Comparative Example 20, the comparative photosensitive binder component. Example 21 except that 34.4 parts by mass of C4 was used and 34.4 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used in Comparative Example 21 and the amount of PGMEA added was changed from 44.7 parts by mass to 47.2 parts by mass. In the same manner as in No. 1, photosensitive colored resin compositions of Example 12 and Comparative Examples 19 to 21 were obtained.
(比較例22~23)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、塩基性処理PB15:6とPV23との質量比(塩基性処理PB15:6 :PV23)が76.5:23.5となるように、PB15:6分散液17.4質量部、及びPV23分散液5.35質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、比較例22では感光性バインダー成分2 32.2質量部を、比較例23では比較感光性バインダー成分C5 32.2質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から44.9質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、比較例22~23の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Comparative Examples 22 to 23)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the basic treatment PB15: 6 to PV23 (basic treatment PB15: 6: PV23) was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion. ) Was 76.5: 23.5 by mass of 17.4 parts by mass of PB15: 6 dispersion and 5.35 parts by mass of PV23 dispersion, and further to 32.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component. Instead, in Comparative Example 22, the photosensitive binder component 2 32.2 parts by mass was used, and in Comparative Example 23, the comparative photosensitive binder component C5 32.2 parts by mass was used, and the amount of PGMEA added was 44.7 parts by mass to 44. The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Comparative Examples 22 to 23 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the content was changed to 9 parts by mass.
(実施例13、比較例24~26)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、レーキ色材1と塩基性処理PB15:6との質量比(レーキ色材1 :塩基性処理PB15:6)が59.6:40.4となるように、レーキ色材1分散液18.3質量部、及びPB15:6分散液12.4質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、実施例13では感光性バインダー成分2 28.7質量部を、比較例24では比較感光性バインダー成分C1 28.7質量部を、比較例25では比較感光性バインダー成分C4 28.7質量部を、比較例26では比較感光性バインダー成分C6 28.7質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から40.6質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例13及び比較例24~26の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Example 13, Comparative Examples 24-26)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the rake coloring material 1 to the basic treatment PB 15: 6 was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion (lake coloring material 1: 18.3 parts by mass of rake coloring material 1 dispersion and 12.4 parts by mass of PB15: 6 dispersion were used so that the basic treatment PB15: 6) was 59.6: 40.4, and further photosensitive. Binder component 1 Instead of 32.1 parts by mass, in Example 13, the photosensitive binder component 2 28.7 parts by mass was compared, in Comparative Example 24, the comparative photosensitive binder component C1 28.7 parts by mass was compared, and in Comparative Example 25, the comparison was made. 28.7 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component C4 was used, and 28.7 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C6 was used in Comparative Example 26, except that the amount of PGMEA added was changed from 44.7 parts by mass to 40.6 parts by mass. Obtained the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Example 13 and Comparative Examples 24 to 26 in the same manner as in Example 1.
(比較例27~28)
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、レーキ色材1分散液23.2質量部に代えて、塩基性処理PB15:6とPV23との質量比(塩基性処理PB15:6 :PV23)が92.5:7.5となるように、PB15:6分散液34.8質量部、及びPV23分散液2.82質量部を用い、更に、感光性バインダー成分1 32.1質量部に代えて、比較例27では感光性バインダー成分2 25.6質量部を、比較例28では比較感光性バインダー成分C5 25.6質量部を用い、PGMEAの添加量を44.7質量部から36.8質量部に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、比較例27~28の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Comparative Examples 27 to 28)
In the preparation of the photosensitive coloring resin composition of Example 1, the mass ratio of the basic treatment PB15: 6 to PV23 (basic treatment PB15: 6: PV23) was replaced with 23.2 parts by mass of the rake coloring material 1 dispersion. ) Was 92.5: 7.5 by mass of 34.8 parts by mass of PB15: 6 dispersion and 2.82 parts by mass of PV23 dispersion, and further to 32.1 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component. Instead, in Comparative Example 27, 25.6 parts by mass of the photosensitive binder component was used, and in Comparative Example 28, 25.6 parts by mass of the comparative photosensitive binder component C5 was used, and the amount of PGMEA added was 44.7 parts by mass to 36. The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Comparative Examples 27 to 28 were obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition was changed to 8 parts by mass.
(実施例1-2~9―2、比較例1―2~10―2)
 実施例1~9及び比較例1~10の感光性着色樹脂組成物の調製において、調製例1のレーキ色材1分散液に代えて、調製例7のレーキ色材4分散液を用いた以外は、実施例1~9及び比較例1~10と同様にして、実施例1-2~9-2及び比較例1-2~10-2の感光性着色樹脂組成物を得た。
(Examples 1-2 to 9-2, Comparative Examples 1-2 to 10-2)
In the preparation of the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10, the rake colorant 4 dispersion of Preparation Example 7 was used instead of the rake colorant 1 dispersion of Preparation Example 1. Obtained photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 1-2 to 9-2 and Comparative Examples 1-2 to 10-2 in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 9 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10.
[評価方法]
<着色層形状>
 実施例1の感光性着色樹脂組成物を、厚み0.7mmのガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)社製、「NA35」)上に、ポストベーク後の膜厚が2.5μmとなるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布した後、ホットプレートを用いて80℃で3分間加熱乾燥を行った。その後、60μmのライン&スペースを形成するフォトマスクを介し、超高圧水銀灯を用いて60mJ/cmの紫外線を照射し、次いで、アルカリ現像液として0.05質量%水酸化カリウム水溶液を用いて60秒間シャワー現像した。その後230℃のクリーンオーブンで30分間ポストベークすることにより、ガラス基板上に60μmのライン&スペースのパターンで着色層が形成されたパターン形成基板を作製した。
 こうして作製したパターン形成基板上に、各実施例及び各比較例の感光性着色樹脂組成物をそれぞれポストベーク後の膜厚が2.5μmとなるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布した後、ホットプレートを用いて90℃で3分間加熱乾燥を行った。その後、フォトマスクを介さずに超高圧水銀灯を用いて60mJ/cmの紫外線を照射した後、230℃のクリーンオーブンで30分間ポストベークすることにより、60μmのパターン間に、各実施例又は各比較例の感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化膜である着色層を形成した。当該着色層を形成した後、KLA-Tencor社製触針式プロファイラー『P-17』の膜厚計でパターンプロファイルを測定した。下地パターンの中心を基準とし、中心から15μm離れたところと中心部分との膜厚差を求め、下記評価基準により評価した。
(着色層形状評価基準)
A:膜厚差が0.05μm未満
B:膜厚差が0.05μm以上0.1μm未満
C:膜厚差が0.1μm以上
[Evaluation methods]
<Colored layer shape>
The photosensitive colored resin composition of Example 1 was placed on a glass substrate (manufactured by NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) having a thickness of 0.7 mm so that the film thickness after post-baking was 2.5 μm. After applying using a spin coater, the mixture was heated and dried at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes using a hot plate. Then, through a photomask forming a line & space of 60 μm, ultraviolet rays of 60 mJ / cm 2 are irradiated using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, and then 60 by 0.05 mass% potassium hydroxide aqueous solution is used as an alkaline developer. Shower developed for seconds. Then, by post-baking in a clean oven at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes, a pattern-forming substrate in which a colored layer was formed with a pattern of 60 μm line and space was produced on the glass substrate.
The photosensitive colored resin compositions of each Example and each Comparative Example were applied onto the pattern-forming substrate thus produced using a spin coater so that the film thickness after post-baking was 2.5 μm, and then a hot plate was applied. Was heated and dried at 90 ° C. for 3 minutes. Then, after irradiating 60 mJ / cm 2 of ultraviolet rays with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp without using a photomask, post-baking in a clean oven at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes allows each example or each to be between 60 μm patterns. A colored layer, which is a cured film of the photosensitive colored resin composition of the comparative example, was formed. After forming the colored layer, the pattern profile was measured with a film thickness meter of a stylus type profiler "P-17" manufactured by KLA-Tencor. Using the center of the base pattern as a reference, the film thickness difference between the portion 15 μm away from the center and the central portion was determined and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
(Colored layer shape evaluation criteria)
A: Film thickness difference is less than 0.05 μm B: Film thickness difference is 0.05 μm or more and less than 0.1 μm C: Film thickness difference is 0.1 μm or more
<現像残渣評価>
 実施例及び比較例の感光性着色樹脂組成物をそれぞれ、厚み0.7mmのガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)社製、「NA35」)上に、スピンコーターを用いて塗布した後、ホットプレートを用いて60℃で3分間乾燥することにより、厚さ2.5μmの着色層を形成した。上記着色層が形成されたガラス板を、アルカリ現像液として0.05質量%水酸化カリウム水溶液を用いて60秒間シャワー現像した。現像後の上記着色層の形成部を目視により観察した後、エタノールを含ませたレンズクリーナー(東レ社製、商品名トレシーMKクリーンクロス)で十分に拭き取り、そのレンズクリーナーの着色度合いを目視で観察し、下記評価基準により評価した。
(現像残渣評価基準)
 A:目視により現像残渣が確認されず、レンズクリーナーが全く着色しなかった
 B:目視により現像残渣が確認されず、レンズクリーナーの着色がわずかに確認された
 C:目視により現像残渣がわずかに確認され、レンズクリーナーの着色が確認された
 D:目視により現像残渣が確認され、レンズクリーナーの着色が確認された
<Evaluation of development residue>
The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were each applied on a glass substrate (manufactured by NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) having a thickness of 0.7 mm using a spin coater, and then a hot plate was applied. By drying at 60 ° C. for 3 minutes using the above, a colored layer having a thickness of 2.5 μm was formed. The glass plate on which the colored layer was formed was subjected to shower development for 60 seconds using a 0.05 mass% potassium hydroxide aqueous solution as an alkaline developer. After visually observing the formed portion of the colored layer after development, wipe it off sufficiently with a lens cleaner (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc., trade name: Toraysee MK Clean Cloth) soaked in ethanol, and visually observe the degree of coloring of the lens cleaner. Then, it was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
(Development residue evaluation criteria)
A: No development residue was visually confirmed and the lens cleaner was not colored at all. B: No development residue was visually confirmed and the lens cleaner was slightly colored. C: Development residue was slightly confirmed by visual inspection. D: The development residue was visually confirmed and the coloring of the lens cleaner was confirmed.
<輝度>
 実施例及び比較例の感光性着色樹脂組成物をそれぞれ、厚み0.7mmのガラス基板(NHテクノグラス(株)製、「NA35」)上に、ポストベーク後の色度がy=0.099になるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布した。その後、80℃のホットプレート上で3分間加熱乾燥を行い、フォトマスクを介さずに超高圧水銀灯を用いて60mJ/cmの紫外線を照射し、次いで230℃のクリーンオーブンで30分間ポストベークすることによって硬化膜(着色膜)を得た。得られた着色基板の輝度(Y)をオリンパス社製「顕微分光測定装置OSP-SP200」を用いて測定し、下記評価基準により評価した。
(輝度評価)
A:輝度(Y)が13.0以上
B:輝度(Y)が12.0以上13.0未満
C:輝度(Y)が12.0未満
<Brightness>
The photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples were placed on a glass substrate (manufactured by NH Techno Glass Co., Ltd., “NA35”) having a thickness of 0.7 mm, respectively, and the chromaticity after post-baking was y = 0.099. It was applied using a spin coater so as to become. After that, it is heated and dried on a hot plate at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes, irradiated with ultraviolet rays of 60 mJ / cm 2 using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp without a photomask, and then post-baked in a clean oven at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes. As a result, a cured film (colored film) was obtained. The brightness (Y) of the obtained colored substrate was measured using a "microspectroscopy measuring device OSP-SP200" manufactured by Olympus Corporation, and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
(Brightness evaluation)
A: Brightness (Y) is 13.0 or more B: Brightness (Y) is 12.0 or more and less than 13.0 C: Brightness (Y) is less than 12.0
<耐熱性>
 上述した輝度の評価と同様の方法により硬化膜(着色膜)を得た後、得られた着色膜を、更に240℃のクリーンオーブンで25分間ポストベークし、この着色膜の色度(L、a、b)を測定し、その後、更に240℃のクリーンオーブンで50分間ポストベークし、得られた着色膜の色度(L、a、b)を再び測定した。
  下記式により、240℃25分後から75分後にかけての着色膜の色度変化を評価した。
      ΔEab={(L-L+(a-a+(b-b1/2
ΔEabの値が小さいほど、耐熱性に優れると評価される。ΔEabが3.0未満のものであれば実用上問題ないと判断される。
(耐熱性評価基準)
A:ΔEabが2.0未満
B:ΔEabが2.0以上3.0未満
C:ΔEabが3.0以上
<Heat resistance>
After obtaining a cured film (colored film) by the same method as the above-mentioned evaluation of luminance, the obtained colored film is further post-baked in a clean oven at 240 ° C. for 25 minutes, and the chromaticity (L 0 ) of this colored film is obtained. , A 0 , b 0 ) were measured, and then post-baked in a clean oven at 240 ° C. for 50 minutes, and the chromaticity (L 1 , 1 , b 1 ) of the obtained colored film was measured again.
The change in chromaticity of the colored film from 25 minutes to 75 minutes at 240 ° C. was evaluated by the following formula.
ΔEab = {(L 1 − L 0 ) 2 + (a 1 − a 0 ) 2 + (b 1 − b 0 ) 2 } 1/2
It is evaluated that the smaller the value of ΔEab, the better the heat resistance. If ΔEab is less than 3.0, it is judged that there is no practical problem.
(Heat resistance evaluation standard)
A: ΔEab is less than 2.0 B: ΔEab is 2.0 or more and less than 3.0 C: ΔEab is 3.0 or more
 以下の表2~5において、金属レーキ色材3とは、合成例4で得られたキサンテン系金属レーキ色材3を意味し、PB15:6とは、合成例5で得られた塩基性処理PB15:6を意味し、PV23とは、市販のC.I.ピグメントバイオレット23を意味する。また、分散剤のA1とは、合成例6で得られた酸性分散剤A1を意味し、分散剤のB1とは、合成例7で得られた酸性分散剤B1を意味する。 In Tables 2 to 5 below, the metal lake coloring material 3 means the xanthene-based metal lake coloring material 3 obtained in Synthesis Example 4, and PB15: 6 means the basic treatment obtained in Synthesis Example 5. It means PB15: 6, and PV23 is a commercially available C.I. I. Means Pigment Violet 23. Further, the dispersant A1 means the acidic dispersant A1 obtained in Synthesis Example 6, and the dispersant B1 means the acidic dispersant B1 obtained in Synthesis Example 7.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000034
[結果のまとめ]
 表2~5の結果から、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む色材と、一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を5~25質量%含む高分子構造を有し、重量平均分子量が11000以上であり、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gである共重合体(ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体)を含むバインダー樹脂とを組み合わせて含む実施例1~13及び実施例1-2~9-2の感光性着色樹脂組成物を用いて形成された着色層は、高輝度であり、しかも、平坦性に優れ、現像残渣の発生が抑制されたものであることが示された。
 また、表2に示す実施例1~9と比較例1~10との比較、及び表5に示す実施例1-2~9-2と比較例1-2~10-2との比較から、前記一般式(1)で表されるレーキ色材であるレーキ色材1、又は前記一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材であるレーキ色材4を含む感光性着色樹脂組成物においては、バインダー樹脂としてヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体を用いると、耐熱性が向上することが示された。
[Summary of results]
From the results of Tables 2 to 5, the structural units derived from the color material containing at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake color materials and the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the general formula (A) are 5 to 5. Binder resin containing a copolymer (hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer) having a polymer structure containing 25% by mass, a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and an acid value of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g. The colored layers formed by using the photosensitive colored resin compositions of Examples 1 to 13 and Examples 1-2 to 9-2, which are contained in combination with the above, have high brightness, excellent flatness, and are developed. It was shown that the generation of the residue was suppressed.
Further, from the comparison between Examples 1 to 9 shown in Table 2 and Comparative Examples 1 to 10, and the comparison between Examples 1-2 to 9-2 and Comparative Examples 1-2 to 10-2 shown in Table 5, In the photosensitive coloring resin composition containing the rake color material 1 which is the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the rake color material 4 which is the rake color material represented by the general formula (2). It has been shown that the heat resistance is improved when a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer is used as the binder resin.
 一方、比較例1~4、13~14、16~17、19~20、24~25及び1-2~4-2では、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含まない比較バインダー樹脂C1~C4のいずれかを用いたため、現像残渣の抑制効果が劣っていた。中でも、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含まず、重量平均分子量が11000未満であり、且つ酸価が130mgKOH/g超過である比較バインダー樹脂C4を用いた比較例4、14、17、20、25及び4-2は、現像残渣の抑制効果が特に劣っていた。
 なお、比較例1~4、13~14、16~17、19~20、24~25及び1-2~4-2において、バインダー樹脂として用いた共重合体がヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含有しないにも関わらず、着色層の平坦性に優れていたのは、共重合体の酸価が108~147mgKOH/gと比較的高いためであると考えられる。一方、本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物では、バインダー樹脂として用いるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体が、上記特定量でヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含むことにより、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gの範囲内であれば、酸価が比較的高くても現像残渣の発生が抑制される。例えば、実施例8、9は、使用したバインダー樹脂8、9の酸価が比較例1~3と同程度に高いものの、現像残渣の発生が抑制されている。本発明の感光性着色樹脂組成物では、バインダー樹脂として用いられるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位含有共重合体が上記特定量でヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含むことにより、樹脂組成物中のバインダー樹脂以外の現像性の低い成分がヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位と相互作用し、現像性の低い成分を巻き込んで現像されるようになるため、残渣の発生が抑制されると考えられる。バインダー樹脂がヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を十分に含まず、高い酸価を有する場合は、バインダー樹脂単体での現像性が高くなりすぎて、現像性の低い成分を置き去りにすることで残渣が発生しやすくなると考えられる。比較バインダー樹脂C1~C3を使用した比較例では、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含有しないため、現像残渣の発生が酸価の影響を受けやすく、酸価108mgKOH/g以上のときに現像残渣が発生したと考えられる。
On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1 to 4, 13 to 14, 16 to 17, 19 to 20, 24 to 25 and 1-2 to 4-2, the comparative binder resins C1 to C4 containing no hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit were used. Since either one was used, the effect of suppressing the development residue was inferior. Among them, Comparative Examples 4, 14, 17, 20, 25 using the comparative binder resin C4 which does not contain hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate units, has a weight average molecular weight of less than 11000, and has an acid value of more than 130 mgKOH / g. And 4-2 were particularly inferior in the effect of suppressing the development residue.
In Comparative Examples 1 to 4, 13 to 14, 16 to 17, 19 to 20, 24 to 25, and 1-2 to 4-2, the copolymer used as the binder resin contained a hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit. It is considered that the reason why the colored layer was excellent in flatness even though it was not contained was that the acid value of the copolymer was relatively high at 108 to 147 mgKOH / g. On the other hand, in the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer used as the binder resin contains the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the above-mentioned specific amount, so that the acid value is 60. Within the range of ~ 130 mgKOH / g, the generation of development residue is suppressed even if the acid value is relatively high. For example, in Examples 8 and 9, the acid values of the binder resins 8 and 9 used are as high as those of Comparative Examples 1 to 3, but the generation of development residues is suppressed. In the photosensitive colored resin composition of the present invention, the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit-containing copolymer used as the binder resin contains the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit in the above-mentioned specific amount, whereby the binder in the resin composition is contained. It is considered that the generation of residue is suppressed because the component having low developability other than the resin interacts with the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit and the component having low developability is involved in the development. If the binder resin does not contain enough hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate units and has a high acid value, the developability of the binder resin alone becomes too high, and the components with low developability are left behind, resulting in a residue. It is thought that it is likely to occur. In the comparative example using the comparative binder resins C1 to C3, since the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit is not contained, the generation of the development residue is easily affected by the acid value, and when the acid value is 108 mgKOH / g or more, the development residue is generated. It is probable that it occurred.
 比較例5及び5-2では、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート単位を含まず、重量平均分子量が11000未満である比較バインダー樹脂C5を用いたため、比較例6~10、15、18、21、26及び6-2~10-2では、重量平均分子量が11000未満である比較バインダー樹脂C6~C10を用いたため、それぞれ着色層の平坦性が劣っていた。
 比較例11~12、22~23及び27~28では、色材として顔料のみを用いたため、着色層の輝度が劣っていた。なお、比較例12、23及び28では、比較例5と同様の比較バインダー樹脂C5を用いたが、着色層の平坦性は優れていた。これにより、色材として顔料を用いる場合には、着色層の平坦性が損なわれるという問題が発生しにくいことが明らかにされた。
In Comparative Examples 5 and 5-2, since the comparative binder resin C5 which does not contain the hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate unit and has a weight average molecular weight of less than 11000 was used, Comparative Examples 6 to 10, 15, 18, 21, 26 and In 6-2 to 10-2, the comparative binder resins C6 to C10 having a weight average molecular weight of less than 11000 were used, so that the flatness of the colored layer was inferior.
In Comparative Examples 11 to 12, 22 to 23 and 27 to 28, the brightness of the colored layer was inferior because only the pigment was used as the coloring material. In Comparative Examples 12, 23 and 28, the same comparative binder resin C5 as in Comparative Example 5 was used, but the flatness of the colored layer was excellent. As a result, it was clarified that when a pigment is used as a coloring material, the problem of impairing the flatness of the colored layer is unlikely to occur.
 1 基板
 2 遮光部
 3 着色層
 3R 赤色着色層
 3G 緑色着色層
 3B 青色着色層
 3B’ 青色塗膜
 10 カラーフィルタ
 20 対向基板
 30 液晶層
 40 液晶表示装置
 50 有機保護層
 60 無機酸化膜
 71 透明陽極
 72 正孔注入層
 73 正孔輸送層
 74 発光層
 75 電子注入層
 76 陰極
 80 有機発光体
100 有機発光表示装置
1 Substrate 2 Light-shielding part 3 Colored layer 3R Red colored layer 3G Green colored layer 3B Blue colored layer 3B'Blue coating 10 Color filter 20 Opposing substrate 30 Liquid crystal layer 40 Liquid crystal display device 50 Organic protective layer 60 Inorganic oxide film 71 Transparent anode 72 Hole injection layer 73 Hole transport layer 74 Light emitting layer 75 Electron injection layer 76 Cathode 80 Organic light emitter 100 Organic light emission display device

Claims (9)

  1.  色材、バインダー樹脂、モノマー、光開始剤、および溶剤を含有するカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物であって、
     前記色材が、染料及びレーキ色材よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含み、
     前記バインダー樹脂が、下記一般式(A)で表されるヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位を5~25質量%含む高分子構造を有し、重量平均分子量が11000以上であり、酸価が60~130mgKOH/gである共重合体を含む、カラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (一般式(A)中、Rはメチル基又は水素原子を表し、Rは、炭素数1~4のアルキレン基を表す。)
    A photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter containing a coloring material, a binder resin, a monomer, a photoinitiator, and a solvent.
    The coloring material contains at least one selected from the group consisting of dyes and lake coloring materials.
    The binder resin has a polymer structure containing 5 to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate represented by the following general formula (A), has a weight average molecular weight of 11,000 or more, and has an acid value. A photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter, which comprises a copolymer having a molecular weight of 60 to 130 mgKOH / g.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    (In the general formula ( A ), RA represents a methyl group or a hydrogen atom, and RB represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.)
  2.  前記色材が、レーキ色材を含む、請求項1に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to claim 1, wherein the coloring material contains a lake coloring material.
  3.  前記色材が、下記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材を含む、請求項1又は2に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (一般式(1)中、Aは、Nと直接結合する炭素原子がπ結合を有しないa価の有機基であって、当該有機基は、少なくともNと直接結合する末端に飽和脂肪族炭化水素基を有する脂肪族炭化水素基、又は当該脂肪族炭化水素基を有する芳香族基を表し、炭素鎖中にヘテロ原子が含まれていてもよい。Bc-はc価のポリ酸アニオンを表す。R~Rは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、RiiとRiii、RivとRが結合して環構造を形成してもよい。Rvi及びRviiは各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基を表す。Arは置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族基を表す。複数あるR~Rvii及びArはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
     a及びcは2以上の整数、b及びdは1以上の整数を表す。eは0又は1であり、eが0のとき結合は存在しない。f及びgは0以上4以下の整数を表し、f+e及びg+eは0以上4以下である。複数あるe、f及びgはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (一般式(2)中、R~RVIは各々独立に水素原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表し、RとRII、RIIIとRIV、RとRVIが結合して環構造を形成してもよい。RVII及びRVIIIは各々独立に、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基を表す。Arは置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香族複素環基を表し、複数あるR~RVIII及びArはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。Em-はm価のポリ酸アニオンを表す。
     mは2以上の整数を表す。jは0又は1であり、jが0のとき結合は存在しない。k及びlは0以上4以下の整数を表し、k+j及びl+jは0以上4以下である。複数あるj、k及びlはそれぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。)
    The photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the coloring material contains a rake coloring material represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    (In the general formula (1), A is an a-valent organic group in which the carbon atom directly bonded to N does not have a π bond, and the organic group is at least saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon at the terminal directly bonded to N. It represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a hydrogen group or an aromatic group having the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and a hetero atom may be contained in the carbon chain. B c- represents a c-valent polyacid anion. Represented. R i to R v each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and represents R ii and R ii i , and R iv and R. v may be bonded to form a ring structure. R vi and R vii may independently have an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, a halogen atom or a cyano. Representing a group. Ar 1 represents a divalent aromatic group which may have a substituent. A plurality of Ri to R vii and Ar 1 may be the same or different from each other.
    a and c represent integers of 2 or more, and b and d represent integers of 1 or more. e is 0 or 1, and when e is 0, there is no bond. f and g represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and f + e and g + e are 0 or more and 4 or less. The plurality of e, f, and g may be the same or different from each other. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    (In the general formula (2), RI to RVI each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and RI and R represent each. II , R III and R IV , R V and R VI may be bonded to form a ring structure. R VII and R VIII may independently have an alkyl group and a substituent which may have a substituent. It represents an alkoxy group, a halogen atom or a cyano group which may have, Ar 2 represents a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and a plurality of RI to R VIII and Ar 2 are represented. They may be the same or different. Em- represents an m-valent polyacid anion.
    m represents an integer of 2 or more. j is 0 or 1, and when j is 0, there is no bond. k and l represent integers of 0 or more and 4 or less, and k + j and l + j are 0 or more and 4 or less. The plurality of j, k, and l may be the same or different. )
  4.  前記色材が、更に、キサンテン系染料、前記一般式(1)又は一般式(2)で表されるレーキ色材とは異なるキサンテン系染料のレーキ色材、及びC.I.ピグメントブルー15:6よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項3に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The color material is further a xanthene dye, a rake color material of a xanthene dye different from the rake color material represented by the general formula (1) or the general formula (2), and C.I. I. The photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to claim 3, which comprises at least one selected from the group consisting of Pigment Blue 15: 6.
  5.  前記キサンテン系染料が、下記一般式(3)又は一般式(4)で表されるキサンテン系染料であり、
     前記キサンテン系染料のレーキ色材が、下記一般式(5)で表されるキサンテン系染料の金属レーキ色材である、請求項4に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (一般式(3)中、R及びRは各々独立にアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R及びRは各々独立にアリール基又はヘテロアリール基である。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    (一般式(4)中、R及びRは各々独立に、置換基を有していても良い脂肪族炭化水素基又は芳香族炭化水素基であり、R及びRは各々独立に、置換基を有していても良い芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基であって、R及びRの少なくとも1つの芳香族炭化水素基又は芳香族複素環基は脂肪族炭化水素基で置換されており、R及びRが互いに異なる。L及びLは各々独立に、直接結合、-SO-、又は-CO-であり、Rはハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素基である。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    (一般式(5)中、R1’、R2’、R3’及びR4’は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基を表し、R1’とR3’、R2’とR4’がそれぞれ結合して環構造を形成してもよく、R1’とキサンテン環の5位の炭素原子、R3’とキサンテン環の7位の炭素原子、R2’とキサンテン環の4位の炭素原子、又は、R4’とキサンテン環の2位の炭素原子がそれぞれ結合して環構造を形成してもよい。上記アリール基、又はヘテロアリール基が有する水素原子が、酸性基又はその塩、若しくはハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい。R5’は、酸性基又はその塩を表し、xは0~5の整数である。但し、一般式(5)は、酸性基又はその塩を少なくとも2つ有し、そのうち1つは分子内塩を形成する。)
    The xanthene dye is a xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (3) or general formula (4).
    The photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to claim 4, wherein the rake coloring material of the xanthene dye is a metal rake coloring material of the xanthene dye represented by the following general formula (5).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    (In the general formula (3), R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl groups or aryl groups, respectively, and R 3 and R 4 are independently aryl groups or hetero aryl groups, respectively.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    (In the general formula (4), R 5 and R 6 are independently aliphatic hydrocarbon groups or aromatic hydrocarbon groups which may have a substituent, and R 7 and R 8 are independent of each other. , An aromatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, wherein at least one aromatic hydrocarbon group or aromatic heterocyclic group of R 7 and R 8 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon. Substituentally substituted, R 7 and R 8 are different from each other. L 1 and L 2 are independently directly bonded, -SO 2- , or -CO-, and R 9 is a halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Is the basis.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    (In the general formula (5), R 1' , R 2' , R 3'and R 4'independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, respectively, and R 1'and R 3' , R 2'and R 4'may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure, and R 1'and the 5-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, R 3'and the 7-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, respectively. R 2'and the 4-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring, or R 4'and the 2-position carbon atom of the xanthene ring may be bonded to form a ring structure. The above aryl group or heteroaryl group may form a ring structure. The hydrogen atom to have may be substituted with an acidic group or a salt thereof, or a halogen atom. R 5'represents an acidic group or a salt thereof, and x is an integer of 0 to 5. However, the general formula ( 5) has at least two acidic groups or salts thereof, one of which forms an intramolecular salt.)
  6.  さらに分散剤を含有する、請求項1乃至5のいずれか一項に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further containing a dispersant.
  7.  請求項1乃至6のいずれか一項に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物。 A cured product of the photosensitive coloring resin composition for a color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
  8.  基板と、当該基板上に設けられた着色層とを少なくとも備えるカラーフィルタであって、当該着色層の少なくとも1つが、請求項1乃至6のいずれか一項に記載のカラーフィルタ用感光性着色樹脂組成物の硬化物である、カラーフィルタ。 A color filter including at least a substrate and a coloring layer provided on the substrate, wherein at least one of the coloring layers is the photosensitive coloring resin for a color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 6. A color filter that is a cured product of the composition.
  9.  請求項8に記載のカラーフィルタを有する、表示装置。 A display device having the color filter according to claim 8.
PCT/JP2021/028530 2020-08-11 2021-08-02 Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured object, color filter, and display device WO2022034816A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180057622.6A CN116113649A (en) 2020-08-11 2021-08-02 Photosensitive coloring resin composition for color filter, cured product, color filter, and display device
JP2022542802A JPWO2022034816A1 (en) 2020-08-11 2021-08-02

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-135545 2020-08-11
JP2020135545 2020-08-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022034816A1 true WO2022034816A1 (en) 2022-02-17

Family

ID=80247834

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/028530 WO2022034816A1 (en) 2020-08-11 2021-08-02 Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured object, color filter, and display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022034816A1 (en)
CN (1) CN116113649A (en)
TW (1) TW202219192A (en)
WO (1) WO2022034816A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011099887A (en) * 2009-11-04 2011-05-19 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Dyestuff coloring photosensitive composition for color filter, color filter and method for manufacturing the color filter, and liquid crystal display device and organic el display including the color filter
JP2011102832A (en) * 2009-11-10 2011-05-26 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive composition, color filter using the same, liquid crystal display device and organic el display
JP2011150195A (en) * 2010-01-22 2011-08-04 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Colored resin composition, color filter and organic electro-luminescence display using the same
JP2012252319A (en) * 2011-05-11 2012-12-20 Jsr Corp Coloring composition, color filter, and display element
JP2013218207A (en) * 2012-04-11 2013-10-24 Jsr Corp Radiation-sensitive colored composition, color filter and display element
KR20140106281A (en) * 2013-02-26 2014-09-03 동우 화인켐 주식회사 Colored photosensitive resin composition
WO2019031292A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured product of same, color filter and display device

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5838923B2 (en) * 2012-06-22 2016-01-06 Jsr株式会社 Coloring composition, color filter and display element
TWI719989B (en) * 2015-07-07 2021-03-01 日商Dnp精細化工股份有限公司 Pigment dispersion for color filter, coloring composition for color filter, color filter and display device
JP6862340B2 (en) * 2016-03-16 2021-04-21 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル Colored resin compositions for color filters, pigment dispersions, color filters, and display devices
JP6917950B2 (en) * 2017-08-23 2021-08-11 東友ファインケム株式会社Dongwoo Fine−Chem Co., Ltd. Color curable resin composition, color filter, and display device

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011099887A (en) * 2009-11-04 2011-05-19 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Dyestuff coloring photosensitive composition for color filter, color filter and method for manufacturing the color filter, and liquid crystal display device and organic el display including the color filter
JP2011102832A (en) * 2009-11-10 2011-05-26 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive composition, color filter using the same, liquid crystal display device and organic el display
JP2011150195A (en) * 2010-01-22 2011-08-04 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Colored resin composition, color filter and organic electro-luminescence display using the same
JP2012252319A (en) * 2011-05-11 2012-12-20 Jsr Corp Coloring composition, color filter, and display element
JP2013218207A (en) * 2012-04-11 2013-10-24 Jsr Corp Radiation-sensitive colored composition, color filter and display element
KR20140106281A (en) * 2013-02-26 2014-09-03 동우 화인켐 주식회사 Colored photosensitive resin composition
WO2019031292A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 株式会社Dnpファインケミカル Photosensitive coloring resin composition, cured product of same, color filter and display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022034816A1 (en) 2022-02-17
CN116113649A (en) 2023-05-12
TW202219192A (en) 2022-05-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5646663B2 (en) Colored resin composition for color filter, color material dispersion, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic light emitting display device
TWI589995B (en) Color resin composition for color filters, color filter, and display device
CN108700686B (en) Colored resin composition for color filter, pigment dispersion liquid, color filter, and display device
CN108700811B (en) Resin composition, color filter and image display device
CN109415572B (en) Color material dispersion liquid, colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and light-emitting display device
KR102021678B1 (en) Coloring material dispersion liquid for color filter, color resin composition for color filter, color material, color filter, liquid crystal display apparatus, and light emitting display apparatus
TWI634149B (en) Non-aqueous disperant, color material dispersion liquid, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic light-emitting display device
TW201833243A (en) Color material dispersion liquid for color filter, color resin composition for color filter, color filter and display device
TW202104172A (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured product, color filter and display device
JP6841283B2 (en) Coloring composition, color filter and its manufacturing method, liquid crystal display device, and light emission display device
TWI833703B (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition and cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
JP5942365B2 (en) Color filter pigment dispersion, color filter negative resist composition and method for producing the same, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic light emitting display device
JP7123660B2 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition and cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
WO2022034816A1 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition for color filter, cured object, color filter, and display device
TWI827678B (en) Color material dispersion liquid, colored resin composition, cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
TWI772396B (en) Photosensitive color resin composition, cured product thereof, color filter, and display device
WO2022270357A1 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition, cured product, color filter and display device
WO2023140087A1 (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition, cured article, color filter, and display device
JP6895294B2 (en) Color material dispersion liquid, color material, colored resin composition, color filter, and display device
TW202321377A (en) Halogenated phthalocyanine color material, colored curable composition, color filter and display device
TW202313742A (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter and display device
TW202328237A (en) Photosensitive colored resin composition, color filter and display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21855895

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022542802

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21855895

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1